E-Mu Mo'Phatt Keys MK-6 Operating instructions

E-Mu Mo'Phatt Keys MK-6 Operating instructions

Operation Manual

© 2002 E-MU / ENSONIQ

All Rights Reserved

FI12324 Rev. B

E-MU World Headquarters

E-MU / ENSONIQ

1600 Green Hills Road

Scotts Valley, CA USA

95066

Telephone: 831-438-1921

Fax: 831-438-8612

Internet: www.emu.com

Europe, Africa, Middle East

E-MU / ENSONIQ

Suite 6, Adam Ferguson House

Eskmills Industrial Park

Musselburgh, East Lothian

Scotland, EH21 7PQ

Tel: +44 (0) 131-653-6556

Fax: +44 (0) 131-665-0473

Important Notice:

In order to obtain warranty service on your MK-6 unit, the serial number sticker must be intact and you must have a sales receipt or other proof of purchase. If there is no serial number sticker on the MK-6, please contact E-MU Systems at once.

This product is covered under one or more of the following U.S. patents:

4,404,529; 4,506,579; 4,699,038; 4,987,600; 5,013,105; 5,072,645;

5,111,727; 5,144,676; 5,170,367; 5,248,845; 5,303,309; 5,317,104;

5,342,990; 5,430,244 and foreign patents and/or pending patents. All other trademarks belong to their respective companies. Specifications and features are subject to change without notice.

MK-6 Operation Manual

i

Table of Contents

ii

E-MU Systems

Introduction ............................................................................. 1

Product Description .......................................................................................1

Important Safety Instructions .................................................. 3

Safety Instructions - German ................................................... 6

Safety Instructions - French ..................................................... 8

Setup ...................................................................................... 13

Unpacking ....................................................................................................13

Connection Instructions..............................................................................14

Basic Setup ..............................................................................................14

Performance Setup ..................................................................................15

Studio Setup ............................................................................................16

Instant Gratification ............................................................... 19

Playing Demo Sequences ........................................................................19

Auditioning Presets .................................................................................20

Selecting and Quick Editing Presets .......................................................20

Exploring Beats Mode .............................................................................22

Exploring the Master Arpeggiator ...........................................................24

Multi-Channel Arpeggiator ....................................................................26

Time to Save? .......................................................................................28

Basic Operations .................................................................... 29

Power Switch ...........................................................................................29

Volume Control ......................................................................................29

Channel +/- Buttons ...............................................................................29

Data Entry Control .................................................................................29

Cursor Buttons ........................................................................................30

Pitch & Mod Wheels ...............................................................................30

Edit Section .................................................................................................. 30

Global Button ......................................................................................... 30

Controllers Button .................................................................................. 30

Arp/Beats Button .................................................................................... 31

MIDI Button ........................................................................................... 31

MIDI Panic Button .................................................................................. 31

Audition Button ...................................................................................... 31

Compare Button ..................................................................................... 31

Save/Copy Button ................................................................................... 31

Preset Edit Button ................................................................................... 32

Home/Enter Button ................................................................................ 32

Real-time Controller Knobs ......................................................................... 32

Knob Functions ...................................................................................... 33

Quick Edit mode ................................................................................. 33

Screen View Buttons .................................................................................... 34

Main ........................................................................................................ 34

Multi ....................................................................................................... 34

Mix Screen .............................................................................................. 34

Demo Mode ............................................................................................ 35

Command Functions ................................................................................... 36

Preset Selection ....................................................................................... 36

Trigger Mode ........................................................................................... 36

Preset MenuJump Keys ........................................................................... 36

Main Screen ................................................................................................. 37

MIDI Channel Selection ......................................................................... 37

Preset Selection ....................................................................................... 37

Channel Volume .................................................................................... 38

Channel Pan ........................................................................................... 39

Channel Arpeggiator .............................................................................. 39

Sound Navigator .......................................................................................... 40

Preset Category ....................................................................................... 40

Instrument Category .............................................................................. 40

Multisetups .................................................................................................. 41

Restoring Multisetups ............................................................................. 41

Multisetup Name .................................................................................... 42

Saving Multisetups ................................................................................. 42

Arp/Beats Menu ......................................................................43

Beats ............................................................................................................. 44

Beats Mode .............................................................................................. 46

Status ................................................................................................... 46

Beats Channel ..................................................................................... 46

Trigger Channel .................................................................................. 46

Beats Controllers ..................................................................................... 49

Beat Velocity Group 1-4 ...................................................................... 49

Beat Xpose Group 1-4 ......................................................................... 49

Beat Busy ............................................................................................. 49

Beat Variation ...................................................................................... 50

Beat Variation ...................................................................................... 50

MK-6 Operation Manual

iii

iv

E-MU Systems

Beats Keys Layout ...................................................................................51

1-Bar Trigger Option ...........................................................................51

Beats Keys Offset .....................................................................................52

Beats Part Velocity ..................................................................................52

Beats Part Transpose ...............................................................................53

Beats Part Group .....................................................................................54

Master Riff ...............................................................................................54

Riff Tempo ..............................................................................................55

Riff Controllers .......................................................................................55

MIDI Song Start ......................................................................................56

Arp/Riff MIDI Out ...................................................................................56

Arpeggiators .................................................................................................57

Arp Controllers .......................................................................................58

Arpeggiator Resolution.........................................................................58

Arpeggiator Extension ..........................................................................58

Arpeggiator Velocity.............................................................................58

Arpeggiator Gate ..................................................................................58

Arpeggiator Interval ............................................................................58

Master Arpeggiator Parameters ....................................................................58

Status .......................................................................................................59

Mode .......................................................................................................59

Note Value ..............................................................................................60

Arpeggiator Pattern Speed ......................................................................60

Pattern .....................................................................................................60

Velocity ...................................................................................................61

Gate Time ................................................................................................61

Extension Count .....................................................................................62

Extension Interval ...................................................................................62

Sync .........................................................................................................63

Pre-Delay .................................................................................................63

Duration ..................................................................................................64

Post-Delay ...............................................................................................64

Recycle ....................................................................................................65

Keyboard Thru ........................................................................................65

Latch .......................................................................................................65

Send MIDI System Exclusive Data ...............................................................66

Editing a User Arpeggiator Pattern .........................................................67

Pattern Step Number ...............................................................................67

Key ..........................................................................................................67

Key Offset ............................................................................................68

Tie ........................................................................................................68

Rest ......................................................................................................68

Skip ......................................................................................................68

End .......................................................................................................68

Velocity ...................................................................................................69

Duration ..................................................................................................69

Repeat ......................................................................................................69

User Pattern Name ..................................................................................70

Multichannel Arpeggiating..........................................................................70

Controllers Menu ....................................................................71

Realtime Control Functions ........................................................................ 72

Keyboard Transpose ................................................................................ 72

Keyboard Channel .................................................................................. 72

Local Control On/Off ............................................................................. 72

Keyboard Velocity Curve ........................................................................ 73

Channel Aftertouch On/Off ................................................................... 74

Footswitch Function ............................................................................... 74

Foot Pedal Function ................................................................................ 75

Trigger Buttons Function ........................................................................ 75

Trigger Buttons ....................................................................................... 76

Trigger Button Select ........................................................................... 76

Latch on/off ........................................................................................ 76

MIDI Key ............................................................................................. 76

MIDI Channel ..................................................................................... 76

Velocity ............................................................................................... 76

Preset Select Buttons ............................................................................... 77

Trigger Button Select ........................................................................... 77

Preset Location .................................................................................... 77

Preset Number ..................................................................................... 77

Preset Name ......................................................................................... 77

Category .............................................................................................. 77

Preset Select Send Buttons ...................................................................... 78

Trigger Button Select ........................................................................... 78

Program Change Number ................................................................... 78

Knob Preset Quick-Edit ........................................................................... 79

Real-time Controller Assignment ........................................................... 79

MIDI Footswitch Assign ......................................................................... 80

Calibrate Controllers .............................................................................. 80

Tempo Controller ................................................................................... 81

Base Tempo ............................................................................................. 82

Global Menu ...........................................................................83

Defining Global Parameters......................................................................... 84

Master Transpose/Tune .......................................................................... 84

Master Bend Range ................................................................................. 84

Master Velocity Curve ............................................................................ 85

Mix Output ............................................................................................. 86

Master Effects ............................................................................................... 88

Effects Mode ........................................................................................... 88

Effects Multi Mode Control .................................................................... 88

Master FXA Algorithm ............................................................................ 89

A Effect Types ...................................................................................... 89

FXA Parameters: Decay/HF Damping FxB -> FxA .................................. 90

FXA Send Amounts ................................................................................. 90

Master FXB Algorithm ............................................................................ 90

B Effect Types ...................................................................................... 91

FXB Parameters: Feedback/LFO Rate Delay Time ................................... 91

FXB Send Amounts ................................................................................. 91

MK-6 Operation Manual

v

vi

E-MU Systems

Miscellaneous Parameters ............................................................................92

Edit All Layers Enable .............................................................................92

User Key Tuning .....................................................................................92

Screen Viewing Angle .............................................................................92

MIDI Menu ............................................................................. 93

Keyboard Outputs MIDI .........................................................................94

Knobs Output MIDI ................................................................................94

Transmit MIDI Clock ..............................................................................94

MIDI Enable ............................................................................................94

Receive Program Change ........................................................................95

MIDI Program Change -> Preset .............................................................95

MIDI SysEx ID .........................................................................................96

MIDI SysEx Packet Delay ........................................................................97

Send MIDI System Exclusive Data ..........................................................97

MIDI Mode ..............................................................................................98

Programming Basics .............................................................. 99

Modulation ................................................................................................100

Modulation Sources ...................................................................................101

Random Sources ....................................................................................102

Modulation PatchCords.............................................................................102

Envelope Generators ..................................................................................103

Tempo-based Envelopes ....................................................................104

Envelope Repeat ................................................................................104

Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs) .............................................................105

Clock Modulation ......................................................................................106

Modulation Destinations ...........................................................................108

Modulation Processors ...............................................................................109

Preset Modulation Processors ....................................................................111

Using the Modulation Processors .........................................................113

More Examples ......................................................................................115

Dynamic Filters ..........................................................................................117

What is a Filter? ....................................................................................118

Parametric Filters ..................................................................................121

The Z-Plane Filter ..................................................................................122

Signal Flow .................................................................................................123

MIDI Channels & Real-time Controls .......................................................124

Bank Select Commands ........................................................................126

Stereo Mix Outputs ....................................................................................127

Preset Edit Menu ..................................................................129

Preset Name .......................................................................................... 130

Four Layer Architecture ............................................................................. 130

Selecting Layers .................................................................................... 131

Defining Layer Parameters......................................................................... 132

Selecting an Instrument ....................................................................... 132

Sound Navigator ............................................................................... 132

Defining Key Range .............................................................................. 133

Defining the Velocity Crossfade Range ................................................ 135

Defining the Real-time Crossfade Range .............................................. 137

Transposing the Instrument ................................................................. 140

Tuning .................................................................................................. 141

Background: Transpose vs. Coarse Tuning ....................................... 141

Amplifier ............................................................................................... 141

Volume Envelope ................................................................................. 142

Selecting the Mode ............................................................................ 142

Defining the Volume Envelope ........................................................ 143

Chorusing the Layer ............................................................................. 144

Sound Start Offset and Delay ............................................................... 144

Non-Transpose Mode ........................................................................... 145

Solo Mode ............................................................................................. 145

Assign Group ........................................................................................ 146

Glide ..................................................................................................... 147

Z-Plane Filters ....................................................................................... 148

MK-6 Filter Types .................................................................................. 148

Filter Types ........................................................................................ 148

Filter Parameters ................................................................................ 150

Filter Envelope ...................................................................................... 151

Defining the Filter Envelope ............................................................. 152

Auxiliary Envelope ............................................................................... 152

Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs) ........................................................ 153

Shape ................................................................................................. 153

Sync ................................................................................................... 154

Rate .................................................................................................... 154

Delay ................................................................................................. 156

Variation ........................................................................................... 156

PatchCords ............................................................................................ 157

Modulator Polarity ............................................................................ 158

Pitch Bend Range .................................................................................. 160

Mix Output ........................................................................................... 160

Common Preset Parameters....................................................................... 161

Preset Effects ......................................................................................... 161

FXA Algorithm ...................................................................................... 163

A Effect Types .................................................................................... 163

FXA Parameters ..................................................................................... 164

FXA Send Amounts ............................................................................... 164

FXB Algorithm ...................................................................................... 164

B Effect Types .................................................................................... 164

FXB Parameters ..................................................................................... 165

MK-6 Operation Manual

vii

viii

E-MU Systems

FXB Send Amounts ...............................................................................165

Preset Patchcords ..................................................................................165

Initial Controller Amount ....................................................................167

Keyboard Tuning ..................................................................................168

Preset Links ...........................................................................................170

Preset Tempo Offset ..............................................................................171

Audition Riff Selection ..........................................................................171

Play Solo Layers ....................................................................................171

Effects ................................................................................... 173

Effects Overview.........................................................................................173

The Effects Sends ..................................................................................173

Effect Types ................................................................................................175

Effect Parameters ...................................................................................175

Decay .................................................................................................176

High Frequency Damping .................................................................176

Feedback ............................................................................................176

LFO Rate ............................................................................................176

Delay ..................................................................................................176

Effects Programmed in the Preset ..............................................................177

Master Effects .............................................................................................178

Effects Mode ..........................................................................................180

Flexible Effects Control .........................................................................180

Using the Effects Channel Settings in Multi Mode ..........................182

Effect B Into Effect A .............................................................................182

General Effect Descriptions........................................................................184

Reverb ...................................................................................................184

Chorus ...................................................................................................185

Doubling ...............................................................................................185

Slapback ................................................................................................185

Stereo Flanger ........................................................................................185

Delay .....................................................................................................186

Stereo Delay ..........................................................................................186

Panning Delay .......................................................................................186

Dual Tap ................................................................................................186

Vibrato ..................................................................................................186

Distortion ..............................................................................................186

Save/Copy Menu .................................................................. 187

Saving a Preset ......................................................................................187

Copying Information.................................................................................188

Copy Preset ...........................................................................................188

Copy Layer ............................................................................................188

Copy PatchCords ..................................................................................189

Copy Preset PatchCords ........................................................................190

Copy Arpeggiator Settings ....................................................................190

Copy Arpeggiator Pattern .....................................................................191

Copy Preset Bank ..................................................................................191

Sound Authoring ....................................................................................... 192

Rename Flash SIMM ............................................................................. 193

Duplicate Flash ..................................................................................... 194

Create Random Preset .......................................................................... 195

Preset Programming .............................................................197

Editing Presets............................................................................................ 197

Changing the Instrument .................................................................... 197

Changing the Tuning of an Instrument .............................................. 198

Chorus .................................................................................................. 199

Volume Envelope ................................................................................. 199

Working with Filters ............................................................................. 202

Adding the Filter Envelope ............................................................... 203

Changing Filter Types ....................................................................... 205

Envelope Repeat ................................................................................ 206

Practice Modulating .............................................................................. 206

Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 207

Linking Presets ........................................................................................... 208

Appendix ...............................................................................209

Front Panel Knob Functions ...................................................................... 209

Knob Controller Descriptions .............................................................. 210

Preset Listing.............................................................................................. 211

Preset Application Notes............................................................................ 216

Riff Listing.................................................................................................. 217

Instrument Listing ..................................................................................... 221

Keyboard Velocity Curves.......................................................................... 230

Master Velocity Curves .............................................................................. 233

PatchCord Amount Chart ......................................................................... 235

E-MU Expansion Sound Sets...................................................................... 236

Installing Sound SIMMs............................................................................. 238

MIDI........................................................................................................... 240

Received Channel Commands ............................................................. 247

Technical Specifications............................................................................. 248

Warranty .................................................................................................... 249

Index .....................................................................................251

MK-6 Operation Manual

ix

x

E-MU Systems

Introduction

Product

Description

Upgradable Sounds

MK-6 contains a thorough collection of Hip-Hop presets.These sounds are rich in harmonic texture and a perfect complement to the Z-plane filters.

MK-6 contains three additional, user-upgradable sound SIMM sockets, allowing you to mix and match sound sets according to your needs. New sounds can be added as easily as plugging in a new 16MB or 32MB SIMM module. Each E-MU sound set has been meticulously crafted to be the finest of its kind. Samples are expertly matched and perfectly looped to create realistic instruments which form the exceptionally playable presets.

1024 Presets & more

MK-6 contains 512 user presets and 640 factory ROM presets, but it can be expanded with literally thousands of ROM presets.

(ROM presets are automatically added when sound SIMMs are installed. As an example, a 32 MB

SIMM may contain up to 1024 ROM presets.)

MK-6’s Sound Navigator makes it easy to find the exact sound you want. It’s powerful, yet simple to use.

Velocity & Pressure Sensitive Keyboard

The five-octave, velocity sensitive keyboard with aftertouch allows you to perform live or record via MIDI into an external computer/sequencer. The keyboard action is extremely responsive, capturing all the subtle nuances of your performance.

Multi-Function Controllers

Multi-function buttons allow you to trigger arpeggiators and notes internally or on any of your other MIDI devices. They can act as preset select buttons or Beats Mute or MIDI Trigger buttons (latched or unlatched).

Four real-time controller knobs are also multi-function controls. These knobs make it a snap to edit and modify internal preset parameters. The controllers are fully programmable and can control internal preset or other

MIDI equipment. They can also be programmed to adjust multiple internal parameters at once, allowing complex levels of control. For example, a single knob can simultaneously turn up filter cutoff, while detuning one sample, and adjusting the release time of the volume envelope. Virtually

MK-6 Operation Manual

1

Introduction

Product Description

every synth parameter in the MK-6 is controllable using the real-time knobs or by any internal or external control source.

SuperBeats

Beats Mode is a whole new way to create dynamic, original music. With

Beats, you trigger, latch and unlatch synced loops and grooves from the sixteen trigger keys. Simply select a

bts:

preset and go. Then use MK-6’s perfomance controls to alter and mutate the rhythm or the sound itself.

Multi-Channel Arpeggiators

MK-6’s Rhythmic Pattern Generator/Arpeggiator can play up to 16 synchronized arpeggiator patterns at once using a different sound for each! Patterns can be edited using pattern flow commands such as: delay for 2 bars, play for 4 bars, hold for 2 beats and repeat. You can program or download 100 user patterns in addition to the 200 factory patterns.

Ultra Powerful Synthesizer

The extremely flexible yet easy to use synthesizer makes it easy to build sounds of any kind. Up to 4 four layers can be switched or crossfaded using key position, velocity, real-time controllers or any modulation source. 64 voice polyphony ensures that you can play and sequence the most complex material. MK-6 also contains 50 different 2nd to 12th order resonant & modeling filters which are used to shape and modify over 1200 waveforms contained in 32 megabytes (MB) of ROM.

Sixty-four modulation sources include three multistage envelopes and two

LFOs per layer, as well as full MIDI control over virtually every parameter.

The digital patch bay, with 24 cords per layer, (and 12 more cords per preset) lets you connect modulation sources to 64 destinations in any imaginable way. The patch bay also contains a set of arithmetic modifiers, allowing you to create complex synthesis models. Synth parameters as well as arpeggiator and BEAT tempos can be controlled from MK-6’s internal clock (or an external MIDI clock). Up to 8 LFOs and 12 envelopes can be perfectly synchronized at different rates.

24-bit Effects

Once you have created your preset, you can add richness to your sound using MK-6’s 24-bit stereo effects. You can choose a different effects setup for each preset from over 60 algorithms. MK-6’s effects section is actually two separate effects processors with control over each wet/dry mix level on four effects sends. Effects Processor “A” contains primarily ambiance algorithms like reverb and delays, while effects processor “B” contains primarily spectral algorithms such as chorus, flange, phase, distortion, and delay. Effects can be linked to each preset or used globally for increased flexibility.

Other features include multiple solo, voice assignment and performance modes for expressive control, 12 user-definable alternate tunings, and, of course, an extensive MIDI implementation.

2

E-MU Systems

Important Safety Instructions

Grounding Instructions

Important Safety Instructions

Grounding

Instructions

Danger!

Use in countries other than the U.S.A. may require the use of a different line cord or attachment plug, or both. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. There are no user serviceable parts or adjustments inside the unit. There are no user serviceable parts inside the power supply enclosure.

WARNING:

To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this product to rain or moisture.

This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or break down, grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current, reducing the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.

Improper connection of the equipment’s grounding conductor can result in the risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or service personnel if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with this product. If it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified technician.

User

Maintenance

Instructions

1.

2.

The MK-6 should be kept clean and dust free. Periodically wipe the unit with a clean, dry, lint free cloth. Do not use solvents or cleaners.

There are no user lubrication or adjustment requirements.

Caution -

Servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in these operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE,

ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS

MK-6 Operation Manual

3

Important Safety Instructions

User Maintenance Instructions

This symbol is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the unit.

This symbol is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

This symbol is intended to alert you to use caution when moving a cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS:

When using electric products, basic precautions should always be adhered to, including the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

Read all instructions before using MK-6.

Keep these instructions.

Heed all warnings.

Follow these instructions.

Do not use near water.

Clean only with a dry cloth.

Install in accordance with E-MU’s instructions. Do not block any openings. This apparatus should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with proper ventilation. The ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items such as newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, etc.

Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) which produce heat.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the grounding prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and at the point where they exit from the apparatus.

Use only attachments/accessories specified by E-MU Systems.

Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by

E-MU or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

Unplug the MK-6 from the power outlet during lightning storms or when left unused for a long period of time.

Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, the does not operate normally or has been dropped.

No open flame sources, such as lit candles, should be placed on the apparatus.

The is designed for use in moderate climates.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. No objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

To reduce the risk of injury, close supervision is necessary when using the apparatus near children.

The apparatus should be connected only to a power supply of the type described in the operating instructions and marked on the product.

4

E-MU Systems

Important Safety Instructions

Radio and Television Interference

Radio and

Television

Interference

20.

This product, in combination with an amplifier and headphones and speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult an audiologist.

The equipment described in this manual generates and uses radiofrequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly —that is, in strict accordance with our instructions— it may cause interference with radio and television reception.

This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part

15 of the FCC rules. These rules are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation, especially if a “rabbit ear” TV antenna is used.

If MK-6 does cause interference to radio or television reception, you can try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:

Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.

Move MK-6 to one side or the other of the television or radio.

Move MK-6 farther away from the television or radio.

Plug MK-6 into an outlet on a different circuit than the television or radio.

Consider installing a rooftop antenna with a coaxial lead-in between the antenna and television set.

Copyright

Information

It is the policy of E-MU / ENSONIQ to allow all users free, complete and unrestricted use to all of the presets, beats, riffs, patterns, and audition files contained in our products. However, we are unable to grant you a license to re-use, modify, create derivative works from, sell or redistribute the demonstration files (demos). In most cases, these compositions are copyright protected by their respective authors and are licensed to E-MU / ENSONIQ for product demonstration purposes only. Please contact E-MU / ENSONIQ with additional questions.

MK-6 Operation Manual

5

Safety Instructions - German

Wichtige Sicherheitsvorschriften

Safety Instructions - German

Wichtige

Sicherheitsvorschriften

In Ländern ausserhalb den U.S.A. können andere Kabel oder Stecker notwendig werden. Zur Verminderung des Risikos von Feuer oder eines elektrischen Schlages übergebe man den Service an qualifizierte Fachleute.

Das Gerät niemals Regen oder Nässe aussetzen.

Erdungsinstruktionen

Das Gerät muss geerdet sein. Bei einem Defekt oder Ausfall bietet Erdung dem elektrischen Strom den Weg des geringsten Widerstandes und reduziert das Risiko eines Schlages. Dieses Gerät ist mit einem geerdeten

Kabel und Stecker ausgerüstet. Der Stecker muss in eine passende, einwandfrei montierte und geerdete Steckdose in Übereinstimmung mit den örtlichen Vorschriften eingeführt werden.

Gefahr

Unterhaltsinstruktionen für anwender

1.

2.

3.

MK-6 (Modell Nummer 9727) soll sauber und staubfrei gehalten werden. Das Gerät mit einem sauberen und säurefreien Tuch periodisch abreiben. Keine Lösungs- oder Reinigungsmittel anwenden.

Schmieren und Justieren sind nicht notwendig.

Bei weiteren Servicefragen wende man sich an eine qualifizierte Servicestelle.

Vorsicht

Unvorschriftsgemässer Anschluss des Gerätes kann zum Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages führen. Im Zweifelsfalle über die ordnungsgemässe

Erdung soll ein qualifizierter Elektriker oder eine Serviecestelle beigezogen werden. Ändern Sie den mitgelieferten Stecker nicht. Sollte er nicht in die

Steckdose passen, soll die einwandfreie Installation durch einen qualifizierten Techniker erfolgen.

Diese Gebrauchsanweisungen sind nur für qualifizierte Techniker beabsichtigt. Um die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden, sollen Sie keine Arbeit unternehmen, die nicht in diesen Instruktionen vorgeschrieben ist. Wenden Sie Sich bei weiteren Servicefragen an eine qualifizierte Servicestelle.

6

E-MU Systems

Vorsicht

Dieses Symbol weist den

Anwender auf wichtige

Gebrauchs- und Service-

Vorschriften in den beiliegenden Drucksachen.

Dieses Symbol verweist auf nicht-isolierte Stromspannungen im Geräte-Innern, welche zu einem elektrischen

Schlag führen könnten.

INSTRUKTIONEN BETR. FEUERRISIKO,

ELEKTROSCHOCK ODER VERLETZUNG VON

PERSONEN

WARNUNG; Beim Einsatz elektrischer Geräte sollten folgende Vorsichtsmassregeln stets beachtet werden:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Lesen Sie vor dem Einschalten des MK-6 alle Instruktionen.

Zur Vermeidung von Verletzungsrisiken müssen Kinder bei eingeschaltetem MK-6 sorgfältig überwacht werden.

MK-6 nicht in der Nähe von Wasser in Betrieb nehmen -- z.B. in der

Nähe von Badewannen, Waschschüsseln, auf nassen Gestellen oder am

Swimmingpool.

MK-6 stets so aufstellen, dass seine Belüftung nicht beeinträchtigt wird.

MK-6 nicht in der Nähe von Hitze aufstellen, wie Heizkörper, offenem

Feuer, Öfen oder von Backöfen.

MK-6 ausschliesslich mit einem Netzgerät gemäss Bedienungsanleitung und Gerätemarkierung verwenden.

Dieses Gerät kann bei Verwendung von Kopfhörern und Verstärkern hohe Lautpegel erzeugen, welche zu bleibenden Gehörschäden führen.

Arbeiten Sie nicht während längerer Zeit mit voller Lautstärke oder hohem Lautpegel. Stellen Sie Gehörverlust oder Ohrenläuten fest, wenden Sie sich an einen Ohrenartz.

MK-6 kann mit einem polarisierten Kabelstecker (mit ungleichen

Stiften) ausgerüstet sein. Das geschieht für Ihre Sicherheit. Können Sie den Stecker nicht in die Steckdose einführen, ändern Sie nicht den

Stecker ab, sondern wenden Sie sich an einen Elektriker.

Das Netzkabel des MK-6 bei längerem Nichtgebrauch aus der Steckdose ziehen.

Vermeiden Sie sorgfältig das Eindringen von Gegenständen oder

Flüssigkeiten durch die Gehäuseöffnungen.

Das Gerät soll durch qualifizierte Serviceleute gewartet werden, falls:

A. das Netzkabel beschädigt wurde, oder

B. Gegenstände oder Flüssigkeit in das Gerät gelangten,

C. das Gerät Regen ausgesetzt war, oder

D. das Gerät nicht normal oder einwandfrei arbeitet, oder

E. das Gerät stürzte oder sein Gehäuse beschädigt wurde.

12.

Servicearbeiten sollten nur qualifizierten Fachleuten anvertraut werden.

MK-6 Operation Manual

7

Safety Instructions - French

Instructions de Sécurité Importantes

Safety Instructions - French

Instructions de Sécurité

Importantes

Une utilisation dans des pays autres que les U.S.A. peut nécessiter l’usage d’un cordon d’alimentation différent. Afin de réduire les risques d’incendie ou d’électrocution, référez-vous à un personnel de service qualifié, et n’exposez pas cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.

Instructions de Mise à la

Terre

Cet appareil doit être relié à la terre. Dans le cas d’une malfonction

éventuelle, la terre fournit un passage de moindre résistance pour le courant électrique, réduisant ainsi les risques d’électrocution. Le MK-6 est

équipé d’un cordon muni d’un conducteur et d’une fiche devant être branchée dans une prise appropriée et reliée à la terre en conformité avec les normes locales.

Danger

Une connexion incorrecte peut résulter en des risques d’électrocution.

Vérifiez avec un technicien qualifié si vous avez des doutes quant à la connexion. Ne modifiez pas vous-même le cordon d’alimentation livré avec cet appareil; s’il ne rentre pas dans la prise, faites-en installer un autre par un technicien qualifié.

Instructions de

Maintenance

1.

2.

3.

Le MK-6 (Model 9727) doit être maintenu propre et sans poussière.

Nettoyez-le périodiquement à l’aide d’un chiffon propre et nonpelucheux. N’utilisez pas de solvants, ou d’autres produits de nettoyage.

Aucune lubrification et aucun réglage ne sont nécessaires de votre part.

Pour tout autre service, référez-vous à un personnel qualifié.

Instructions Concernant les Risques d’Incendie, d’Electrocution, ou de Blessures Corporelles.

ATTENTION: Lorsque vous utilisez des appareils électriques, certaines précautions élémentaires doivent toujours être prises, incluant les suivantes:

8

E-MU Systems

Safety Instructions - French

Instructions de Maintenance

Ce symbole vous alerte de la présence d’instructions importantes d’opération et de maintenance dans la notice accompagnant l’appareil.

Ce symbole vous alerte de la présence d’un voltage non-isolé dangereux à l’intérieur de l’appareil, pouvant être d’une magnitude suffisante pour constituer un risque d’électrocution.

Ces instructions de dépanage sont destinées uniquement aux personnes qualifiées. Afin d’éviter les risques d’électrocution, n’effectuez que les opérations décrites dans ce manuel, à moins que vous ne soyez qualifiê pour cela.

Faites effectuer toute r’eparation par une personne qualifié.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

Lisez bien toutes les instructions avant d’utiliser le MK-6.

Afin de réduire les risques de blessures, une attention particulière est nécessaire en la présence d’enfants en bas âge.

N’utilisez pas le MK-6 dans ou près d’endroits humides - par exemple près d’une baignoire, d’un lavabo, dans les toilettes, dans une cave humide, sur un bar fréquenté, en présence d’un bull-dog en rut, ou dans une piscine pleine. Protégez cet appareil de tout liquide,

éclaboussure ou fuite.

Le MK-6 doit être placé de façon à ce que sa position n’interfére pas avec sa propre ventilation.

Le MK-6 doit être placé loin de sources de chaleur telles que des radiateurs, cheminées, fours, ou groupies en chaleur.

Le MK-6 doit uniquement être connecté à une alimentation du type décrit dans les instructions d’opération et tel qu’indiqué sur l’appareil.

Une attention particulière doit être observée quant aux objets pouvant tomber et aux liquides pouvant être versés sur et à l’intérieur de le MK-

6.

Le MK-6 peut être équipé d’une fiche secteur polarisée (avec une broche plus large que l’autre). C’est une mesure de sécurité. Si vous ne pouvez pas brancher cette fiche dans une prise, ne neutralisez pas cette sécurité.

Contactez plutôt un électricien pour remplacer la prise obsolète.

Evitez de marcher sur le cordon d’alimentation ou de le coincer, particuliêrement prês des prises de courant, des boitiers ‘electriques dt du point de sortie de l’appareil.

Le cordon d’alimentation de le MK-6 doit être débranché lorsque ce dernier n’est pas utilisé pendant une longue période.

Cet appareil, combiné avec un amplificateur, des haut-parleurs, et/ou un casque, est capable de générer des niveaux sonores pouvant occasionner une perte de l’ouïe permanente. Ne travaillez pas trop longtemps à un volume trop élevé ou même inconfortable. Si vous observez une perte de l’audition ou un bourdonnement dans les oreilles, consultez un O.R.L.

N’utilisez que les accessoires sp’ecifi’es par E-MU Systems.

MK-6 Operation Manual

9

Safety Instructions - French

Interférences Radio et Télévision

13.

14.

Cet appareil doit être examiné par un personnel qualifié lorsque:

A. Le cordon d’alimentation a été endommagé, ou

B. Des objets sont tombés, ou du liquide a été versé sur/à l’intérieur de l’appareil, ou

C. Le MK-6 a été exposé à la pluie, ou

D. Le MK-6 est tombé, ou

E. Le MK-6 ne fonctionne pas normalement, ou affiche un changement radical de performance.

Tout service doit être effectué par un personnel qualifié.

SAUVEGARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS

Interférences

Radio et

Télévision

L’appareil décrit dans cette notice génére et utilise une énergie de fréquence-radio. S’il n’est pas installé et utilisé correctement - c’est à dire en suivant strictement nos instructions - il peut occasionner des interférences avec la réception d’une radio ou d’une télévision.

Cet appareil a été testé et est conforme aux normes de Classe A en accord avec les spécifications du paragraphe J de la section 15 des lois FCC. Ces lois sont désignées pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre de telles interférences dans une installation résidentielle. Toutefois, il n’est pas garanti qu’aucune interférence n’apparaisse dans des installations particulières, et plus spécialement lorsqu’une antenne de télévision en

«oreilles de lapin» est utilisée.

Si le MK-6 occasionne des interférences , vous pouvez essayer de les corriger en utilisant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes:

Tournez l’antenne de la télé ou de la radio jusqu’à ce que les interférences disparaissent.

Déplacez le MK-6 d’un côté ou de l’autre de la télé ou de la radio.

Eloignez le MK-6 de la télé ou de la radio.

Branchez le MK-6 sur une prise différente que la télé ou la radio.

Installez une antenne sur le toit munie d’une connexion coaxiale entre elle et le poste de télévision.

10

E-MU Systems

Declaration of Conformity

Declaration of Conformity

Manufacturer:

E-MU / Ensoniq

1600 Green Hills Road

Scotts Valley, CA 95067-0015 USA

We hereby declare that the equipment listed herin conforms to the harmonized standards of the following European Commission Directives:

89/336/EEC and 72/23/EEC.

Trade Name:

MK-6

Model Number:

9727

Under 89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC, and 93/68/EEC

In accordance with EN 55103-1:1996, Emission Environments E4

In accordance with EN 55103-2:1996, Immunity Environments E4

Test information is contained in a report by Atlas Compliance and

Engineering, Inc.

Dated July 5, 2001

Report No.: 0126EMUx17_103

Under 73/23/EEC as amended by 93/68/EEC

In accordance with EN 60950 with amendments A1, A2, A3, A4, A11

This Declaration is made July 5, 2001

MK-6 Operation Manual

11

Safety Instructions - French

12

E-MU Systems

Setup

This section thoroughly describes how to set up your new MK-6 for use.

Setup includes unpacking instructions, how to hook up the unit to your sound system and, most importantly, how to turn the thing on and off.

Unpacking

Carefully remove MK-6 from the packaging material. Take care to save the packing materials in case you need to transport the unit. Check to make sure all components are included and in good condition. If there are missing or damaged components, contact E-MU Systems immediately for replacement or repair.

The MK-6 box should include the following components:

MK-6 unit

Power cable

This operation manual

MK-6 Operation Manual

13

Setup

Basic Setup

Connection

Instructions

Basic Setup

Power Switch & AC Receptacle

The AC power switch is located on the rear panel. There is no 110/220 Volt power selector switch since MK-6 utilizes an auto-switching power supply which accepts from 100V-250V, 50-60Hz.

The Right Main output jack carries a mono mix of the left and right channels when the

Left Main plug is not plugged in.

MIDI Output

The MK-6 can control other MIDI instruments by connecting a MIDI cable between the MIDI out of MK-6 and the MIDI Input of the other instrument.

Outputs

In order to reproduce MK-6’s wide dynamic range and frequency response, use a high quality amplification and speaker system and a stereo setup is highly desirable The headphone output is the same as the Main output signal. The headphone jack is located on the left side of the front panel.

The Left Main output jack is a stereo jack carrying both channels when the right output jack is empty.

Footswitch & Footpedal

Connect a momentary footswitch and a Control Pedal for additional control. MK-6 auto-senses either normally-open or normally-closed

switches See page 15 for information about how the footpedal should be

wired.

14

E-MU Systems

Setup

Performance Setup

Performance Setup

Computer

Out

MIDI

Interface

In

Out

Additional

MIDI

Devices

MIDI In

Rear Panel

R

SUB 1

L R

OUTPUTS

MAIN

L

IN OUT THRU

MIDI

SWITCH PEDAL

FOOT

Mixer

Footswitch

Foot Pedal

Amp

FootPedal Wiring

Ground Tip

Tip

Ring

Ring

Ground

MIDI In/MIDI Out

MK-6 can be connected to a computer/sequencer via the MIDI In and MIDI

Out ports. MK-6 to playback complex multitimbral sequences.

Audio Outputs

Two pairs of programmable stereo outputs (Main and Sub 1) are provided.

The internal effects are available only on the Main outputs. Specific presets

(or MIDI channels) can be routed to one of these stereo pairs in order to be processed further or mixed separately.

Footswitch & Footpedal

The footswitch input accepts either a normally-open or normally-closed momentary footswitch. The footpedal input can sense either 0-5 volts on the ring of a stereo jack or a pedal with the potentiometer wired as shown at left. The footswitch and Pedal inputs are programmable in the

Controllers, Footswitch menu and the Preset Edit, PatchCord menu.

MK-6 Operation Manual

15

Studio Setup

Setup

Studio Setup

MIDI Controller

(MIDI Keyboard or Sequencer)

R E A L T I M E C O N T R O L L E R S A S S I G N A B L E K E Y S

S E Q U E N C E R

P R E S E T

S A M P L E

EMULATOR

E X I T

L E V E L

P A G E

E N T E R

P R E S E T S E L E C T R E T U R N

MIDI Out

Computer

Additional

MIDI

Devices

MIDI In

Rear Panel

R

SUB 1

L R

OUTPUTS

MAIN

L

IN OUT THRU

MIDI

FOOT

PEDAL

FOOT

SWITCH

Effect Device

Sub Output

Return

(To Main Output)

Tip

To Effect

Ring

From Effect

SEND/RETURN CABLE

Signal is sent out on tip of plug and returned to main outputs via ring of plug.

MIDI In

In this setup, MK-6 is additionally controlled by another MIDI keyboard.

MIDI Thru

MIDI Thru transmits an exact copy of the messages received at the MIDI In jack. It does NOT send keyboard or controller information generated from

MK-6

(Use the MIDI Out port to send

MK-6

data to another instrument.)

Audio Outputs

The Sub 1 output jacks are stereo jacks. The tip of each jack (accessed when a standard phone plug is inserted) connects to the left or right output of that group.

If you insert a stereo plug into one of the Sub Outputs, the ring of the plug serves as a signal Return which sums into the Main outputs.

16

E-MU Systems

Setup

Studio Setup

Therefore, the Sub 1 jacks can serve as effect sends and returns in order to further process selected instruments and then return them to the main mix.

You can use the Sub 1 jacks as send/returns in order to further process selected MK-6 presets without using the effects bus on the mixing board. In a pinch, the effect returns can be used to sum additional instruments into the main outputs. It’s like having an extra line mixer when you need more inputs!

Output Section

Effects

Processors

L Bus

R Bus

Tip

Ring

R

SUB 1

Tip

Ring

L R

MAINS

L

You can use the Sub 1 jacks as effect returns to the Main Outputs.

Note that the Effects Processors are only routed to the Main Outputs.

MK-6 Operation Manual

17

18

E-MU Systems

Setup

Studio Setup

Instant Gratification

Playing Demo

Sequences

This section presents step-by-step instructions for the most fundamental operations to get you up and running as quickly as possible.

MK-6 has several factory demonstration sequences that let you hear what this incredible machine can do. The actual number of demo sequences depends on which ROM sounds sets are installed. You can play these demo sequences by accessing the Demo Sequence page.

DEMO SEQUENCES MROM1

UNCANNY 1

To Play a Demo Sequence:

1.

Press and hold the

Main

and

Mix

buttons at the same time to enter the

Demo Sequence page. The screen shown above appears.

2.

3.

Select a sequence using the

data entry control

. The Enter LED will be flashing.

Press the

Enter

button to begin playing the selected sequence. The following screen appears.

PLAYING: UNCANNY 1

Press ENTER to stop

4.

5.

6.

Press the

Enter

button again to stop playing the sequence.

When a demo sequence plays to the end, the next demo will automatically begin playing. The screen will display the new demo name.

With the sequence stopped,

press any other button

to Exit demo sequence mode.

MK-6 Operation Manual

19

Instant Gratification

Auditioning Presets

Auditioning Presets

The front panel audition button allows you to hear any preset in MK-6 without even playing a note! When the Audition button is pressed, the button’s LED will illuminate and a short “Riff” (programmed as part of the preset) will play. The Riff is latched on and plays continuously until the button is pressed again. Presets can be changed while Audition is latched.

O

To audition presets with their programmed effects, switch to Omni or Poly mode (located

The top line of the Preset View display changes to show the MIDI Bank

Select controller values needed to select the preset being auditioned. This is an extremely handy feature when sequencing.

in the MIDI menu).

Bank MSB:015 LSB:2 MROM1

125

2

key: SynhissOrgan

To Audition a Preset:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Select a preset by turning the

data entry control

while the cursor is anywhere on the lower line of the main screen (shown below).

Select a preset by turning the

data entry control

while the cursor is anywhere on the lower line. The preset number field (shown above) is the normal position of the cursor and pressing the Enter button will return the cursor to this position.

Press the

Audition

button on the front panel. The Audition LED will illuminate and a short riff will play the selected preset.

Continue to select and audition presets.

Press the

Audition

button again to turn Audition mode off. The LED will extinguish.

Play the keyboard.

Be sure to check out the Pitch Wheel, controller knobs and Mod Wheel.

Selecting and Quick

Editing Presets

The first thing you’ll do with the MK-6 is select and play the factory provided presets. MK-6 comes standard with 8 banks containing 128 presets

each. See “Main Screen” on page 37.

Channel

Number

Initial

Volume

Setting

Initial

Pan

Setting

Arpeggiator

Setting

Preset

Location

C01 V127 P01

R

A:off User

125

2

key: SynhissOrgan

Blinking

Cursor

Preset

Number

Bank

Number

Preset

Category

Preset

Name

20

E-MU Systems

Instant Gratification

Selecting and Quick Editing Presets

The first four banks are USER locations that can be overwritten and used to store your own presets. The presets that come stored in the USER presets are duplicated in banks 0-3 of the “MK-6” ROM bank, so feel free to overwrite them with your own presets. You won’t be losing anything.

The

ROM Card

identifier is shown in the top right of the display. The preset is identified in the bottom line of the main screen (the screen that appears when you press the Mode/View Preset button).

Each bank of 128 presets is identified by a superscripted

Bank Number

to the right of the preset number. The bank numbers reset to 0 at the start of each

ROM card you have installed. So with the “”MROM1” ROM installed, the

USER banks will go from 0-3, then start over from 0-3 for the MK-6 ROM banks.

Bank Organization

USER

USER

USER

USER

Bank 0

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

128 Presets

128 Presets

128 Presets

128 Presets

}

MROM1

MROM1

MROM1

MROM1

Bank 0

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

128 Presets

128 Presets

128 Presets

128 Presets

The User Banks are duplicated in the MK-6

ROM bank.

The four User Banks can hold 512 custom presets. Feel free to overwrite these since the factory user presets are duplicated in nonvolatile ROM.

To the right of the preset number and bank is the preset

Category

name followed by the

Preset Name

.

To Change the Preset:

1.

Select the main Preset Selection screen by turning off all the menu buttons below the LCD.

2.

The cursor will be located under the first character in the Preset Number field. This is the “Home” position which is selected instantly when you press the Home/Enter button. Pressing either of the two cursor buttons repeatedly also gets you there.

MK-6 Operation Manual

21

Instant Gratification

Exploring Beats Mode

O

You can select presets from the Preset Number, Bank

Number, Preset Category or

Preset Name fields.

3.

4.

5.

Turn the

data entry control

knob on the front panel to select a new preset number. If you turn the knob slowly, the presets advance one number for each “click” of the knob. If you spin the knob quickly, the numbers advance much faster (more than one number per click).

Play the keyboard

(or press the Audition button) and listen to the sounds made by your MK-6!

TRY OUT ANY OF THE CONTROLLER KNOBS

on the front panel and note how they change the sound of each preset! Don’t worry about ruining the sound, the values are automatically reset as soon as you select a new preset. The four buttons labeled A-D, E-H, I-L, M-P allow the four controller knobs to control sixteen functions.

Exploring Beats

Mode

MK-6 contains a 16-track play-only sequencer that is optimized for live performance and groove creation. MK-6 contains dozens of special 16-part

Beats Riffs. Beats Riffs are normally used in conjunction with a “

bts:

” preset containing the appropriate percussion mapping. Before you start exploring beats, make sure the MK-6 is properly set up.

Beats Setup:

Set the Trigger Buttons to Beats Mode

1.

Press the

Controllers

button on the front panel.

2.

3.

4.

Turn the

data entry control

clockwise until you fin the “TRIGGER

BUTTONS FUNCTION” screen.

Set the lower line of the display to read, “Play Beats Parts”.

Press the

Controllers

button on the front panel again to exit the menu.

Set the Trigger Buttons to be Triggers

5.

Press the

Triggers

button in the Command Functions section of the front panel. OK, now you’re ready to start playing Beats.

If you don’t select a

“bts:”

preset, only the first trigger key will work.

Riffs marked “bts:” have 16 parts. Riffs without “bts:” have only 1 part.

Playing Beats:

Selecting Beats Presets

1.

2.

3.

4.

Press the

right cursor button twice

so that the cursor is located beneath the

Category

field.

Turn the

data entry control

until

bts:

is shown in the Category field.

Press the

right cursor button

so that the cursor is underneath the

Preset Name

field.

Now turning the

data entry control

selects ONLY

bts:

presets!

Play Beats

5.

Press any of the sixteen front panel

Trigger Buttons

. Notice that each button brings in a specific part. The chart below shows which buttons control which part in

bts:

presets.

22

E-MU Systems

Instant Gratification

Exploring Beats Mode

Main Groove

1. Kick1

2. Snare1

3. Hihat1

4. Perc1

Alt. Groove

5. Kick2

6. Snare2

7. Hihat2

8. Perc2

Perc / Fills Instr/Wild

9. Perc3/Fill1

10. Perc4/Fill2

11. Perc5/Fill3

12. Perc6/Inst.

13. Inst1/Wild1

14. Inst2/Wild2

15. Inst3/Wild3

16. Bass

The Arp/Beats LED flashes in time with the Base

Tempo.

6.

7.

Also notice that the Audition LED comes on when Beats begin playing.

Beats are simply multitrack Audition Riffs. Use the

Audition

button to turn Beats on and off.

Try out a few different

bts:

presets.

• Change the Base Tempo from the last screen in the Controllers menu.

Get Busy!

Two of the Controller knobs are programmed to control Beats. Check it out!

8.

9.

10.

Press the

M-P

button in the

Controllers

section. Its LED will light.

Now turn the

Mod 1 knob

with a Beats Riff playing. Mod 1 is controls the

Beats Busy

parameter which adds or subtracts parts from the Beat.

Turn the

Mod 2 knob

with a Beats Riff playing. Mod 2 is controls the

Beats Variation

parameter. Beats Variation changes which parts are playing without changing the number of parts. This makes it easy to try out different combinations of Beat Parts.

To Play Beats on a different MIDI channel:

Beats can be assigned to a certain MIDI channel while you play the keyboard on another channel.

(Make sure you have Beats mode set up correctly

as described in “Beats Setup” on page 22.)

1.

Press the

Arp/Beats

button. The screen shown below appears.

BEATS MODE Status: P

BtsCh: Basic TrigCh:Basic

O

Wrong FX?

In Omni mode, the FX assigned to channel 2 will be used. In Multi mode, the Master FX settings

will be used. See pages 88 & 98.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Set the Beats Channel (BtsCh) to

01

.

Select any

bts:

preset on channel

1

(main screen)

.

Press any of the sixteen

Beats buttons

to start your Beat playing.

(Do

NOT start Beats by pressing the Audition button.)

Press the

+ Channel

button to the left of the LCD to select

channel 2.

Select a preset to jam along with the Beat.

The Trigger Keys now play Beats and the other keys play the preset on channel

2

.

The Audition button can be used to turn the Beat off.

(If you try to use it to turn Beats on while on channel 2, the Riff on channel 2 will play.)

MK-6 Operation Manual

23

Instant Gratification

Exploring the Master Arpeggiator

Exploring the Master

Arpeggiator

MK-6’s multi-channel Pattern Generator/Arpeggiator is one of the greatest features ever put in a synth. Let’s explore the Master Arpeggiator.

To Arpeggiate a Single Preset:

1.

2.

Select a preset

. Note that the factory presets all have prefixes which describe the type of sound. For this investigation it might be best to choose a preset with the prefix “arp,” for arpeggiator. These presets are optimized for use with the arpeggiator.

Set the Arp parameter in the main preset selection screen to “

M

” for

Master Arpeggiator.

C01 V127 P01

R

A:M MROM1

000

0

arp: Guitartar

3.

Press the

Arp/Beats

button in the Edit section of the front panel to access the master Arpeggiator menu, then use the

data entry control

to scroll to the screen shown below.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Status on

4.

5.

6.

Make sure the arpeggiator Status is “

on

.” Play the keyboard to start arpeggiating.

Press either

cursor key

repeatedly to move the cursor below the Status field.

Turn the

data entry control

clockwise one click. The Mode screen appears.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Mode up

7.

8.

Use the

cursor keys

to move the cursor to the

Mode

field (up, down, up/ down, forw asgn, backw asgn, forw/backw, random, pattern). Try out the different modes as you play the keyboard.

Move the cursor back to the lower left position and explore the other parameters. The

Note Value

parameter changes the rate of the arpeggios.

By the way, note value is a divisor based on the Master Tempo. Try changing the tempo, but come right back.

24

E-MU Systems

Instant Gratification

Exploring the Master Arpeggiator

9.

10.

Let’s check out the pattern generator. Go back to the

Mode

screen and set the mode to “Pattern”.

Now advance to the Pattern screen (shown below) and move the cursor to the

Pattern Number

field (the second field from the left).

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Pattern 38

0

Inversions

O

See the Arpeggiator

Chapter for detailed information on creating Patterns.

11.

Try the various patterns. There are 200 permanent factory patterns and

100 user locations to store the patterns you create. Each pattern can have up to 32 notes.

MK-6 Operation Manual

25

Multi-Channel

Arpeggiator

Instant Gratification

Multi-Channel Arpeggiator

MK-6 is totally amazing in its ability to run up to 16 arpeggiators at once!

Even two or three patterns at once can create very complex sequences and dynamic landscapes of sound.

Here’s one way to access this ultra-powerful feature. There is one arpeggiator for each MIDI channel. First you’ll assign three of the Trigger Keys to

MIDI channels 01-03. Next, you’ll assign arpeggiator presets to these channels. Then you’ll become addicted to this new way of making music.

Program the Trigger Keys

1.

Press the

Controllers

button, then turn the data entry control until the screen shown below appears.

TRIGGER BUTTONS FUNCTION

Play Beats Parts

2.

3.

Move the

cursor

to the lower line and turn the data entry control to select “Play Note Events”. This sets the Trigger Buttons to play note events instead of selecting Beats parts.

Move the

cursor

back to the top line and scroll to the screen shown below.

T1 TRIGGERS Latch: on

Key:C3 Ch: Basic Vel: 064

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Move the

cursor

until it is underneath the

Latch

field and turn Latch mode On.

Move the

cursor

until it is underneath the

Channel

field (Ch) and set the

Channel to 01

.

Move the

cursor

until it is underneath the

Trigger

field (T1) and change the

Trigger to T2

(trigger button 2).

Turn

Latch On

for trigger button 2 and set the channel to

02

.

Change the

Trigger to T3

(trigger button 3).

Turn

Latch On

for trigger button 3 and set the channel to

03

.

Set up the Presets

10.

Press the

Main

button (located beneath the Data Entry Control). The preset select screen appears.

26

E-MU Systems

Instant Gratification

Multi-Channel Arpeggiator

C01 V127 P00 A:P MROM1

026

3

arp:Hollographik

O

Sometimes a simple volume change will bring out hidden voices and patterns.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

Move the cursor underneath the

Category

field (as shown above) and select the “

arp

” category.

Move the

cursor

underneath the preset name and select any “arp” preset for channel

1

.

Press the

“+” Channel

select button (located to the left of the LCD), so that

C02

is displayed.

Select any other “arp” preset for channel

2

.

Select channel

03

and choose another arp preset.

Select Trigger Mode

16.

Press the

Selector Button

in the upper left corner of the Command

Functions section. Pressing this button will switch between Track

Enable/Mute and Triggers mode. Select Triggers mode.

Play it!

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

Now press

Trigger Buttons 1, 2 and 3

. You should be hearing three arpeggiators playing at once.

Change the arp preset

on the current MIDI channel. Since the cursor is located on the preset name, all your selections will be in the arp category.

Press the

Channel

button and change the arp presets for channels 1, 2

& 3. Since each factory preset has differently programmed arpeggiator settings, changing the preset not only changes the sound, but the arpeggiator as well.

You can also

play the keyboard

. You’ll be playing the preset currently showing in the display.

Adjusting the front panel

Controller Knobs

modifies the preset showing in the LCD.

Press the

M-P

button in the Controllers section to select the Arp control functions. Adjust the

Arp Velocity

and

Arp Gate Time

. Then change the

MIDI channel

and do it for another arp pattern.

Press the

Mix

button so that “VOLUMES” is selected. This screen lets you blend the volume of every arpeggiator preset.

There’s lots more to the arpeggiators. To find out more, refer to the

arpeggiator chapter beginning on page 43.

MK-6 Operation Manual

27

Instant Gratification

Multi-Channel Arpeggiator

Multisetups save your entire MK-6 setup. Find out more

on page 84.

Time to Save?

If you want to SAVE everything exactly as it is, continue on.

1.

2.

Press the

Multi

button (located directly under the Data Entry Control).

Rotate the

data entry control

until you get to the menu shown below.

MULTISETUP NAME

User Setup

3.

4.

5.

Press the

right cursor

button to move to the lower line.

Name your Multisetup

so you can find it later, then press

Enter

.

Scroll to the next screen using the

data entry control

.

SAVE SETUP TO

002 User Setup

6.

Move the

cursor

to the lower line, select a location and press

Enter

.

28

E-MU Systems

Basic Operations

Basic Operations

CO 1 A Vo l 1 27 Pan00

032 2 bas : I n t e r f e r en c e

The MK-6 front panel contains an LCD screen, 38 buttons, and 4 real-time controller knobs. Functions are grouped logically and the controls are arranged for ease of use.

Power Switch

The power switch is located on the rear panel next to the AC power receptacle.

Volume Control

This control is the master volume control for all audio outputs. The Volume

Control does not affect any editing or user interface operations.

The front panel volume control is a digital attenuator. For maximum dynamic range, turn this knob all the way up and control the volume from your mixer or amplifier.

Channel +/- Buttons

These very handy buttons, located to the left of the LCD, serve as a shortcut to increment or decrement the MIDI Channel (in Preset mode), Layer (in

Preset Edit mode) or Step Numbers (in Arpeggiator Edit mode).

Data Entry Control

The data entry control is a stepped, variable control switch used to change parameter values. The wheel increments or decrements the current value one unit with each click. This control incorporates acceleration, which advances the value faster if the data entry control is turned quickly.

MK-6 Operation Manual

29

Basic Operations

Edit Section

Cursor Buttons

These buttons, located just above the Data Entry Control, move the cursor to the next parameter on the display. (The cursor is a little flashing line underneath one of the parameters in the display.) Press either cursor button until the cursor is underneath the desired parameter. The cursor buttons have an auto-repeat feature which advances the cursor when the button is held continuously.

The cursor can be moved bidirectionally using the data entry control while either cursor select button is held down (for example, press and hold the right cursor button and turn the data entry control).

Pitch & Mod Wheels

These two controls, located to the right of the keyboard, are performance expression controls. The left “Pitch Wheel”, is spring-loaded and is normally used to bend the pitch up and down while playing. The center position is off. The pitch bend range is set using the “Pitch Bend Range”

parameter in the Global menu (page 84).

The right “Mod Wheel” is programmed to add vibrato in most of the factory presets. Like all the controllers in MK-6, the Mod Wheel can be programmed to control any synthesizer parameter. See PatchCords on

page 102 and page 157 for more information.

Edit Section

Global Button

The Global menu contains parameters that affect the entire machine. An illuminated LED in the button indicates that you are in the Global menu.

For more information about the Global menu, see page 83

Controllers Button

The Controllers menu contains parameters that are related to the front panel controller knob and button triggers. An illuminated LED in the button indicates that you are in the Controllers menu. For more infor-

mation about the Controllers menu, see page 71.

30

E-MU Systems

Basic Operations

Edit Section

Arp/Beats Button

The Arpeggiator menu contains parameters that are related to Beats mode and the Master Arpeggiator. Beats is a 16-track play-only sequencer that is optimized for live performance and groove creation. An illuminated LED in the button indicates that you are in the Arp/Beats menu. For more infor-

mation about the Arp/Beats menu, see page 43.

MIDI Button

MIDI Panic Button

Pressing the MIDI and Home/Enter buttons simultaneously sends a MIDI

“All Notes Off” and “All Sound Off” for all 16 MIDI channels. This immediately kills all sounding notes internally and over MIDI.

Audition Button

The MIDI menu contains parameters that are MIDI related. An illuminated

LED in the button indicates that you are in the MIDI menu. For more infor-

mation about the MIDI menu, see page 93.

When the Audition button is pressed, the LED next to the button will illuminate and a short “Riff” (programmed as part of the preset) will play.

The Riff is latched on and plays continuously until the button is pressed again. Presets can be changed while Audition is latched on.

See “Bank Select

Commands” on page 126 for more information on selecting banks via MIDI.

The top line of the Preset display changes to show the MIDI Bank Select controller values needed to select the preset being auditioned. This handy feature lets you know the exact Bank and Preset number.

MSB

LSB

Preset #

Bank MSB:015 LSB:3 MROM1

082

3

bts: Kraftwork

Compare Button

The Compare button allows you to toggle between an edited version of a preset and the original, unedited version. When a preset has been edited, the Save/Copy LED flashes. Press the Compare button, lighting its LED, to hear the unedited preset. Press the Compare button again to hear the edited preset. If edits are made to the preset while listening to the compared original version, compare mode is aborted and the compare LED goes off.

Save/Copy Button

The Save/Copy button is used to save changes to a preset, copy data between presets, randomize presets and to move other types of data.

Selected groups of parameters, such as PatchCord settings, can be copied between Presets and/or between Layers using this menu. The menu is

MK-6 Operation Manual

31

Basic Operations

Real-time Controller Knobs

context-sensitive and will start at the appropriate save screen. See Save/

Copy on page 187 for more information.

The LED in the button illuminates to indicate that you are in the Save/

Copy menu. The LED also illuminates when any preset parameter has been changed in the Preset Edit menu (or if the front panel knobs have been moved with Quick-Edit mode enabled).

Preset Edit Button

The Preset Edit menu allows you to create and edit presets. An illuminated

LED in the button indicates that you are in Preset Edit mode. For more

information about the Preset Edit menu, see page 129.

Home/Enter Button

The Home/Enter button is dual purpose. In general, this button acts as the

“Home” button. For example, when in an Edit menu, this button snaps the cursor to the page name field of the current screen. When viewing the

Preset Select screen, this button snaps the cursor to the preset number field.

The flashing green LED of the Home/Enter button indicates that pressing the button will initiate a particular operation.

Real-time

Controller

Knobs

The Real-time Controller Knobs serve dual purposes. Knobs Preset Quick

Edit (page 79) can be enabled to use the knobs for editing in the Preset Edit

menu.

1.

2.

Quick Edit

- Real-time control of internal synthesizer parameters and

“Quick Editing” the initial settings of the real-time controllers

Programmable Knobs

- Real-time control of MIDI continuous controllers on external synthesizers.

32

E-MU Systems

Basic Operations

Real-time Controller Knobs

Knob Functions

O

Quick Edit knob movements can be recorded into an external sequencer.

Quick Edit mode

The Real-time controller knobs provide direct control of the MK-6’s synthesizer parameters when the Controller Function Select is set to Quick Edit.

There is an LED next to each of the control knobs which illuminates to indicate that the knob setting has been changed from the value programmed in the preset (“Knobs Preset Quick Edit” mode must be enabled in the Controllers menu). If the knob position is returned to the original setting, the LED is extinguished.

Initial controller values can be stored in every preset. When you move a knob with Quick-Edit enabled, the Initial Controller Value is updated with the knob’s new value. The knob’s LED lights indicating that the preset value has been changed. The MIDI A-P values are stored in the corresponding

Initial Controller Amount

parameter in the Preset Edit menu (see “Initial

Controller Amount” on page 167). The Save/Copy button LED flashes to

remind you that the preset has been edited. “Quick-Edits” made to a preset are lost if you select another preset before saving them.

The four rows of knobs always control the preset on the basic MIDI channel

(the channel showing on the preset select screen), when the control switch is set to Quick Edit.

The labels (Filter Cutoff, Filter Q, Filter Attack, Filter Decay, etc.) printed on these rows show how the factory ROM presets are programmed to respond.

(The controls may not exactly conform to the front panel labels depending on the preset.)

You can change the way a preset responds to MIDI A-P messages from the Preset Edit menu (PatchCords). The knobs only generate a message when you move a knob to a new value. The current value jumps to the new value.

To Quick-Edit a Preset:

1.

2.

Select

Quick Edit

mode using the Controller Function Select button.

Use the Control Knobs to change the sound of the current preset as desired.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Press the

Save/Copy

button. You may have to turn the data entry control so that the display reads, “Save PRESET to.”

Press the right cursor button to select the bottom row.

Optional:

Select a new preset location if you don’t want to overwrite the current preset, or if the current preset is a ROM preset.

Press the

Enter

button to save the preset.

MK-6 Operation Manual

33

Basic Operations

Screen View Buttons

Screen View

Buttons

Main

Multi

Mix Screen

The Screen View buttons switch between three display modes.

This button instantly switches the display to the Main Screen shown below.

This screen is used for changing presets, changing MIDI channels and

setting the volume and pan positions for each MIDI channel. See page 37

for more information.

C0 1 V127 P01

R

A:off User

079

3

kit: Hide & Seek

This button switches the display to the Multisetup menu. A Multisetup is a group of parameters that you might associate with a particular performance

setup or song. See page 41 for detailed information about Multisetups.

RESTORE MULTISETUP

000 User Setup

This button switches the display to the Mix screens (volume & pan). The mix screens allow you view and adjust the volume and pan settings for all

16 channels. This is particularly useful when playing back a MIDI sequence.

The volume and pan settings for all 16 channels are saved with the Multi-

setup (page 41).

VOLUMES Chan: 01 Vol: 127

34

E-MU Systems

Demo Mode

Basic Operations

Screen View Buttons

PANS Chan: 01 Vol: 127

right left

Pressing the Main and Mix buttons simultaneously calls up the Demo

Sequence page. MK-6 has several factory demonstration sequences that let you hear what this incredible machine can do. The actual number of demo sequences depends on which ROM sounds sets are installed.

DEMO SEQUENCES MROM1

Arctic Drift

To Play a Demo Sequence:

1.

Press and hold the

Main

and

Mix

buttons at the same time to enter the

Demo Sequence page. The screen shown above appears.

2.

3.

Select a sequence using the

data entry control

. The Enter LED will be flashing.

Press the

Enter

button to begin playing the selected sequence. The following screen appears.

PLAYING: UNCANNY 1

Press ENTER to stop

4.

5.

6.

Press the

Enter

button again to stop playing the sequence.

When a demo sequence plays to the end, the next demo will automatically begin playing. The screen will display the new demo name.

With the sequence stopped,

press any other button

to Exit demo sequence mode.

MK-6 Operation Manual

35

Command

Functions

Preset Selection

Trigger Mode

Preset Menu

Jump Keys

Basic Operations

Command Functions

The Command Functions section serves multiple purposes which are listed below.

• Beats Part enable/disable.

See page 22.

• Assignable & latchable note triggers.

See page 76.

• Preset select keys.

See page 77.

• External preset select keys.

See page 78.

• Preset Edit menu jump keys.

See below.

When the preset selection LED is lit, the command buttons can be used to quickly select sixteen of your favorite presets. In this mode, pressing one of the comand buttons selects the preset you have assigned to the button.

See page 77 for more information.

Select Triggers mode by pressing the mode select button so that the

“Triggers” LED is illuminated. Now the 16 buttons work like keyboard notes. Each of the 16 buttons can be assigned to any MIDI note, on any

MIDI Channel (01-16), with any velocity (0-127), and can be set to be latched or momentarily on. Latched note will hold until the button is pressed again. Latched notes will be indicated by the LEDs. Trigger keys are

assigned from the Controllers menu. See page 76 for more information.

Whenever you are in the Preset Edit menu, the sixteen command buttons function as “jump” buttons to the various screens in the Preset Edit menu.

The jump location is labelled directly below each button.

Pressing a jump button instantly takes you to the first screen in the selected category. Pressing the button again takes you to the second screen in the category and so on. Repeated pressing will rotate you back to the first screen in the category.

36

E-MU Systems

Basic Operations

Main Screen

Main Screen

The Main Screen is accessed by pressing the Main button located directly under the data entry control. From this screen you can examine or change the Preset, Volume, Pan Position and Preset Location for each of the 16

MIDI channels.

C0 1 V127 P01

R

A:off User

079

3

kit: Hide & Seek

MIDI Channel

Selection

To Change the MIDI Channel:

1.

Press the Main button to display the Main screen.

2.

Press the Channel inc/dec buttons located to the left of the liquid crystal display to select channels 01 through 16. The preset, volume and pan settings for each channel will be displayed as you scroll through the channels.

The channel number shown in the main screen is the “Basic MIDI Channel” when in Omni or Poly modes.

Preset Selection

Bank

2

3

0

1

0

1

2

Contents

128 RAM Presets

128 RAM Presets

128 RAM Presets

128 RAM Presets

128 ROM Presets

128 ROM Presets

128 ROM Presets

??

Depending on

ROM sets installed

To Change the Preset:

1.

Press the

Main

button to display the Main screen.

2.

3.

Press either

cursor key

until the cursor is underneath the preset number. (The cursor is a little flashing line underneath one of the parameters in the display.) As you rotate the data entry control, the preset number and name changes.

The displayed preset is assigned to the displayed MIDI channel. Presets are arranged into banks of 128, as shown in the diagram at left.

Bank Number

Preset

Number

C01 V127 P01

079

3

bts: Logic

R

A:off User

Using the screen above as an example, the superscripted number 2 in the second line of the display identifies the current bank number.

Select banks independently of the of the preset number by locating the cursor on the Bank field and turning the data entry control.

MK-6 Operation Manual

37

Basic Operations

Main Screen

Channel Volume

USER

USER

USER

USER

MIDI BANK SELECT

MSB LSB cc00 cc32

00

00

00

00

00

01

02

03

Bank 0

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

MROM1

MROM1

MROM1

MROM1

15

15

15

15

00

01

02

03

Bank 0

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

This chart shows the MSB and LSB numbers needed to select preset banks over MIDI.

Select a bank, then send the program change number. Without a bank select command, presets are selected from within the current bank.

Channel Volume sets the volume of the selected MIDI channel in relation to the other channels. This is the same parameter as MIDI volume control

#7, and changes made over MIDI are shown in the display.

Volume

C01 V127 P01

R

A:off User

079

3

bts: Logic

To Change the Channel Volume:

1.

2.

Press the

Main

button to display the Preset Select screen.

Press either

cursor key

until the cursor is underneath the volume value.

3.

Rotate the

data entry control

to select a volume level. The Channel

Volume range is 000-127.

38

E-MU Systems

Basic Operations

Main Screen

Channel Pan

Channel Pan sets the stereo position of the selected MIDI channel. This control operates like the balance control on your home stereo system.

Channel Pan is the same parameter as MIDI pan controller #10, and changes made over MIDI are shown in the display.

Pan Position

C01 V127 P01

R

A:off User

079

3

bts: Logic

Note:

Pan settings in the preset ADD algebraically with the Channel Pan setting. Therefore, if the pan setting in the preset were set to “63

R

,” moving the Channel Pan setting full left would return the sound to the center position.

To Change the Channel Pan:

1.

2.

Press the

Main

button to display the Preset Select screen.

Press either

cursor key

until the cursor is underneath the pan field.

3.

Rotate the data entry control to

select a pan value

. 64

L

indicates a hard left pan, 63

R

indicates a hard right pan. With a setting of “00,” the sound is centered in the stereo field.

Channel Arpeggiator

This function controls the arpeggiator for each MIDI channel. When the channel arpeggiator mode is set to Off, then there is no arpeggiation on that channel, regardless of what is set up in the Master Arpeggiator or preset. If the channel arpeggiator is On, the preset’s arpeggiator is used, regardless of whether or not it is turned on in the Preset Edit menu. This lets you turn on arpeggiation from the main screen.

If the mode is set to “P” (for preset), the preset’s arpeggiator settings and on/off status is used. If the mode is set to “M” (for master), the master arpeggiator settings and on/off status (located in the Arp menu) are used.

See the “Arp/Beats Menu” on page 43 for more information.

To Play the Arpeggiator (Quick Start):

1.

2.

From the

Main

screen, press either cursor key repeatedly until the cursor is underneath the

arpeggiator field

(A:).

Rotate the data entry control to select “

P

” for preset.

3.

4.

5.

Press either cursor key repeatedly until the cursor is underneath the

Preset Category

field and select “

arp

:” using the data entry control.

Press the right cursor button to move it to the

Preset Name

field.

Play notes or chords

on the keyboard. Change presets as desired to audition the various patterns and presets.

MK-6 Operation Manual

39

Basic Operations

Sound Navigator

Sound

Navigator

Preset Category

Sound Navigator allows you to search through preset and instrument categories to find the type of sound you’re looking for. Each preset and instrument has a name and a three letter preset category. You can create your own categories in order to group favorite presets. The preset category is assigned in the Preset Edit menu (Preset Name). Instrument categories are fixed.

When you want to find presets in a particular category, you simply change the category field in the Main screen, then move the cursor to the preset name field to scroll through all the presets in the selected category.

When the cursor is on the Preset Category field, turning the data entry control selects different preset categories. The Name Field will change to show the first preset in each category.

C01 V127 P00 A:off User

064

1

w al: Raverotic

Preset Category

Preset Name

To Change the Preset Category:

1.

2.

From the Main screen (shown above), press either cursor key repeatedly until the cursor is underneath the preset category field.

Rotate the data entry control to select one of the preset categories.

Preset Categories are displayed in alphabetical order.

To Select a Preset within a Category:

1.

After selecting a category, move the cursor to the Preset Name field.

2.

Rotate the data entry control to scroll through the presets in the selected category. Note that the preset numbers will no longer change sequentially.

Instrument Category

When the cursor is on the Instrument Category field (Preset Edit menu), turning the data entry control selects different instrument categories. The

Name Field changes to show the first instrument in each category. Move the cursor back to the instrument name to choose other instruments in the selected category.

L1

INSTRUMENT ROM:MROM1

064

1

wal: Raverotic

40

E-MU Systems

Basic Operations

Multisetups

Multisetups

A Multisetup is a group of parameters that you might associate with a particular performance setup or song. It is like a “snapshot” of the current configuration of the MK-6. There are 64 setups numbered 0-63. All the

Multisetups are user programmable except 63, the factory setup.

O

MK-6 always defaults to

Multisetup 00 on power up.

A Multisetup includes ALL the following parameters:

Preset/Volume/Pan/Arp assignments for each of the 16 MIDI channels.

Multisetup Name

ALL Controllers menu parameters

ALL Global Menu parameters,

except…

User Key Tuning Tables

ALL Arp Menu parameters,

except…

User Arp Patterns

ALL MIDI Menu parameters,

except…

MIDI Program Change->Preset Map

When a Multisetup is selected, it overwrites the current Preset/Vol/Pan/Arp selections on all MIDI channels. It also overwrites the Controllers, Global,

Arp, and MIDI menu parameters (with the exceptions noted above).

If you make changes to any of these menus, MK-6 will retain the changes, even if power is turned off. They are of course, overwritten when you restore a Multisetup.

Restoring

Multisetups

MK-6 contains 64 Multisetup locations. These are all User locations except location 63, which is a factory defined Multisetup.

Multisetups can be restored using a MIDI Bank Select command.

Select: cc00 = 80, cc32 = 00,

(dec) then send a

Program Change

command corresponding to the Multisetup you wish to select.

RESTORE MULTISETUP

003 Jazzercide

To Restore (Select) a Multisetup:

1.

2.

Press the front panel Multisetup button (below the Data Entry Control).

Scroll to the Restore Multisetup screen using the data entry control. The menu page most recently selected since powering up MK-6 will be displayed. The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.

MK-6 Operation Manual

41

Multisetup

Name

Saving

Multisetups

Basic Operations

Multisetups

3.

4.

5.

Press either

cursor

button to move the cursor to the bottom line of the screen.

Now, use the

data entry control

to select a Multisetup. The Enter LED will be flashing.

Press the

Enter

button to load the selected Multisetup.

Multisetups can be named to make it easier to remember their purpose.

1.

Scroll to the “Setup Name” screen (shown below) using the

data entry control

.

MULTISETUP NAME

020 User Setup 23

2.

3.

4.

Press either

cursor

button to move the cursor to the bottom line of the screen.

Change the characters using the

data entry control

. Change the cursor position using the cursor buttons.

Press

Enter

or move the cursor to the top line when you’re finished naming the multisetup.

To Save a Multisetup:

1.

2.

Set the Preset, Volume, Pan and Arp settings for all channels. Set the

Global, MIDI, and Controllers menu parameters the way you want them.

Press the

Multi

button, then scroll to the “Save Setup” screen (shown below) using the

data entry control

.

SAVE SETUP TO

020 Destination Multisetup

3.

4.

5.

Press either

cursor

button to move the cursor to the bottom line of the screen.

Now, use the

data entry control

to select the destination location. The

Enter LED will be flashing.

Press the

Enter

button to save the Multisetup.

42

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Arp/Beats Menu

MK-6’s Beats mode allows you to trigger, latch and unlatch synced loops and grooves from separate keys on your keyboard. Simply select a bts: preset and play the 16 trigger keys to bring specific

Parts

in and out. This is

Macro-Music!

MK-6 can also run up to 16 simultaneously synced arpeggiators, each with a different preset sound. The arpeggiators can either play one of 7 chord arpeggios or can be set to play a pattern, which is a stored sequence of notes. Combined with Beats, the sheer number of musical permutations is staggering!

To enable the Arpeggiator/Beats menu:

Press the Arp button, lighting the LED. The Arp screen displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up MK-6. The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.

Arp parameters are automatically saved to the current multisetup when you exit the menu, but you may wish to save to another location.

To select a new screen:

Press the Home/Enter button or press the Cursor button repeatedly until the cursor is below the screen title heading on the top line of the display.

Rotate the data entry control to select another screen.

If another Multisetup is

“Restored” any unsaved changes will be lost if you haven’t saved the Multisetup.

To modify a parameter:

Press either Cursor button repeatedly (or hold down the right cursor button while turning the data entry control) until the cursor is below the desired parameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change the value.

To access a submenu:

The Master Arpeggiator screens have submenus which are accessed by pressing the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the lower left corner of the display. Select the submenu function using the data entry control.

To save Arpeggiator parameters:

Press the Multi button and scroll to “Save Setup To”. Select a Setup number and press Enter.

See “Saving Multisetups” on page 42.

To return to the previously selected Mode/View screen:

Press the Arp/Beats button, turning off the LED.

MK-6 Operation Manual

43

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats

Beats

MK-6 contains a 16-track play-only sequencer that is optimized for live performance and groove creation. MK-6 contains dozens of special 16-part

Beats Riffs created by some of the best producers in the business. Beats Riffs are normally used in conjunction with a “

bts:

” preset containing the appropriate percussion mapping, but any preset can be selected and used.

The Beats channel is selected from the Beats enable screen in the Arp/Beats menu.

Here’s how it works. Each of the 16 parts is assigned to a trigger key on the selected Trigger MIDI channel. Each part is brought in or out by pressing that key. Keys can also be Latched

(press the key once to turn the part on, press it again to turn the part off)

. Other control keys allow you to Mute All Parts,

Clear All Parts, and Start & Stop the beat. The 16 parts are arranged in the following manner:

Main Groove

1. Kick1

2. Snare1

3. Hihat1

4. Perc1

Alt. Groove

5. Kick2

6. Snare2

7. Hihat2

8. Perc2

Perc / Fills

9. Perc3/Fill1

10. Perc4/Fill2

11. Perc5/Fill3

12. Perc6/Inst.

Instr/Wild

13. Inst1/Wild1

14. Inst2/Wild2

15. Inst3/Wild3

16. Bass

_

Beats (bts:) Riffs are special 16-part riffs made especially for use with Beats mode. A Riff without the

bts:

prefix only has Part 1 recorded.

O

By assigning Trigger

Buttons (page 76) to the

keyboard Beats Layout Keys, you can trigger Beats and MIDI notes using the Trigger buttons.

For each Beats Riff, you have 2 Grooves, 4 Fills which correspond to the four parts of the Main and Alternate groove, and 4 Instrument parts. By adding and removing parts, you control the complexity of the groove.

Each part can also be scaled by

Key Velocity

, allowing you to fade parts in and out (if velocity is routed to volume) as you play, or can be

Transposed

over a six octave range.

Each part can be assigned to any one of four

Groups,

which allow multiple parts to be triggered from a single key. You can only access Groups using the keyboard trigger keys. See the Factory Setup diagram on the next page.

Trigger layouts are saved with the Multisetup.

44

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats

Factory Setup

Multisetup 63

C-2 C-1 C0

Main

Groove

Alternate

Groove

The chart above shows the Factory Multisetup assignment of each Part, the 4 Groups and the Control Keys. These assignments can be modified to suit your personal preference, then saved in one of the Multisetup locations.

O

Starting Beats mode with the Start/Stop key allows you to start the sequencer rolling silently. Then you can bring Parts in and out using the “Busy” control.

O

If Mute is set to 1-bar, the Part mutes for 1 bar then un-mutes.

• Start/Stop Trigger

Starts the beat sequencer from the beginning of the sequence. When latched, pressing once starts and pressing again stops. When unlatched, the sequence runs as long as the key is held.

Once the Beats sequencer is started, it continues to run even if no triggers are active.

• Clear Parts

Start/Stop doesn’t clear latched parts when it stops the sequencer. Any trigger played after stopping will not only start the sequencer and play that trigger's part, but also play all previously latched parts.

Clears any enabled parts. This control provides a quick and easy way to shut off all latched Parts.

Latch mode has no effect on this key.

• Mute

• Trig Hold

Mutes all Parts while held, but the Beats sequencer continues running.

When this key is held, all other Trigger Keys behave as if they were in Latch mode.

MK-6 Operation Manual

45

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats Mode

The Beats sequencer plays as long as any Beats triggers are active. Beats Riffs can also be

Restarted

using a MIDI Song Start command even if the Beats channel is not currently selected. The Audition LED illuminates whenever the Beats sequencer is running (even if no Parts are playing).

Pressing the Audition button or starting a Demo causes the Beats sequencer to stop. Pressing the Audition button plays selected Parts on “bts:” presets.

All Arp/Beats parameters are saved with the Multisetup.

(See “Multisetups” on page 41 for more information.)

Beats Mode

This screen turns Beats mode on and has several other features which allow flexible control over Beats mode. There are several status modes that determine when Beats will be turned on and which Riff will be used.

Beats and BEAT Triggers can be set to different MIDI channels. This allows you to perform on two MIDI channels at once with a keyboard that only transmits on a single MIDI channel.

BEATS MODE Status: P

BtsCh: Basic TrigCh:Basic

The Basic Channel is the

MIDI channel currently displayed in the Main Screen.

Status

• Off

. . . . . . . Beats mode off.

• On

. . . . . . . . Beats mode on. The Riff assigned in the preset is used.

• P

. . . . . . . . . Beats mode is turned on

ONLY

if the Riff assigned in the preset is a “bts:” riff. The Riff assigned in the preset is used.

(Default setting)

• M

. . . . . . . . . Beats mode on. The Master Riff is used (Arp/Beats menu).

BEATS MODE Status: P

BtsCh: Basic TrigCh:Basic

Beats Channel (BtsCh)

• 01-16

. . . . . Selects the MIDI channel on which Beats play.

• Basic

. . . . . . Beats play on the MIDI channel displayed in the Main Screen.

Trigger Channel (TrigCh)

• 01-16

. . . . . . . Selects the MIDI channel on which Trigger Keys will be active.

• Basic

. . . . . . . . Sets the Trigger Keys to the MIDI channel displayed on the

Main Screen.

46

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats Mode

Beats Setup:

Set the Trigger Buttons to Beats Mode

1.

Press the

Controllers

button on the front panel.

2.

3.

4.

Turn the

data entry control

clockwise until you fin the “TRIGGER

BUTTONS FUNCTION” screen.

Set the lower line of the display to read, “Play Beats Parts”.

Press the

Controllers

button on the front panel again to exit the menu.

Set the Trigger Buttons to be Triggers

5.

Press the

Triggers

button in the Command Functions section of the front panel. OK, now you’re ready to start playing Beats.

_

If you don’t select a

“bts:”

preset, only the first trigger key will work.

Riffs marked “bts:” have 16 parts. Riffs without “bts:” have only 1 part.

Playing Beats:

Selecting Beats Presets

1.

Press the

right cursor button twice

so that the cursor is located beneath the

Category

field.

2.

3.

4.

Turn the

data entry control

until

bts:

is shown in the Category field.

Press the

right cursor button

so that the cursor is underneath the

Preset Name

field.

Now turning the

data entry control

selects ONLY

bts:

presets!

Play Beats

5.

Press any of the sixteen front panel

Trigger Buttons

. Notice that each button brings in a specific part. The chart below shows which buttons control which part in

bts:

presets.

Main Groove

1. Kick1

2. Snare1

3. Hihat1

4. Perc1

Alt. Groove

5. Kick2

6. Snare2

7. Hihat2

8. Perc2

Perc / Fills Instr/Wild

9. Perc3/Fill1

10. Perc4/Fill2

11. Perc5/Fill3

12. Perc6/Inst.

13. Inst1/Wild1

14. Inst2/Wild2

15. Inst3/Wild3

16. Bass

6.

7.

Also notice that the Audition LED comes on when Beats begin playing.

Beats are simply multitrack Audition Riffs. You can use the

Audition

button to turn Beats on and off.

Try out a few different

bts:

presets.

MK-6 Operation Manual

47

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats Mode

Get Busy!

Two of the Controller knobs are programmed to control Beats. Check it out!

8.

9.

10.

Press the

M-P

button in the

Controllers

section. Its LED will light.

Now turn the

Mod 1 knob

with a Beats Riff playing. Mod 1 is controls the

Beats Busy

parameter which adds or subtracts parts from the Beat.

Turn the

Mod 2 knob

with a Beats Riff playing. Mod 2 is controls the

Beats Variation

parameter. Beats Variation changes which parts are playing without changing the number of parts. This makes it easy to try out different combinations of Beat Parts.

To Play Beats on a different MIDI channel:

Beats can be assigned to a certain MIDI channel while you play the keyboard on another channel.

(Make sure you have Beats mode set up correctly

as described in “Beats Setup” on page 47.)

1.

Press the

Arp/Beats

button. The screen shown below appears.

BEATS MODE Status: P

BtsCh: Basic TrigCh:Basic

O

Wrong FX?

In Omni mode, the FX assigned to channel 2 will be used. In Multi mode, the Master FX settings

will be used. See pages 88 & 98.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Set the Beats Channel (BtsCh) to

01

.

Select any

bts:

preset on channel

1

(main screen)

.

Press any of the sixteen

Beats buttons

to start your Beat playing.

(Do

NOT start Beats by pressing the Audition button.)

Press the

+ Channel

button to the left of the LCD to select

channel 2.

Select a preset to jam along with the Beat.

The Trigger Keys now play Beats and the other keys play the preset on channel

2

.

The Audition button can be used to turn the Beat off.

(If you try to use it to turn Beats on while on channel 2, the Riff on channel 2 will play.)

48

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats Controllers

Beats Controllers

Beats can be controlled using the front panel real-time controllers or external MIDI continuous controllers.

Controllers are patched to Beats via the Preset PatchCords located in the Edit menu.

The following Preset

PatchCord destinations control Beats.

Beat Velocity Group 1-4 (BtsVelG1 -> BtsVelG4)

Parts assigned to one of the four Beats groups can have their velocity scaled by the controller input. Since most “bts” presets have velocity controlling volume, this control can be used to mix the relative levels of the Groups.

Beats velocity works as a percent

addition

. An input value of 0 (or no Cord) means change the velocity by 0%. A full scale modulation setting of 100% in the PatchCord adds 100% to the velocity value 100% + 100% = 200%. A

PatchCord setting of -100%

subtracts

100% from the velocity (making it 0).

Beat velocity scalings are reset with a preset change.

Beat Xpose Group 1-4 (BtsXpsG1 -> BtsXpsG4)

Parts assigned to one of the four Beats groups are transposed by the controller input. Transpose works by shifting the keyboard position and not by changing the tuning of individual notes. Therefore, on a Beats presets (bts), where different instruments are assigned to each key,

Transpose has the effect of changing the instrument used by a particular part. This control ADDS to the Part Transpose set in the Beats Transpose

screen (page 53). Beat transpose offsets are reset with a preset change.

Original

Part

Transposed

+12

Kick Crowd

The Mod 1 controller knob is assigned to Beats Busy.

Beat Busy (BtsBusy)

This destination determines which parts are enabled. Beat Busy will accept either positive or negative values.

• Positive values

Add

parts to whatever parts are triggered

• Negative values

Remove

parts that are triggered.

MK-6 Operation Manual

49

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats Controllers

O

A PatchCord amount of

50% is enough to drive Beat

Busy to the maximum setting.

Suppose the pitch wheel

(which can output both positive and negative values)

were connected to Beat Busy and four Key Triggers are down. As the pitch wheel is moved from center to fully up, the remaining parts will be enabled until the pitch wheel is fully up and all parts are playing. Moving the pitch wheel from center to fully down, the four triggered parts are sequentially removed until at the most negative position of the wheel, no parts are playing.

O

Hot Tip!

The Bidirectional Mod Wheel:

Set Mod Wheel to BtsBusy with a

Cord amount of +100, then add a DC bias to BtsBusy with a Cord amount of -50. Wheel now adds or subtracts “Busyness”.

O

Cool Tip!

Connecting

Key Pressure to Beat Busy at

50% increases BEAT complexity the harder you press.

The Busy control acts on the Beats condition whenever the control is changed. Playing more triggers without changing the Busy control simply adds them until the Busy control is changed again, at which point it will possibly add or subtract parts as needed.

The interaction between the Busy control, Triggers, Part Velocity and Group

Velocity can get complicated, but works according to this rule:

WHICHEVER CONTROL WAS LAST CHANGED TAKES OVER

When interacting with the Group Velocity scale control, the Busy control ignores group velocity even when it is set to zero, enabling and disabling parts as necessary. If the Group Velocity is changed

after

the Busy control, it takes control, scaling parts as it deems necessary.

The Busy control

does

take the Part velocity into account when adding and subtracting parts. If a part has a velocity of 0%, it is removed from the list of parts that the Busy control adds or subtracts. Therefore, you can use the

Part Velocity control to remove parts you don’t want to hear.

Brings in Parts

Beat

Busy

Removes Parts

Played

Positive controller values bring in new Parts and negative controller values remove

Parts that are latched or held. In this example, the Pitch Wheel is connected to

Beat Busy since it outputs negative as well as positive values.

The Mod 2 controller knob is assigned to Beats

Variation.

Beat Variation (BtsVari)

Beat Variation varies which Parts are brought in and out using the Beat

Busy control. Increasing this control mixes up the order in which Parts are brought in and out, thus providing even more permutations to the Beat.

50

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats Keys Layout

Beats Keys Layout

This screen assigns the Beats triggers to keyboard notes on the Beats channel. For each Part, Group and Control Key you can select the following options:

_

Save your Beats Keys

Layouts and all other Arp/Beats parameters using “Save Setup” function in the Multisetup menu.

• Key . . . . . . . . .

Selects which keyboard key triggers the Part

• Latch

. . . . . . . . The first key press turns the Part on, the next turns it off.

• Unlatch

. . . . . . The Part plays only while the key is held.

• 1-bar

. . . . . . . . The Part plays for one bar then stops.

BEATS KEYS LAYOUT

Part 1 Key: C1 unlatch

1-Bar Trigger Option

The 1-bar option requires a bit of explanation. When a trigger key is pressed before the last beat of the measure, the part will continue playing until the end of the measure. If the Trigger Key is pressed after the last beat of the measure, the part waits until the next measure before playing. Then it plays for the entire measure and stops. The time signature and the measure bounds are determined by the particular Beats Riff you are playing.

Trig Key pressed before the last beat

Part continues to end of measure then stops.

1 2 3

Measure 1

4 1 2 3

Measure 2

4

Trig Key pressed here

Part begins at next measure and plays entire measure

1 2 3

Measure 1

4 1 2 3

Measure 2

4

MK-6 Operation Manual

51

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats Keys Offset

Beats Keys Offset

This function slides the Beats Trigger keys

(assigned in the previous screen)

up and down the keyboard. This makes it easy to change the keyboard location of the trigger keys without having to re-assign each key. A positive offset moves the group of triggers up the keyboard by the designated number of keys. Negative offsets move the trigger group lower on the keyboard.

BEATS KEYS OFFSET

+000 keys

Beats Part Velocity

Negative Offset Positive Offset

Trigger

Keys

Beats Keys Offset slides the entire group of beats triggers up or down the keyboard.

Each note of a Beats Riff can have its recorded velocity scaled by a value

(from 0 to 120%) of the recorded velocity or the actual played velocity of the trigger key can be used (trigger vel). For example, if a note’s velocity is

80, scaling by 110% will increase the note’s velocity to 88. This feature allows you to control the mix of the different parts in advance or “on-thefly” as you play. If a part’s velocity is set to 0%, that part will be removed from the mix.

Select Part

P1

BEATS PART VELOCITY

Scaled by: trigger vel

To Set the Velocity for each Part:

1.

Press the left cursor button to move the cursor under the Part field.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Select the Part number using the Data Entry Control. Parts 1-16 can be selected.

(All parts, shown as an “A”, can be edited at once if “Edit All

Layers” is enabled in the Master menu.)

Move the cursor to the bottom line using the cursor keys and adjust the

Velocity Scaling percentage using the Data Entry Control.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all the Parts you wish to adjust.

Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor back to the screen heading.

52

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats

Beats Part Transpose

Each Part of a Beat Riff can be transposed up to 36 semitones up or down.

Transpose works by shifting the keyboard position and not by changing the tuning of individual notes. Therefore, on a Beats preset (bts:), where different instruments are assigned to each key,

Transpose has the effect of changing the instrument used by a particular part.

On a preset where a single sound covers the entire keyboard, Transpose will actually transpose the sound.

Select Part

P1

BEATS PART TRANSPOSE

+00 semitones

To set the Transposition for each Part:

1.

Press the left cursor button to move the cursor under the Part field.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Select the Part number using the Data Entry Control. Parts 1-16 can be selected.

(All parts, shown as an “A”, can be edited at once if “Edit All

Layers” is enabled in the Master menu.)

Move the cursor to the bottom line using the cursor keys and adjust the

Transposition in semitones using the Data Entry Control.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all the Parts you wish to adjust.

Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor back to the screen heading.

Original

Part

Transposed

+12

Kick Crowd

MK-6 Operation Manual

53

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats

Beats Part Group

This screen is where you assign Parts to one of the four Groups. By grouping, you can play multiple parts with a single key. A part can be in one and only one group, or in no groups.

Select Part

P1

BEATS PART GROUP

Group: 2

_

All Parts assigned to a

Group will stop playing when the Group key is triggered, then untriggered even if the individual

Parts in the Group are latched.

To Assign a Part to a Group:

1.

Press the left cursor button to move the cursor under the Part field.

2.

Select the Part number using the Data Entry Control. Parts 1-16 can be selected.

(All parts, shown as an “A”, can be edited at once if “Edit All

Layers” is enabled in the Master menu.)

3.

4.

5.

Move the cursor to the bottom line using the cursor keys and select the

Group (1-4 or none) using the Data Entry Control.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all the Parts you wish to assign.

Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor back to the screen heading.

Master Riff

The Master Riff is selected from this screen. The Master Riff is used when

Master (M) is selected for Beats in Beats mode enable screen.

MASTER RIFF MROM1

Plays: KEY-C3

To Assign the Master Riff:

1.

Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the lower line of the display.

2.

3.

4.

Select the desired Riff using the Data Entry Control. (Beats Riffs are identified by the

bts:

prefix.)

If there is more than one ROM in MK-6 you can select Riffs from either

ROM set. Move the cursor under the ROM ID and select using the Data

Entry Control.

Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor back to the screen heading.

54

E-MU Systems

Riff Tempo

Riff Controllers

Arp/Beats Menu

Beats

This setting determines whether

Riff Tempo

(the tempo stored with each

Riff) or the

Current Tempo

(the Base Tempo from the Master Clock) will be used for Beats.

To control the Riff Tempo from MIDI clock, set Riff Tempo to “use current tempo” and Base Tempo to “use MIDI”.

RIFF TEMPO use riff tempo

To Set the Riff Tempo Mode:

1.

2.

Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the lower line of the display.

Select “use riff tempo” or “use current tempo” using the Data Entry

Control.

3.

Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor back to the screen heading.

Riffs contain real-time control information. This function allows you to turn these controllers On or Off for the Riffs. This control affects Audition

Riffs as well as Beats Riffs.

RIFF CONTROLLERS use riff controllers

To Turn Riff Controllers On or Off:

1.

2.

Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the lower line of the display.

Select “use riff controllers” or “ignore riff controllers” using the Data

Entry Control.

3.

Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor back to the screen heading.

MK-6 Operation Manual

55

Arp/Beats Menu

MIDI Song Start

MIDI Song Start

This function enables or disables MIDI Song Start for the Arpeggiator and

Riffs. The MIDI Song Start option restarts the arpeggiator and/or Riff (BEAT) to the beginning when a MIDI Song Start command is received. This is useful for synchronizing arpeggios and Beats when recording into, or playing along with a sequencer. You can choose to resync: Arp, Riff, both

Arp and Riff, or disable MIDI Song Start.

MIDI SONG START resyncs arps & riffs

Arp/Riff

MIDI Out

This parameter selects whether or not the Arpeggiator and/or Riff (Beats) note data is sent to the MIDI out port. This feature lets you use MK-6 as an arpeggiator or sequencer for your other MIDI instruments. It also lets you record the arpeggios and Riffs into a MIDI sequencer. You can choose to transmit: Arpeggiator data, Riff data, both Arp and Riff data, or nothing.

ARP/RIFF MIDI OUT don’t transmit

56

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Arpeggiators

Arpeggiators

An arpeggiator moves a pattern of notes sequentially over a range of the keyboard. MK-6 has the unique ability to play a different arpeggiator on each MIDI channel!

Arpeggiator settings can be defined as part of the preset (using the Arp parameters in the Preset Edit menu), or globally in the Arpeggiator menu.

The preset and master arpeggiators have the same parameters which we define in this chapter.

The Arp field in the main screen defines which arpeggiator settings will be used. “M” uses the master Arpeggiator settings and on/off status (as defined in the Arpeggiator menu). “P” uses the preset’s arpeggiator settings and on/ off status (as defined in the Edit menu). Choosing “On” uses the preset’s arpeggiator settings regardless of whether or not it is turned on in the Edit menu and Off turns off the arpeggiator regardless of the settings and status specified in either menu.

_

SAVE your Arp setups

and name them using the “Save

Setup To” function located in the

Multi

menu. See“Saving

Multisetups” on page 42.

Arp Settings in the

Preset are Used

C01 V127 P00 A:P USER

047

3

arp: Sine Drum

All arpeggiators share MK-6’s master clock and its current setting. The master clock can be MK-6’s internal clock or an external MIDI clock

(page 82). Although the arpeggiators use the master clock setting, the

tempo divisor can be unique for each arpeggiator setup.

Arpeggiator modes include up, up/down, forward assign, backward assign, forward/backward assign and random as well as play

Patterns

. Patterns are pre-recorded sequences of notes and rests. All key-on notes play the pattern. For example, if you play a chord, all the notes in the chord play the pattern in harmony. MK-6 contains 200 factory patterns and 100 user definable patterns.

MK-6 Operation Manual

57

Arp/Beats Menu

Master Arpeggiator Parameters

Arp Controllers

The Arpeggiators can be controlled using the front panel real-time controllers or external MIDI continuous controllers. Controllers are patched to Arps via the Preset PatchCords located in the Preset Edit menu.

See “Preset Patchcords” on page 165.

The following Preset PatchCord destinations control the Arpeggiators.

Arpeggiator Resolution (ArpRes)

This control changes the Arpeggiator Note Value, which defines the length of the notes when playing arpeggiated chords. It

adds

to the note value set in the Arpeggiator Note Value screen.

See “Note Value” on page 60.

Arpeggiator Extension (ArpExt)

This control changes the Arpeggiator Extension Count. It

adds

to the extension count programmed in the Arpeggiator Note Value screen.

See

“Extension Count” on page 62.

Arpeggiator Velocity (ArpVel)

This control changes the Arpeggiator Velocity Value. It

scales

the velocity value set in the Arpeggiator Note Value screen.

See “Velocity” on page 61.

Arpeggiator Gate (ArpGate)

This control changes the Arpeggiator Gate Time. It

adds

to the gate time set

in the Arpeggiator Gate Time screen.

See “Gate Time” on page 61.

Arpeggiator Interval (ArpIntvl)

This control modulates the Arpeggiator Extension Interval. It

adds

to the

extension programmed in the Arpeggiator Extension Interval screen.

See

“Extension Interval” on page 62.

Master

Arpeggiator

Parameters

The Master Arpeggiator is defined in the Arp menu. The Arpeggiator mode selected on the Main Screen determines whether the Master arpeggiator or the Preset menu arpeggiator settings are used.

To Access the Master Arpeggiator Parameters:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Press the

Arp

menu button lighting the LED. The Arpeggiator menu screen displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up

MK-6. The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.

Use the right

cursor

button to advance the cursor to the first field in the bottom line of the screen.

Now, use the

data entry control

to access the various Master

Arpeggiator parameters.

Save

your Arpeggiator settings using the “Save Setup” function on the

Multi menu.

58

E-MU Systems

Status

Mode

Arp/Beats Menu

Master Arpeggiator Parameters

The Status parameter turns the Master Arpeggiator on and off. The Channel

Arpeggiator setting in the main screen overrides this setting. For example, if you set the Arpeggiator in the main screen to “off,” and turn it “on” here, it still will not play.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Status off

The Mode parameter determines the direction or pattern mode of the arpeggiated notes.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Mode up

The eight arpeggiator modes are:

• Up

Held notes arpeggiate continuously from lowest to highest pitch.

• Down

• Up/Down

Held notes arpeggiate continuously from highest to lowest pitch.

Held notes arpeggiate continuously from lowest to highest pitch, then from highest to lowest, then repeat this cycle.

• Fwd Assign

Held notes arpeggiate continuously in the order in which the keys were pressed.

• Bkwd Assign

Held notes arpeggiate continuously in the reverse order in which the keys were pressed.

• Fwd/Bkwd

Held notes arpeggiate continuously in the order in which the keys were pressed, then arpeggiate in the reverse order that they were pressed. The cycle is then repeated.

• Random

• Pattern

Held notes arpeggiate continuously in a random fashion.

Held notes play the selected pattern (see “Pattern” on page 60 for details).

MK-6 Operation Manual

59

Arp/Beats Menu

Master Arpeggiator Parameters

Note Value

The Note Value determines the duration of each note played. This parameter is used in non-pattern mode only.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Note Value 1/8 dot

Note value has no effect when the mode is set to

“pattern.”

Following is a list of possible Note Values and the relative number of clocks used for each.

Note Value MIDI Clock

Double Whole Note..................... 192

Dotted Whole Note ........................ 144

Double Note Triplet........................ 128

Whole Note.................................... 96

Dotted Half Note .............................. 72

Whole Note Triplet........................... 64

Half Note ....................................... 48

Dotted Quarter Note ........................ 36

Half Note Triplet............................... 32

Quarter Note.................................. 24

Dotted Eighth Note .......................... 18

Quarter Note Triplet ......................... 16

8th Note ......................................... 12

Dotted 16th Note ............................... 9

8th Note Triplet.................................. 8

16th Note ......................................... 6

Dotted 32nd Note ........................... 4.5

16th Note Triplet................................ 4

32nd Note ........................................ 3

Arpeggiator Pattern

Speed

The Arpeggiator Pattern Speed parameter lets you change the playback rate of Patterns by 1/4x, 1/2x, 1x (normal), 2x or 4x normal speed.

Pattern

This field lets you choose the pattern used when the arpeggiator Mode is set to “Pattern.” There are 200 factory programmed patterns and you can

create an additional 100 user definable patterns (see “Editing a User Arpeggiator Pattern” on page 67).

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Pattern 99

1

Pattern Name

60

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Master Arpeggiator Parameters

Velocity

Controller Knob O is programmed to control Arp

Velocity.

The Velocity parameter determines the velocity at which each note arpeggiates. Velocity can be defined by the velocity value specified (from 1 through 127), or by the actual velocity of the played note (played). Bear in mind that velocity values do not have an effect on the sound unless the preset is programmed to respond to velocity.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Velocity played

Gate Time

Controller Knob P is programmed to control Arp Gate

Time.

The Gate Time parameter works together with the Note Value parameter.

Just as Note Value defines the length of a note, the Gate Time sets the percentage of the Note Value time played. This can have a dramatic effect on the sound depending on how the envelope generators are programmed.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Gate 100%

The

note-on

time is used for the start-of-time when calculating note durations. See

“Duration” on page 64.

With a Gate Time setting of 100% the note is held on until the next note starts. The envelope generators never advance to the Release stages. With a

Gate Time setting of 50%, the note is released halfway through the note cycle and the envelope generators proceed to their release stages until the next note occurs. Refer to the following illustration.

Selected Note Value

(8th notes, 16th notes, etc.)

Gate

Time

100%

key-on time

75%

key-on time

50%

key-on time

25%

MK-6 Operation Manual

61

Arp/Beats Menu

Master Arpeggiator Parameters

Extension Count

The Extension Count parameter specifies how many times the Extension

Interval is carried out. With an Extension Count of 0, the arpeggio plays only the notes pressed. With an Extension Count of 1, the arpeggio plays the notes pressed, then plays the same notes (in the same order), transposed by the Extension Interval amount. The cycle is then repeated.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Extension Count 4

For example, with the Extension Interval set to 12 (an octave) and an

Extension Count of 2, and with the Arpeggiator Mode set to Fwd Assign, if you played E2, then C2, then G2, the arpeggiated sequence would consist of: E2, C2, G2, then E3, C3, G3, and then E4, C4, G4. The Extension Count values range from 0 through 15. Refer to the following illustration.

Back

2 1 3 5 4 6 8 7 9

Extend 1 Extend 2

Played

Extension Interval

The Extension Interval specifies the additional intervals played when you press a key. For example, suppose you played C2 with an Interval of 7 (a

Major 5th), Up mode, and an Extension Count of 2. The arpeggio alternates between C2 and G2.

The Extension Interval values range from 1 through 16.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Extension Interval 7

62

E-MU Systems

Sync

Pre-Delay

Arp/Beats Menu

Master Arpeggiator Parameters

The Sync parameter defines when a note is played in relation to when the key is pressed. When set to “Key Sync”, the note sounds the instant a key is pressed. When set to “Quantized”, the note does not sound until the next occurrence of the selected note value.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Sync key sync

The following diagram illustrates how Key Sync and Quantize work.

Key

Pressed

Note Sounds

Immediately

Key Sync

Quarter Notes

Note Doesn't Sound until the Next Quarter Note

Quantize

Quarter Notes

The Pre-Delay value determines how long the arpeggiator is delayed before becoming active after the first “note-on.” During the pre-delay period, notes are played normally (as if the arpeggiator was off). After the pre-delay period has elapsed, the arpeggiator kicks in. Once you release all the keys on the controller, the pre-delay starts over with the next note-on. In combination with the Duration parameter, Pre-Delay lets you create many more variations in the arpeggio patterns.

Please refer to the diagram on page 65.

You can play the preset normally as long as you don’t hold the notes longer than the Pre-Delay. If you do, the arpeggiator starts in. When used in conjunction with multiple arpeggiators, Pre-Delay allows you to offset the time between the different patterns.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Pre-Delay off

MK-6 Operation Manual

63

Arp/Beats Menu

Master Arpeggiator Parameters

Duration

This parameter defines how long the arpeggiator plays before stopping. The

Duration is specified in note values. Therefore if an arpeggio were running at a 16th

Note Value

and the Duration were set to a whole note, the arpeggiator would play 16 steps before stopping. After the duration has elapsed, the arpeggiator remains inactive until the key is released. If Duration is set to Off, the arpeggio repeats as long as the notes are held (Infinite Duration).

Post-Delay

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Duration 1 / 1d

Duration can be used to modify the patterns and increase the possible pattern combinations and variations. Because this parameter limits the length of arpeggiator play time, it can change the arpeggio pattern when the Duration is less than the length of the arpeggio. You can set the arpeggio to repeat continuously using the

Recycle

function described below.

This parameter is only relevant when both the “Duration” and “Recycle” parameters are not in the “Off” state. The Post-Delay value determines how long the arpeggiator is delayed after the Duration period.

Please refer to the

diagram on page 65.

During the post-delay period, notes are played normally

(as if the arpeggiator was off). After the post-delay period has elapsed, the arpeggiator either jumps to the beginning of the Pre-Delay period or to the beginning of the Duration period depending on the Recycle setting.

If the arpeggiator is playing an extension when the Duration expires, the notes in the extension will continue to sound during the Post-Delay

(and

Pre-Delay if on).

On the next pass through the Duration period, the extension continues where it left off.

Post-Delay increases the number of possible variations in the beat and allows the recycle loop to be set to an exact measure of time.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Post-Delay off

64

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Master Arpeggiator Parameters

Recycle

Keyboard Thru

Latch

Keys

Pressed

Notes Sound Arp Plays

Pre-Delay Duration

Re cyc

le on

Notes Sound

Post-Delay

Re

cycle on/No-PreDl

y

Recycle enables the pattern or arpeggio to repeat. This parameter works together with the

Duration

and

Pre/Post Delay

parameters to allow the loop to be set to an exact measure of time. The “on/No-PreDelay” option bypasses the predelay period. With Recycle turned Off, the pattern or arpeggio stops at the end of the Post-Delay period.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Recycle on/No-PreDly

When enabled, Keyboard Thru merges the notes not arpeggiated with the notes being produced by the arpeggiator. This gives the effect of two parts playing at once.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Keyboard Thru off

With Latch mode On, any notes you play remain on until you press them again. Latched notes can also be halted by turning Latch off in this screen, or by turning off the Arpeggiator for the channel in the main screen.

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Latch on

MK-6 Operation Manual

65

Arp/Beats Menu

Send MIDI System Exclusive Data

Use the Key Range parameter to set the keyboard range for the arpeggiator.

Notes inside the range will arpeggiate while notes outside the specified range will not arpeggiate. Use the Extensions parameters to exceed the upper boundary of the Key Range (see the information about Extensions

beginning on page 62).

MASTER ARPEGGIATOR

Key Range C-2->G8

Move the cursor under the first key and use the data entry control to define the lowest key to be arpeggiated. Move the cursor under the second key value and use the data entry control to define the highest key to be arpeggiated.

Send MIDI

System

Exclusive Data

Send data as you would a regular sequence. Sending data in one huge chunk may clog the MIDI input buffer on

MK-6.

Transmits the Arpeggiator Patterns via the MIDI out port as MIDI System

Exclusive data to another MK-6 or to a computer/sequencer for backup.

Using the cursor key and the data entry control, select the MIDI data you want to transmit. See

Send MIDI System Exclusive Data

in the Master chapter for additional details about recording SysEx.

User Patterns

Transmits all the User patterns.

00

0

to 99

0

Transmits only the individual pattern you have selected.

SEND MIDI SYSEX DATA

All User Arp Patterns

66

E-MU Systems

Arp/Beats Menu

Send MIDI System Exclusive Data

Editing a User

Arpeggiator Pattern

Bank 0

= User Patterns

Bank 1

= Factory Patterns

Bank 2

= Factory Patterns

MK-6 lets you create and edit your own arpeggiator patterns. Using the Edit

User Pattern menu, you can create up to 100 user patterns and each pattern can be up to 32 steps in length.

When you edit a pattern, you are writing directly into memory—no Save command is required (however, you must exit the Arp module). This is different from the Edit menu where you must Save a preset before it will be overwritten. If you want to modify an existing pattern and keep the original, you must first COPY the pattern you want to edit to another

location using the function in the Save/Copy menu (See page 191). Refer to

the instructions below and the following parameter descriptions to create your own patterns.

EDIT USER PATTERN

01

1

DRUMnBASS 1

O

Before editing a Pattern, select Master Arpeggiator (M) in the main screen and set the

Arpeggiator to the Pattern you are editing. This lets you hear the Pattern as you edit it.

To Select the Pattern to Edit:

1.

2.

From the Edit User Pattern screen shown above, move the cursor to the bottom line and

select the pattern

you want to edit. The Enter LED begins flashing. Press

Enter

to move back to the Home position.

Select the

next screen

in the list, “User Pattern Edit”. This is where you edit the currently selected pattern.

PTRN KEY VEL DUR RPT

S01 +0 ply 1/8 2

Pattern Step number

Key offset Velocity Duration Repeat

3.

Move the cursor to the

lower line

of the display. For each step, you can select: key, velocity, duration, and number of repeats.

Pattern Step Number

You can set up to 32 steps for each arpeggiator pattern. This field selects which step you will be editing from 1 to 32.

Key

This parameter defines what happens during the current step. The Key parameter can do one of five different operations. Following is a description of each of the key functions and how to use them.

MK-6 Operation Manual

67

Arp/Beats Menu

Send MIDI System Exclusive Data

Key Offset

This parameter defines not the actual note of the arpeggiator playback, but instead specifies the amount of offset, in semitones, from the original note played. You can set a Key Offset from -48 to +48 for each step. For example, if you play a “C” on the keyboard with the Key Offset amount for the first step set to “+1,” the first step in the pattern will be “C#.”

-48 -36 +48 -24

Offset

-12 0

Played

Note

+12 +24

+

Offset

+36

_

IMPORTANT:

The Gate function in the arpeggiator

MUST be set to 100% when using the tie function, otherwise the tied note is retriggered instead of extended.

Tie

This function

extends

the duration of notes beyond the values given in the duration field by “tying” notes together. You can tie together any number of consecutive steps.

+2 tie -5

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Rest

Instead of playing a note, you can define the step as a Rest. The Duration parameter specifies the length of the rest. Rests can be tied together to form longer rests.

Skip

This command simply removes the step from the pattern. The Skip feature makes it easy to remove an unwanted step without rearranging the entire pattern. You’ll be happy to know that the velocity, duration and repeat parameters are remembered if you decide to put the step back later.

End

This command signals the end of the pattern. Any steps programmed after the step containing the End command are ignored.

68

E-MU Systems

Velocity

Duration

Repeat

Arp/Beats Menu

Send MIDI System Exclusive Data

Each note in the pattern plays using either a preset velocity value (from

1 through 127), or using the actual velocity of the played note (ply).

Note:

Velocity values will not have an effect on the sound unless velocity is programmed to do something in the preset.

This parameter sets the length of time for the current step, defined as a note value, based on the Master Tempo. The selectable note durations are described below.

1/32

32nd Note

1/16t

16th Note Triplet

1/32d

Dotted 32nd Note

1/16

16th Note

1/8t

8th Note Triplet

1/16d

Dotted 16th Note

1/8

1/4t

8th Note

Quarter Note Triplet

1/8d

1/4

Dotted Eighth Note

Quarter Note

1/2t

1/4d

1/2

1/1d

1/1t

1/2d

1/1

2/1t

2/1

Half Note Triplet

Dotted Quarter Note

Half Note

Dotted Whole Note

Whole Note Triplet

Dotted Half Note

Whole Note

Double Whole Note

Triplet

Double Whole Note

Each step can be played from 1 to 32 times. A repeat setting of “1” indicates the step will be played one time (not repeated one time or played twice).

To Edit a User Pattern:

1.

2.

3.

4.

The first field in the Edit User Pattern field defines the pattern’s step number. Start with the pattern Step 01.

Define the Key Offset, Velocity, Duration and Repeat values.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have setup the desired number of steps in the pattern.

Set the Key Offset to “End” on the last step in the pattern.

MK-6 Operation Manual

69

Arp/Beats Menu

Multichannel Arpeggiating

User Pattern Name

The User Pattern Name page lets you enter a name for any User Arpeggiator

Pattern.

PTRN KEY VEL DUR RPT

S01 +0 ply 1/8 2

To Name a User Pattern:

1.

2.

From the Pattern Edit screen shown above, position the cursor under the

PTRN

field.

Turn the

data entry control

clockwise. The following screen appears.

USER PATTERN NAME

00

0

Mod Cycle

3.

4.

5.

6.

Move the cursor to the bottom line and

edit the Pattern

name using the data entry control and Cursor keys.

Move the cursor to the “

Home

” position (shown above) by pressing the

Home/Enter

button.

Turn the

data entry control

counter-clockwise one click to return to the Pattern Edit screen.

Turn the

data entry control

counterclockwise multiple clicks to jump back to the main Arpeggiator menu screen.

Multichannel

Arpeggiating

Presets with the arpeggiator assigned will play when they receive note-on data from the keyboard or external MIDI source.

Please refer to the instructions on page 26 to learn one way to perform

using multiple arpeggiators.

70

E-MU Systems

Controllers Menu

The Controllers menu contains functions related to the keyboard, knobs or trigger buttons of MK-6. For example, the Command Function Trigger Keys are programmed in this menu. All Controllers menu data is saved with the

Multisetup. See page 41 for more information about Multisetups.

To enable the Controllers menu:

Press the Controllers button, lighting the LED. The Controllers Menu screen displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up

MK-6. The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.

To select a new screen:

Press the Home/Enter button or press the Cursor button repeatedly until the cursor is below the screen title heading. Rotate the data entry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameter:

Press either Cursor button repeatedly (or hold down the right cursor button while turning the data entry control) until the cursor is below the desired parameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change the value.

To return to the previously selected Mode/View screen:

Press the Controllers button, turning off the LED.

MK-6 Operation Manual

71

Controllers Menu

Keyboard Transpose

Realtime

Control

Functions

This section describes how set up the Realtime Controllers on MK-6.

Realtime Controllers are performance controls such as the controller knobs, velocity & pressure sensitive keyboard, and the trigger buttons.

Keyboard Transpose

This option allows you to offset the transposition of the keyboard in semitone intervals. This is allows you to easily play in different keys with the keyboard and lets you access different groups of instruments in a drum map. The transpose range is ±36 semitones.

KEYBOARD TRANSPOSE

+00 semitones

Keyboard Channel

in Quick Edit mode the front panel knobs only control the “Basic Channel”.

This option allows you to select which channel is controlled by the

Keyboard, Knobs as well as the Pitch & Mod Wheels. You can select any of the 16 channels or “Basic”. If the “Basic” channel is selected, the keyboard and knobs always control the preset showing in the Main screen.

KEYBOARD CHANNEL

Channel: Basic

Local Control On/Off

Local Control is used to disconnect the keyboard and controllers (knobs, wheels, footswitches) from the sound generating section. Even though disconnected from the internal synthesizer, the keyboard and controllers are still transmitted over MIDI. Local Control is normally turned Off when recording into an external MIDI sequencer (set sequencer to Echo Thru).

Played data and recorded data are merged in the computer sequencer and then sent back to the module. This feature can also be used if you want to control another MIDI sound generator from the keyboard and knobs without playing internal sounds.

LOCAL CONTROL ON/OFF on

72

E-MU Systems

Controllers Menu

Keyboard Velocity Curve

MIDI

Out

CO 1 A Vo l 1 27 Pan00R

032 bas : I n t e r f e r en c e

MIDI

In

Keyboard Velocity

Curve

Turning Local Control Off allows you to use the Echo Thru feature on your sequencer while sequencing. In conjunction with Echo Thru, Local Control Off allows you to record into the external sequencer and hear the correct sounds whether you are recording or playing back the sequence.

The velocity response of the keyboard can be adjusted using any of 17 curves in order to customize the dynamic feel of the keyboard to your individual playing style. This curve adjusts the output of the MK-6 keyboard before it is sent to the MIDI output port and to the Master

Velocity Curve described on page 85.

KEYBOARD VELOCITY CURVE soft #2

The Keyboard Velocity

Curve diagrams are located on

page 233.

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

Instrument

Z-Plane

Filter

L

Amp

R

Master

Velocity Curve

Internal

Synthesizer

Keyboard

Velocity Curve

The Keyboard Velocity Curve modifies the velocity data from the keyboard keys. This data is sent to the MIDI output port and through the Master Velocity Curve before reaching the Synthesizer. Incoming MIDI data is filtered through the Master Velocity Curve only.

MK-6 Operation Manual

73

Controllers Menu

Channel Aftertouch On/Off

Channel Aftertouch

On/Off

The keyboard generates channel aftertouch messages. Aftertouch is generated when you continue to press the keys

after

the note has been played. Aftertouch can be a very useful controller for adding a bit of vibrato or creating a volume swell. Aftertouch is routed to the

Pressure

source in the PatchCord screen. This control allows you to turn aftertouch on or off without having to modify each preset.

CHANNEL AFTERTOUCH on

Footswitch Function

The footswitch jack on MK-6’s rear panel can be programmed to perform a variety of functions. The footswitch jack is designed to accept a momentary footswitches which shorts the tip and ground. MK-6 senses either normally-on or normally-off switches on power-up.

The following functions can be controlled via the footswitches.

FOOTSWITCH JACK FUNCTION

MIDI FtSw

• MIDI Footswitch

In this mode the footswitch is routed to the

“FootSw1” PatchCord source in the Preset Edit,

Cords menu.

(See pages 159 and 166.)

It is also transmitted out on the Footswitch Controller number as programmed in the Controllers menu.

(See page 80.)

• Tap Tempo

• Channel +

Pressing the footswitch allows you to tap in the current tempo with your foot.

Pressing the footswitch increments the MIDI channel number.

• Channel -

Preset +

Preset -

Pressing the footswitch decrements the MIDI channel number.

Pressing the footswitch increments the current preset number.

Pressing the footswitch decrements the current preset number.

74

E-MU Systems

Controllers Menu

Foot Pedal Function

Foot Pedal Function

The foot pedal jack on MK-6’s rear panel can be programmed to perform a variety of functions. The foot pedal input can sense either 0-5 volts on the ring of a stereo jack or a foot pedal with the potentiometer wired as shown at left.

The following functions can be controlled via the foot pedal jack.

Pedal Wiring

Ground Tip

FOOT PEDAL FUNCTION

FootCtrl

Ring

Tip

Ground

Ring

• Foot Controller

• Channel Volume

• Master Volume

In this mode the Foot Pedal is routed to the

“Pedal” PatchCord source in the Preset Edit, Cords menu.

(See pages 159 and 166.)

It is also transmitted out on MIDI Continuous Controller #4 on the basic

MIDI channel.

The Foot Pedal controls the volume of the current channel. (The MIDI channel currently showing in the main screen.) Channel volume is pre-effect— reverb or echoes will continue to sound even when the pedal is off.

The Foot Pedal controls the overall volume of the

MK-6. This duplicates the function of the Master

Volume knob on the front panel. Master volume is post-effect—effects will be cut off when the pedal is off.

Trigger Buttons

Function

This option selects the function of the front panel “Triggers” button. The

“Triggers” button can be used either to

Play Beats Parts

or to

Play Note

Events

.

• Play Beats Parts

In this mode and when the Triggers button is selected, the sixteen command buttons turn Beats parts on and off.

• Play Note Events

In this mode and when the Triggers button is selected, the sixteen command buttons work like keyboard notes. Each button can be assigned to any

MIDI note, on any MIDI Channel (01-16), with any velocity (0-127), and can be set to be latched or momentarily on.

TRIGGER BUTTONS FUNCTION

Play Note Events

MK-6 Operation Manual

75

Controllers Menu

Trigger Buttons

Trigger Buttons

O

By assigning Trigger

Buttons to the keyboard Beats

Layout Keys (page 51), you can

trigger Beats and MIDI notes using the Trigger buttons.

This screen allows you to program the 16 trigger buttons to play note events.

Note:

This screen is not available when the “Trigger Buttons

Function”

(see previous page)

is set to “Play Beats Parts”.

Set the previous screen to “Play Note Events”. Select Triggers mode by pressing the mode select button so that the “Triggers” LED is illuminated.

Now the 16 buttons work like keyboard notes. Each of the 16 buttons can be assigned to any MIDI note, on any MIDI Channel (01-16), with any velocity (0-127), and can be set to be latched or momentarily on. Latched notes will hold until the button is pressed again. Latched notes will be indicated by the LEDs.

Simply move the cursor from the “TRIGGERS” field and play a note to enter the MIDI key and velocity. Pressing a Trigger Button anytime while in this screen automatically selects that trigger button for programming!

Trigger Button Select Latch on/off

T1 TRIGGERS Latch:off

Key: C3 Ch: 01 Vel: 127

MIDI Key MIDI Channel

Velocity

O

Latched buttons are especially useful for triggering arpeggiated presets.

To Setup the Trigger Buttons:

1.

Press the Controllers button. Its LED will illuminate.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Turn the data entry control to select the “TRIGGERS” screen.

Use the left/right cursor controls to select the fields shown above.

Select the MIDI key, the MIDI channel, the Velocity and Latch on/off for each of the 16 trigger buttons.

Save the Multisetup if you want to save these settings. See page 42.

To Play the Trigger Buttons:

1.

Press the Controllers button. Its LED will illuminate.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Turn the data entry control to select the “TRIGGERS BUTTONS

FUNCTION” screen.

Move the cursor to the lower line and select “Play Note Events”.

Press the Command Functions “Triggers” button so that its LED illuminates.

Play the Trigger buttons.

76

E-MU Systems

Controllers Menu

Preset Select Buttons

Preset Select Buttons

The 16 command buttons can also be used for preset selection. Each button can be programmed to select any preset on the Basic MIDI channel. For

your next song, selecting another Multisetup (page 41) selects another

group of sixteen presets.

The Basic MIDI channel is the channel currently showing in the main screen.

In Preset Select mode, whenever the current preset on the basic channel matches any of the 16 “favorites” assigned to the Preset Select buttons, its

LED will illuminate.

Select Preset Select mode from the Command Functions. Now the 16 buttons are programmable preset selection buttons.

Trigger Button Select Preset Location

T1 PRESET - SELECT User

006

0

bas: Fatty

Preset Number

Category

Preset Name

When a preset is selected using the Preset Select buttons, the cursor is automatically located underneath the Preset Name field. This feature makes it easy to select other presets of the same type.

Quick Method of Programming the Preset Select Buttons:

1.

2.

Select the preset

you want from the Main screen.

Press and hold the

Preset Select

button, then press one of the sixteen

Trigger

buttons.

3.

The preset will be stored in the trigger button you selected.

To Program the Preset Select Buttons from the Menu:

1.

Press the

Controllers

button. Its LED will illuminate.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Turn the

data entry control

to select the “PRESET - SELECT” screen.

Use the left/right cursor controls to select the fields shown above.

Select the desired preset for each of the 16 trigger buttons.

Save the Multisetup if you want to save these settings. See page 42.

To Use the Preset Select Buttons:

1.

From the main preset selection screen, press the

Preset Select

button.

Its LED will illuminate.

2.

Press any of the 16 buttons to select a new preset.

MK-6 Operation Manual

77

Controllers Menu

Preset Select Send Buttons

Preset Select Send

Buttons

Suppose you wanted to send another MIDI program change message to an external synthesizer. The 16 command buttons can also send external MIDI program changes on the Basic MIDI channel. Each button can be programmed to select any preset from 0-127, in any bank.

Select Preset Select mode from the Command Functions. Now the 16 buttons are programmable preset selection buttons.

Trigger Button Select

T1 PRESET - SELECT SEND

MSB:015 LSB:003 PROG: 127

Bank MSB Bank LSB Program Change

Number

To Program the Program Change Send Buttons:

1.

2.

Press the Controllers button. Its LED will illuminate.

Turn the data entry control to select the “PRESET - SELECT SEND” screen.

3.

4.

5.

Use the left/right cursor controls to select the fields shown above.

Select the desired program change and bank for each of the 16 trigger buttons. (If you don’t want to send an external program change, set the fields to “off”.)

Save the Multisetup if you want to save these settings. See page 42.

To Send an External Program Change:

1.

2.

From the main preset selection screen, press the

Preset Select

button.

Its LED will illuminate.

Press one of the 16 buttons to send the program change.

78

E-MU Systems

Knob Preset

Quick-Edit

Controllers Menu

Knob Preset Quick-Edit

“Quick-Edit” changes the initial controller setting in the preset whenever you move a Control Knob. This parameter selects whether or not the front panel Controller Knobs are used to Quick-Edit the currently selected preset.

See “Preset Edit Button” on page 32 in the Operations chapter for more

details.

KNOBS PRESET QUICK-EDIT disabled

Real-time Controller

Assignment

O

Tip:

MK-6 factory presets have certain synth parameters assigned to each controller letter and so these are

“Global” controller assignments.

Use these three pages to assign sixteen real-time control sources. Each MIDI

Controller is assigned a letter (A - P). The front panel Controller Knobs

and

sixteen MIDI controller numbers share the A-P controller routings.

These screens let you select which MIDI real-time controllers numbers will be received

(from 1 to 31 and from 64 to 95)

and which controller numbers will be transmitted over MIDI if the front panel controls are turned

.

The PatchCord routing and amount in the Preset Edit menu determine what effect the controller has on each preset. Real-time controllers are shown in the PatchCord menu as MIDI A through MIDI P.

The Real-time Controller assignment also specifies which controller numbers are transmitted when the “Knobs Output MIDI” is enabled (see

“Knobs Output MIDI” on page 94).

REALTIME CONTROLLER #

A: 74 B: 71 C: 25 D: 26

For example, assigning a MIDI controller to “A” in this screen would let you control filter Fc for

all the factory presets. See

“Front Panel Knob Functions” on page 209.

REALTIME CONTROLLER #

E: 73 F: 75 G: 85 H: 72

REALTIME CONTROLLER #

I: 78 J: 77 K: 27 L: 28

REALTIME CONTROLLER #

M: 01 N: 03 O: 82 P: 83

MK-6 Operation Manual

79

Controllers Menu

MIDI Footswitch Assign

Note:

Controllers 7 and 10 are already assigned to Volume and Pan for each

MIDI channel. Controllers 91 & 93 are the standard controller numbers for reverb and chorus send amounts, but are not assigned.

Following are a few of the standardized MIDI Controller numbers as defined by the MIDI manufacturers association. The controllers shown in

Bold

are automatically routed to the destination (volume & pan) or have their own PatchCord source. Others, such as Portamento Time, can be routed using a PatchCord to have the desired effect.

1 - Modulation Wheel

2 - Breath Controller

4 - Foot Pedal

5 - Portamento Time

6 - Data Entry

7 - Volume

8 - Balance

9 - Undefined

10 - Pan

11 - Expression

MIDI Footswitch

Assign

Like the MIDI Controllers, you can assign three MIDI footswitches to MIDI footswitch numbers. Footswitches numbers are from 64-79. Destinations for the footswitch controllers are programmed in the PatchCord section of the Preset Edit menu. The rear panel footswitch 1 is connected to footswitch controller 1 in this screen. Pressing the footswitch transmits on the MIDI controller number programmed here. Footswitches 2 & 3 route incoming MIDI footswitch data to the PatchCord section of MK-6.

FOOTSWITCH CONTROLLER #

1: 64 2: 65 3: 66

Rear panel footswitch input

Calibrate Controllers

This screen allows you to calibrate the Pitch Wheel, Modulation Wheel,

Aftertouch, and Foot Pedal controller. The controls should be recalibrated periodically in order to compensate for normal changes in the controls themselves. If a control doesn’t seem to be responding properly, it may simply need to be recalibrated.

The Controllers should

ALWAYS be calibrated after you reinitialize user data. (And you should always reinitialize user data after updating the operating system.)

CALIBRATE CONTROLLERS

Start Mod Wheel

80

E-MU Systems

Controllers Menu

Tempo Controller

To Calibrate the Controllers:

1.

Press the Global button. Its LED will illuminate.

2.

Turn the data entry control to select the “CALIBRATE CONTROLLERS” screen shown below.

CALIBRATE CONTROLLERS

Start Mod Wheel

3.

Move the cursor to the lower line of the display and rotate the Data

Entry Control to select the control to be calibrated. The choices are:

• Mod Wheel • Pitch Wheel • Foot Pedal • Aftertouch

4.

5.

Press

Enter

to select a control, then follow the instructions given in the display. You will be asked to mover the control through its entire range

(minimum through maximum), then press

Enter

.

In the case of the Pitch Wheel, you first move the wheel through its min-max range and leave the wheel resting in its center position. Then press

Enter

.

Tempo Controller

This function allows a MIDI controller to change the Base Tempo of the

Master Clock. The Master Clock is used by the arpeggiators, clock divisor

PatchCords, tempo-based envelopes and synced LFOs. (See “Clock

Modulation” on page 106.) You can assign any controller number from 0-

31, mono key pressure, or the Pitch Wheel to change the Global Tempo.

A different controller can be used to change the tempo up or down. The

Pitch Wheel can be assigned to both the up and down parameters to vary the tempo up and down from a single controller. If any other controller is assigned to both the up and down parameters, MK-6 redefines the center of the controller’s range as zero (so it acts like a pitch wheel).

MIDI Controller values are added to the Base Tempo with a range of ±64.

When the controller is set to “off” the tempo returns to its original setting.

Controllers are only recognized on the selected MIDI channel, unless MK-6 is in Omni mode, in which case all channels are accepted. This control has no effect when using an external clock.

TEMPO CONTROLLER# CHAN

Up: 03 Down: 09 16

MK-6 Operation Manual

81

Controllers Menu

Base Tempo

Base Tempo

The Arp/Beats LED flashes in time with the Base

Tempo.

MK-6 contains an internal Master Clock which runs the arpeggiators, synchronizes the LFOs when in tempo-based mode, controls the times of tempo-based envelopes, and can be used as a modulation source in the

PatchCords section.

You’ll notice that there are two tempo values shown in the display.

• Base Tempo

- This is the base tempo setting before being modified by the Tempo Controller (if engaged).

See “Tempo Controller” on page 81.

• (Current Tempo)

-

This is the actual tempo

! The current tempo is equal to the base tempo modulated by the MIDI controller specified in the Tempo Controller screen. If no MIDI Tempo controller message has been received since the last Base Tempo change, the Current Tempo will be equal to the Base Tempo.

To Change the Base Tempo:

1.

2.

Move the cursor to the lower line of the display.

Adjust the Base Tempo using the data entry control.

BASE TEMPO TAP->enter

120 bpm (current: 182)

O

You can also tap tempo

using a footswitch. See page 74.

3.

To Tap Tempo

- Tap the Enter button at least three times. Keep tapping to continuously update the tempo on each tap. The tap tempo range is

25-300 bpm. The Base Tempo values range from 1 through 300 beats per minute (BPM).

To Use an External MIDI Clock:

1.

2.

Move the cursor to the lower line of the display.

Turn the data entry control all the way counter-clockwise and select

“ext”

to use an external MIDI clock source.

82

E-MU Systems

Global Menu

The Global menu contains functions that affect the overall operation of

MK-6. For example, changing the Master Tune parameter changes the tuning of all the presets, not just the one currently displayed.

To enable the Global menu:

Press the Global button, lighting the LED. The Global Menu screen displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up MK-6. The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.

_

Warning:

Global Menu changes are automatically saved when you exit the menu.

If the power is turned off before you exit the menu any changes you have made will be lost.

To select a new screen:

Press the Home/Enter button or press the Cursor button repeatedly until the cursor is below the screen title heading. Rotate the data entry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameter:

Press either Cursor button repeatedly (or hold down the right cursor button while turning the data entry control) until the cursor is below the desired parameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change the value.

To return to the previously selected screen:

Press the Global button, turning off the LED.

MK-6 Operation Manual

83

Global Menu

Defining Global Parameters

Defining

Global

Parameters

Master Transpose/

Tune

Global setup parameters affect overall performance, range, and global effects. This section describes the Global parameters and how to define them.

The Transpose parameter transposes the key of all presets, in semitone intervals. The transpose range is ± 24 semitones.

Master Tune adjusts the fine tuning of all presets so that you can tune MK-6 to other instruments. The master tuning range is ± 1 semitone in 1/64th semitone increments (1.56 cents). A master tune setting of “+00” indicates that MK-6 is perfectly tuned to concert pitch (A=440 Hz).

MASTER TRANSPOSE TUNE

+00 semitones +00

Master Bend Range

The Master Bend Range parameter sets the range of the pitch wheel. This affects only presets that have their individual Pitch Bend range (defined in the Preset Edit menu) set to Master.

See page 160.

The maximum pitch bend range is ±12 semitones or one octave in each direction.

MASTER BEND RANGE

+/- 7 semitones

84

E-MU Systems

Global Menu

Defining Global Parameters

Master Velocity

Curve

The Master Velocity curve is normally set to “Linear” and the Keyboard Velocity Curve is used to adjust the keyboard feel.

Incoming velocity data or internal keyboard velocity can be altered by one of thirteen velocity curves. These curves are designed to adapt MK-6 to a external MIDI controller. You can select one of thirteen global velocity curves or to leave the data unaltered (linear). To adjust Keyboard velocity,

see “Keyboard Velocity Curve” on page 73.

MASTER VELOCITY CURVE

13

The two curves can also be combined if you wish.

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

The Master Velocity

Curve filters MIDI In as well as data from the

Keyboard Velocity Curve.

For a complete list of all available velocity curves,

see “Master Velocity Curves” on page 234 of the Appendix.

Keyboard

Velocity Curve

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Linear

0 20 40

60 80 100

120

Played Velocity

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Curve 9

0 20 40

60

80 100 120

Played Velocity

Instrument

Z-Plane

Filter

L

Amp

R

Internal

Synthesizer

Master

Velocity Curve

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Curve 2

0 20 40

60 80 100

120

Played Velocity

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Curve 13

0 20 40

60 80 100

120

Played Velocity

MK-6 Operation Manual

85

Global Menu

Defining Global Parameters

Mix Output

The Mix Output parameter allows you to override the routing assignments made in each preset and instead assign the outputs according to MIDI channel. For each of the 16 MIDI channels, you can select Send 1-4, or

Preset. When Preset is selected, the output assignment defined in the Preset

Edit menu is used.

MIX OUTPUT channel 16: Send 1->main

Indicates that the dry signal is routed to the Main output jacks.

The

Output Routing

field (pointed to by the arrow) reflects the true routing of Send 2 or Send 3 to either:

1) the effects processor input or… 2) the rear panel submix jacks.

Since the Sub 1 output is NOT being used, the signal is routed through the effects processors, then on to the main outputs. If a plug were inserted into one of the Sub 1 jacks the destination field would read “Sub1” for Send 2 and the dry signal would be routed directly to the Sub 1 outputs on the back panel.

MIX OUTPUT channel 15: use preset

Send Routings

Send 1 - Main Outputs

Send 2 - Subout 1 or Main Outs

Send 3 - Main Outs

Send 4 - Main Outputs

The Sends function as effect processor inputs (effect sends). Send 2 is also used to route sounds to the Sub 1 outputs on the back panel. When a plug is inserted into the associated Submix jack on the back panel,

the Dry portion of the Send is disconnected

from the effects processor and the signal is routed directly to the output jack.

The Arrow points to the actual output routing.

If you don’t want the wet portion of the signal in the main mix, turn down the Send Level.

The entire Send is disconnected from the Effects

Processors even if only one plug is inserted into the Submix jack.

The four Effect Sends allow you to get the most out of the two effect processors. For example, with Effect B set to an echo algorithm, you could route one MIDI channel to Send 3 and set the effect amount to 80%.

Another MIDI channel could be routed to Send 4 with an effect amount of only 5%. This is almost like having two different effects!

The Mix Output function is also useful when sequencing since it lets you route specific MIDI channels to specific Sub outputs (on the back panel) where there they can be processed with EQ or other outboard effects.

86

E-MU Systems

Global Menu

Defining Global Parameters

OUTPUT SECTION

& EFFECTS PROCESSORS

MIDI CHANNEL

MIDI Channel 1

MIDI Channel 2

MIDI Channel 3

MIDI Channel 16

Preset

FX Sends

Send 1

15%

Send 2

10%

Send 3

0%

Send 4

0%

Hall 1

Effect

A

B

A

S

E

N

D

1

M

A

I

N

FX Sends

Send 1

0%

Chorus

Send 2

0%

Send 3

20%

Send 4

15%

Effect

B

Jack

Detect

S

E

N

D

2

S

U

B

1

S

E

N

D

3

S

E

N

D

4

Send 2 can be routed to the effects processors or to rear panel submix jacks. When a plug is inserted into a Submix jack, the dry portion of the Send is disconnected from the effects processor and is routed

directly

to the Submix output jacks.

MK-6 Operation Manual

87

Global Menu

Master Effects

Master Effects

The digital effect processors can be programmed as part of the preset (using the Preset Edit menu) so that effects will change along with the preset.

However, there are only two effect processors, and so you cannot have a different effect on each preset when in Multi mode.

The Master Effects settings assign the effect processors “globally” for all presets to provide a way to use the effects in Multi mode. Detailed infor-

mation is presented in the Effects chapter (see Effects on page 173).

Effects Mode

The FX Mode page enables or bypasses the effects. When the FX Mode is set to “bypass,” the effects are turned off on a global scale. This includes Effects programmed in the preset.

FX MODE enabled

Effects Multi Mode

Control

The routing scheme for the two stereo effects processors provides a lot of versatility. When in multi mode, you can “use master settings” which applies the Master effects settings to all 16 MIDI channels.

FX MULTIMODE CONTROL use master settings

If you want more control, you can use the “channel” setting which applies the effects settings of the preset on a specified channel to all the other channels. Changing the preset on the specified channel changes the effect.

FX MULTIMODE CONTROL preset on channel 1

If you are in Omni or Poly modes this parameter is disabled and the message in parentheses explains that MK-6 is currently in Omni mode.

FX MULTIMODE CONTROL

(using Omni mode)

88

E-MU Systems

Master FXA

Algorithm

Global Menu

Master Effects

This function selects the type of effect used for the “A” effect. The following effect types are available.

MASTER FXA ALGORITHM

Room 1

A Effect Types

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

Room 1

Room 2

Room 3

Hall 1

Hall 2

Plate

Delay

Panning Delay

Multitap 1

Multitap Pan

3 Tap

3 Tap Pan

Soft Room

Warm Room

Perfect Room

Tiled Room

Hard Plate

Warm Hall

Spacious Hall

Bright Hall

Bright Hall Pan

Bright Plate

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

35.

36.

37.

38.

39.

40.

41.

42.

43.

44.

BBall Court

Gymnasium

Cavern

Concert 9

Concert 10 Pan

Reverse Gate

Gate 2

Gate Pan

Concert 11

Medium Concert

Large Concert

Large Concert Pan

Canyon

DelayVerb 1

DelayVerb 2

DelayVerb 3

DelayVerb 4 Pan

DelayVerb 5 Pan

DelayVerb 6

DelayVerb 7

DelayVerb 8

DelayVerb 9

MK-6 Operation Manual

89

Global Menu

Master Effects

FXA Parameters:

Decay/HF Damping

FxB -> FxA

This page lets you define the parameters of the selected Effects algorithm.

Use this page to setup the effect decay, high frequency damping amount

and to route “B” effects through the “A” effects. See “Effect Parameters” on page 175 for more details.

FXA DECAY HFDAMP FxB>FxA

040 096 001

FXA Send Amounts

These parameters set the effects amounts for each of the four stereo effects

busses. See “Master Effects” on page 178 for detailed information.

FXA SEND AMOUNTS 1:100%

2: 50% 3: 10% 4: 0%

Master FXB

Algorithm

This parameter selects the type of effect used for the “B” effect. The following effect types are available.

MASTER FXB ALGORITHM

Chorus 1

90

E-MU Systems

Global Menu

Master Effects

B Effect Types

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

Chorus 1

Chorus 2

Chorus 3

Chorus 4

Chorus 5

Doubling

Slapback

Flange 1

Flange 2

Flange 3

Flange 4

Flange 5

Flange 6

Flange 7

Big Chorus

Symphonic

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

Ensemble

Delay

Delay Stereo

Delay Stereo 2

Panning Delay

Delay Chorus

Pan Delay Chorus 1

Pan Delay Chorus 2

Dual Tap 1/3

Dual Tap 1/4

Vibrato

Distortion 1

Distortion 2

Distorted Flange

Distorted Chorus

Distorted Double

FXB Parameters:

Feedback/LFO Rate

Delay Time

The FXB parameters setup the characteristics of the effect. Use this page to define the feedback amount, the LFO rate and delay amount for the

selected type “B” effect. See “Effect Parameters” on page 175 for details.

FXB FEEDBK LFORATE DELAY

000 003 0

FXB Send Amounts

These parameters set the effects amounts for each of the four stereo effects busses. See the Effects chapter for detailed information.

FXB SEND AMOUNTS 1:100%

2: 50% 3: 10% 4: 0%

MK-6 Operation Manual

91

Global Menu

Miscellaneous Parameters

Miscellaneous

Parameters

Edit All Layers Enable

This function allows you to turn the Edit All Layers feature on or off. “Edit

All Layers” is an Edit menu feature which allows you to select all layers (the letter “A” appears in the layer field) in order to edit all four layers simultaneously. Because this feature can be confusing to the beginning programmer, it can be disabled here in the Global menu.

EDIT ALL LAYERS enabled

User Key Tuning

O

The user key tuning can be used to tune individual percussion instruments.

User Key Tuning lets you create and modify 12 user definable tuning tables.

The initial frequency of every key can be individually tuned, facilitating the creation of alternate or microtonal scales.

Using the cursor keys and the data entry control, select the user table number, the key name, the coarse tuning and the fine tuning. The key name is variable from C-2 to G8. Coarse Tuning is variable from 0 to 127 semitones. The fine tuning is variable from 00 to 63 in increments of 1/64 of a semitone (approx. 1.56 cents). For each preset, the specific tuning table

is selected in the Preset Edit menu. See page 168.

USER KEY TUNING Table: 1

Key: C1 Crs: 036 Fine: 00

Screen Viewing

Angle

This function changes the viewing angle of the display so that you can read it easily from either above or below the unit. The angle is adjustable from

+7 to -8. Positive values will make the display easier to read when viewed from above. Negative values make the display easier to read from below.

VIEWING ANGLE

+0

92

E-MU Systems

MIDI Menu

Most of the parameters in MK-6 that relate to MIDI are contained within this menu. You can merge MIDI data, change the continuous controller assignments, turn program changes off or on, and lots more.

MIDI menu settings are saved with the current Multimap.

To enable the MIDI menu:

Press the MIDI button, lighting the LED. The MIDI Menu screen displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up MK-6. The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.

_

Warning:

MIDI Menu changes are automatically saved when you exit the menu.

If the power is turned off before you exit the menu any changes you have made will be lost.

To select a new screen:

Press the Home/Enter button or press the Cursor button repeatedly until the cursor is below the screen title heading. Rotate the data entry control to select another screen.

To modify a parameter:

Press either Cursor button repeatedly (or hold down the right cursor button while turning the data entry control) until the cursor is below the desired parameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change the value.

To return to the previously selected Mode/View screen:

Press the MIDI button, turning off the LED.

MK-6 Operation Manual

93

MIDI Menu

Keyboard Outputs MIDI

Keyboard Outputs

MIDI

This option allows you select whether or not the keyboard, pitch/mod wheel and footswitch data is transmitted on the MIDI output port. When this option is set to: “don’t transmit”, the keyboard, pitch/mod wheels, and footswitch only control the “current” preset.

(The current preset is the one currently showing in the Main screen).

The footswitch is transmitted on the

MIDI CC number defined for Footswitch 1 in the Controllers menu.

KEYBOARD OUTPUTS MIDI transmit

Knobs Output MIDI

This function allows you to select whether or not knob data is transmitted.

The knobs transmit on the controller numbers defined by the Real-time

Controller Assign parameter (See page 79).

KNOBS OUTPUT MIDI don’t transmit

Transmit MIDI Clock

This option enables or disables the transmission of MIDI clock from the

MIDI out port. When MK-6 is running on its own internal clock (page 82) it

transmits 24 MIDI clocks per quarter note. When MK-6 is slaved to an external MIDI clock, it mirrors the incoming clock data.

TRANSMIT MIDI CLOCK off

MIDI Enable

MIDI Enable lets you turn each MIDI channel on and off independently when in Multi mode. This feature is helpful when you have other devices connected to the same MIDI line and do not want the MK-6 unit to respond to the MIDI channels reserved for the other devices.

MIDI ENABLE channel 01: On

94

E-MU Systems

MIDI Menu

Receive Program Change

Because the MIDI Enable function only makes sense if you are in Multi mode, MK-6 disables this feature when in Omni or Poly mode.

In Multi

Mode

MIDI ENABLE channel 16: On

In Omni

Mode

MIDI ENABLE

(using Omni mode)

Receive Program

Change

Use this function to instruct MK-6 to utilize or ignore incoming MIDI preset changes or Bank Select commands for each channel. Use the cursor buttons to select the channel number field, then use the data entry control to select a channel number. Use the cursor button again to select the On/

Off field and the data entry control to change the value.

RECEIVE PROGRAM CHANGE channel 01 : on

MIDI Program

Change -> Preset

The Program->Preset

Change only works for program changes received in Bank 0.

You can also remap incoming MIDI program changes to a different numbered preset. This is a handy feature when your master keyboard cannot send a bank change or you want to reorder preset numbers. Any preset can be mapped to any incoming MIDI program change number.

For example, you could set up the Program -> Preset map to call up preset

#12 whenever MK-6 receives MIDI program change #26.

The four fields shown below are editable.

MIDI PROG CHNG -> PRESET

000 User 000

0

Incoming Program

Change in Bank 0

ROM Bank

Program No.

Bank No.

MK-6 Operation Manual

95

MIDI Menu

MIDI SysEx ID

O

Programs and presets are the same thing. “Preset” is the E-MU term for MIDI

Program.

Selected

Program

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

0

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 4

44 91 50 01 15 88 99 78 32 88

0

1 0 0 0 2

34 73 106 55 43 75

0

12

0 0 0

120 121 100

2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127

0

Mapped

Program

In this chart, program changes 10-29 have been remapped to new preset numbers. All other presets are selected normally.

MIDI SysEx ID

_

WARNING

:

When transferring SysEx data from one

MK-6 to another, the ID numbers of both units must be the same.

This page defines the MIDI system exclusive (SysEx) device ID number. The

SysEx ID lets an external programming unit to distinguish between multiple MK-6 units connected to the same preset editor. In this case each unit must have a unique SysEx ID number.

MIDI SYSEX ID

000

96

E-MU Systems

MIDI Menu

MIDI SysEx Packet Delay

MIDI SysEx Packet

Delay

The MIDI SysEx Packet Delay command lets you specify the amount of delay between MIDI SysEx packets going out of MK-6 so that your computer sequencer can record this large chunk of data over a longer period of time. On playback from the sequencer, the SysEx data will be fed more slowly into MK-6 so that the its input buffer does not overflow, causing an error. Many sequencers allow you to “Time Stamp” SysEx data as it is recorded. This is the preferred mode for recording SysEx data.

The packet delay range is from 0 through 8000 milliseconds. A delay value of zero allows full speed MIDI transfer. If you are experiencing data transmission errors, try increasing the delay value until the problem disappears.

MIDI SYSEX PACKET DELAY

300 milliseconds

Send MIDI System

Exclusive Data

This command transmits MIDI System Exclusive (SysEx) data to the MIDI

Out port of MK-6. The MIDI data can be sent to a computer, sequencer or to another MK-6. When transferring data between two MK-6’s be sure both units have the same SysEx ID number! Using the cursor key and the data entry control, select the type of MIDI data you want to transmit. Following are descriptions of the types of MIDI data that can be transmitted.

_

WARNING:

When transferring SysEx data from one

MK-6 to another, the ID numbers of both units must match.

Current Multisetup

Transmits all parameters in the Global menu except Tuning Tables,

Program/Preset Map and Viewing Angle. Transmits the entire Controllers menu.

Program /Preset Map

Transmits the MIDI Program -> Preset Map.

Tuning Tables

Transmits all 12 user User Tuning Tables.

Bank 0 User Presets

Transmits all the user defined presets in Bank 0.

Bank 1 User Presets

Transmits all the user defined presets in Bank 1.

Bank 2 User Presets

Transmits all the user defined presets in Bank 2.

Bank 3 User Presets

Transmits all the user defined presets in Bank 3.

Any Individual Preset

Transmits only the selected preset.

MK-6 Operation Manual

97

MIDI Mode

MIDI Menu

MIDI Mode

The Enter LED will be flashing. Press the Enter button to confirm the operation. To receive MIDI data, simply send the MIDI data into MK-6 from another MK-6 or from a computer/sequencer.

SEND MIDI SYSEX DATA bank 1 user presets

To Record MIDI SysEx Data into an External Sequencer:

1.

Setup the sequencer to receive system exclusive data.

2.

Place the sequencer into record mode, then Send MIDI Data.

To Receive MIDI SysEx Data from an External Sequencer:

Simply play back the sequence containing the SysEx data into MK-6.

MIDI Mode selects one of the three MIDI modes: Omni, Poly or Multi.

MIDI MODE CHANGE multi ignored

The

MIDI Mode Change

parameter specifies whether mode changes made through an external MIDI controller are accepted or ignored.

The MIDI modes are as follows:

Omni

Responds to note information on all MIDI channels and plays the preset currently displayed in the main screen.

Poly

Responds only to note information received on the currently selected MIDI channel (on the preset selection screen) and plays that channel’s associated preset.

Multi

Responds to data on any combination of MIDI channels and plays the specific preset associated with each of the MIDI channels. You must select multi mode for multitimbral operation.

98

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

This chapter explains how MK-6 sounds are constructed and contains important background information on how to create your own custom presets.

Your initial involvement with MK-6 will most likely be using the existing presets and selecting MIDI channels. While the factory presets are very good, there are some things you will probably want to change eventually, perhaps the LFO speed, the filter frequency or the attack time. You may also want to make your own custom presets using complex modulation routings. This module will do far more than you ever imagined and there are whole new classes of sound just waiting to be discovered.

Each preset can consist of up to four instrument layers. Each of the four layers can be placed anywhere on the keyboard and can be crossfaded or switched according to key position, velocity, or by using a real-time control such as a wheel, slider, pedal, LFO or envelope generator. A preset can also be “linked” with up to 2 more presets creating additional layering or splits.

MK-6 has an extensive modulation implementation using two multi-wave

LFO’s (Low Frequency Oscillators), three multi-stage envelope generators and the ability to respond to multiple MIDI controllers. You can simultaneously route any combination of these control sources to multiple destinations.

There are 512 user locations (USER Banks 0-3) available to store your own creations or edited factory presets. It’s easy and fun to edit or create your own unique presets.

MK-6 Operation Manual

99

Programming Basics

Modulation

Modulation

To modulate means to dynamically change a parameter, whether it be the volume (amplitude modulation), the pitch (frequency modulation), and so on. Turning the volume control on your home stereo rapidly back and forth is an example of amplitude modulation. To modulate something we need a modulation source and a modulation destination. In this case, the source is your hand turning the knob, and the destination is the volume control. If we had a device that could turn the volume control automatically, we would call that device a modulation source.

100

E-MU Systems

Turning the volume control back and forth on your home stereo is an example of

Amplitude Modulation.

MK-6 is designed so that each of the variable parameters, such as the volume, has an initial setting which is changed by a modulation source.

Therefore in the case of volume, we have an initial volume that we can change or modulate with a modulation source.

Two main kinds of modulation sources on MK-6 are

Envelope Generators

and

Low Frequency Oscillators.

In the example above, an envelope generator could be routed to automatically turn the volume control as programmed by the envelope. Or, a low frequency oscillator could be routed to turn the volume up and down in a repeating fashion.

Positive modulation adds to the initial amount. Negative modulation subtracts from the initial amount.

Summing Nodes

All the modulation inputs on MK-6 are summing nodes. This means that you can connect as many modulation sources as you want to an input

(such as Pitch or AmpVol).

Modulation sources are simply added algebraically— connecting two knobs one set to -100 and the other set to +100 yields a net value of zero.

Programming Basics

Modulation Sources

Modulation

Sources

Modulation sources include

Envelope Generators, Performance Controllers

and

Low Frequency Oscillators

. In the previous example, an envelope generator was routed to automatically turn the volume control as programmed by the envelope, or, a low frequency oscillator could be routed to turn the volume control up and down in a repeating fashion. The following is a list of the modulation sources used in MK-6.

Keyboard Key

Which key is pressed.

Key Velocity

How fast the key is pressed.

Release Velocity

How fast the key is released.

Gate

High if the key is pressed, low when the key is released.

O

Tip:

Try routing Key

Glide to Filter Frequency if you want the filter to smoothly follow pitch in solo mode.

Routing Key Glide to Pan creates another interesting effect.

Key Glide

A smoothly changing control source based on the Glide Rate and the interval between the last two notes played.

Pitch and Mod Controllers

Synthesizer pitch bend and modulation controllers.

Keyboard Pressure (mono aftertouch)

Key Pressure applied after the keyboard key is initially pressed.

Pedal

A continuously variable pedal controller.

Miscellaneous Controllers A -P

Any type of MIDI continuous controller data.

Low Frequency Oscillators (2 per layer)

Generate repeating waves.

Envelope Generators (3 per layer)

Generate a programmable “contour” which changes over time when a key is pressed.

Noise & Random Generators

Generate spectrums of noise and random signals.

Footswitches

Change a parameter when the switch is pressed.

Clock Divisor

The master tempo clock can be divided and used as a modulation source.

MK-6 Operation Manual

101

Programming Basics

Modulation PatchCords

Random Sources

Random modulation sources can be used when you want the timbre of the sound to be “animated” in a random or non-consistent manner.

• Key Random 1 & 2

generate different random values for each layer which do not change during the note.

The

White & Pink Noise

Generators produce varying random values.

Both white and pink noise sources are low frequency noise designed for control purposes. Either noise source can be filtered even more by passing it through a lag processor.

The

Crossfade Random

function generates the same random value for all layers in a preset. This source is designed to be used for crossfading and cross-switching layers, although you may find other uses.

Modulation

PatchCords

The controller Knobs assignments printed on the front panel are the system defaults.

You can change any of these assignments using the Real-time

Controller Assignment page in

the MIDI menu (see page 94 for

details).

When setting up modulation with the MK-6, you define a modulation source and a modulation destination. Then, you connect the source to the destination using “PatchCords.” MK-6’s PatchCords are connected in the software. MK-6 has 24 general purpose PatchCords for each layer.

You can connect the modulation sources in almost any possible way to the modulation destinations. You can even modulate other modulators. Each

PatchCord also has an amount parameter which determines “how much” modulation is applied to the destination. The modulation amount can be positive or negative. Negative values invert the modulation source.

Modulation

Source

Amount +/-

Destination

-

LFO 1

+

Amp

Volume

Modulation

Source

LFO 1

LFO 2

Amp Env

Filt Env

Aux Env

Wheel

Pressure etc.

Destination

Amp Vol

Pitch

Pan

LFO Rate

Aux Env

Env Atk

Glide etc.

102

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Envelope Generators

Envelope

Generators

An envelope can be described as a “contour” which is used to shape the sound over time in a pre-programmed manner. There are three envelope generators per layer and all of them are the rate/level type.

This is how the rate/level

(time based)

envelopes work: When a key is pressed, envelope starts from zero and moves toward the Attack 1 Level at the Attack 1 Rate. As soon as it reaches this first level, it immediately begins the next phase and moves toward the Attack 2 level at the Attack 2 rate. As long as the key is held down, the envelope continues on through the Decay

1 and Decay 2 stages. If the key is still held when the envelope reaches the end of Decay 2, it simply waits there for you to release the key. When you release the key, the envelope continues into the Release 1 and Release 2 stages, stopping at the end of the Release 2 stage. MK-6’s envelope generators provide great flexibility for programming both complex and simple envelopes.

_

If two adjacent segments have the same level in a “timebased” envelope, the segment will be skipped. Adjacent segments must have different levels for the rate control to work.

Atk2

Dcy1

Dcy2

Rls1

Atk1

Sustain

Level

Rls2

level time

Key

Down

Key

Released

ADSR mode:

To create a standard ADSR envelope: Set

Atk1, Atk2 & Dcy1 Level to 100,

Rls 1 & 2 level to 0, and Atk2,

Dcy1, Rls2 Rates to 0. Program

Atk1, Dcy2 and Rls1 segments

as you wish. See page 201.

All three envelope generators have the six stages described above. The

Volume Envelope generator controls the volume of the voice over time.

The Filter Envelope generator is a general purpose envelope most often used to control the filter frequency. Unlike the Volume Envelope, however, the Filter Envelope can have a negative level value as well as a positive level. There is also an Auxiliary Envelope generator which is a general purpose envelope. The Auxiliary Envelope is identical to the Filter Envelope and can have negative as well as positive levels. You can adjust the time of each stage to create myriad envelope shapes, which in turn shape the sound over time.

O

By routing the Auxiliary or Filter Envelopes to control the pitch (PatchCords) you can easily hear the shape of the envelopes you are creating.

Volume envelopes contour the way the volume of a sound changes over time determining how we perceive that sound. For example, a bell struck with a hammer is instantly at full volume, then slowly dies away. A bowed violin sound fades in more slowly and dies away slowly. Using MK-6’s Volume Envelope, you can simulate the different types of natural instrument volume envelopes by programming them appropriately.

MK-6 Operation Manual

103

Programming Basics

Envelope Generators

Tempo-based Envelopes

Tempo-based envelopes are based on

Time

which is controlled by the

Master Tempo

(located in the Global menu)

. The Master Tempo rate scales the time of the Tempo-based envelope segments. The Master Tempo can be set to use an external MIDI clock so that the envelope times can be synchro-

nized to external sequencer or arpeggiator tempo changes. See page 82.

Tempo-Based Envelopes

= Initial Setting

= Increase Master Tempo

= Decrease Master Tempo

Envelope Repeat

The Envelope Generators can also be made to repeat. When the envelope repeat function is On, the Attack (1&2) and Decay (1&2) stages will continue to repeat as long as the key is held. As soon as the key is released, the envelope continues through its normal Release stages (1 & 2).

Only the Filter and

Auxiliary Envelopes have the repeating feature.

Atk1

Atk2

Dcy1

Dcy2

Rls1

Rls1

level

Repeat Re..

time

Key Down Key Released

The diagram above show how the looping envelopes work. When the key is pressed the envelope goes through its regular Attack 1, Attack 2, Decay 1 and Decay 2 stages. In non-looping mode, the envelope would hold at the end of the Decay 2 stage until the key was released. In looping mode however, it jumps back to the Attack 1 stage and repeats the first four stages. It continues to loop through these four stages until the key is released where it immediately jumps to the Release 1 stage.

104

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)

Low

Frequency

Oscillators

(LFOs)

A Low Frequency Oscillator or LFO is simply a wave which repeats at a slow rate. The MK-6 has two multi-wave LFOs for each channel. The LFO waveforms are shown in the following illustration.

R a n d o m T r i a n g l e

S a w t o o t h

S i n e S q u a r e 3 3 % P u l s e

LFO Tricks & Tips

:

• The Random LFO wave is truly random and is different for each voice and layer.

• The Pattern (Pat) waveforms will sound the same on different layers and voices.

• Sine + Noise is very useful for simulating trumpet and flute vibrato.

When routing Hemi-quaver to Pitch:

+38 = major scale

-38 = phrygian scale

+76 = whole tone scale

(+38) + (+76) = diminished

(two cords) odd amount = S+H sound

2 5 % P u l s e 1 6 % P u l s e 1 2 % P u l s e

P a t : O c t a v e s

+ Octave

- Octave

C

P a t : F i f t h + O c t a v e

C

G

C

A #

P a t : N e e n e r

G

S i n e 1 , 2

S i n e + N o i s e

H e m i - q u a v e r

C

P a t : S u s 4 t r i p

G

F

S i n e 1 , 3 , 5

Note:

References to musical intervals in the pattern LFO shapes are with the LFO routed to pitch and a

PatchCord amount of +38

.

Try combining the

Pattern LFOs, or controlling the amount of one with another, or combining them with the clock divisors.

By examining the diagram of the LFO waveforms, you can see how an LFO affects a modulation destination. The shape of the waveform determines the result. Suppose we are modulating the pitch of an instrument. The sine wave looks smooth, and changes the pitch smoothly. The square wave changes abruptly and abruptly changes from one pitch to another. The sawtooth wave increases smoothly, then changes back abruptly. The sound’s pitch follows the same course. Controlling the pitch of an instrument is an easy way to hear the effects of the LFO waves.

Like the Auxiliary Envelope, LFOs can be routed to control any real-time function such as Pitch, Filter, Panning, or Volume. A common use for the

LFO is to control the pitch of the sound (LFO -> Pitch). This effect is called vibrato and is an important performance effect. Many presets use this routing with the modulation wheel controlling “how much” LFO modulation is applied. Another common effect, Tremolo, is created by controlling the volume of a sound with the LFO (LFO -> Volume).

MK-6 Operation Manual

105

Programming Basics

Clock Modulation

You might use the LFOs to add a slight bit of animation to the sound by routing the LFO to control the filter. For this effect, set the LFO “amount” low for a subtle effect.

When a PatchCord amount is a negative value, the LFO shape is inverted.

For example, inverting the sawtooth wave produces a wave that increases abruptly, then smoothly glides down.

N e g a t i v e A m o u n t

+

S a w t o o t h I n v e r t e d S a w t o o t h

Clock

Modulation

Envelopes are triggered on the positive going edge of the clock. LFOs are triggered on the negative going edge of the clock.

The tempo of the master clock is set in the Global menu.

You can use the Master Clock as a modulation source, to trigger the Filter or

Auxiliary Envelope generators, trigger Sample Start, synchronize the LFOs, or directly as a square wave modulation source. The Clock source is available in eight divisions (octal whole note, quad whole note, double whole note, whole note, half note, quarter note, eighth note, sixteenth note). You can use the different rates separately or in conjunction to create complex “synchro-sonic” rhythm patterns. You can also use a MIDI Clock as the Master Clock to synchronize to an external MIDI device such as a drum machine or sequencer.

(See Master Tempo in the Global menu.)

Clocks are routed exactly like the other modulations sources using the

PatchCords. The PatchCord Amount MUST be positive (+) for the clock to pass. By modulating the PatchCord Amount, you can route the divided clocks using real-time controllers or other modulation sources.

When an LFO is triggered by a clock, the LFO wave resets to zero every time the clock wave goes low. If the LFO rate is close to the clock rate, the LFO virtually synchronizes with the clock. If the two rates are far apart, the waveform of the LFO will be mildly or radically altered.

Triggered LFO

LFO Wave

Clock

LFO Trigger

causes the LFO to reset each time the clock waveform goes low.

106

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Clock Modulation

LFO Synced to 1/4 Note Clock

LFOs can also be perfectly synchronized with the clock at any of 25 note divisions. This allows you to create very cool “synchro-sonic” effects that work perfectly at any tempo. Choosing one of the note divisors in the LFO rate screen selects the synced LFO function.

There are many possibilities for clock modulation and retrigger. For example, you can create a repeating six segment curve of any shape by triggering the Filter or Auxiliary Envelope generators with the clock. A few other possibilities are listed below.

Turn different voice layers on and off using different clock divisors.

Switch between Auxiliary and Filter Envelope retriggering using a slider or footswitch.

Retrigger LFOs or Envelopes using noise or other LFOs to create random or semi random effects.

Alter the LFO waveform by modulating the rate of a triggered LFO.

Route multiple clocks with different divisors to the same destination

(such as pitch) to create complex patterns.

(Hint: Adjust the PatchCord

Amounts.)

Eighth

Note

Quarter

Note

Adding these two clocks together in equal amounts produces a stairstep waveform.

16th

Note

8th

Note

Quarter

Note

Adding multiple clocks with unequal amounts produces complex repeating patterns.

MK-6 Operation Manual

107

Programming Basics

Modulation Destinations

Modulation

Destinations

The PatchCords section of the Preset Edit menu is where you connect sources to destinations. Each PatchCord has an amount associated with it which controls how much modulation is applied.

L1

PATCHCORD #01

ModWhl -> RTXfade +036

All the modulation destinations are summing nodes. This means that you can connect as many modulation sources as you want to a destination. Modulation sources are simply added algebraically

— connecting two sources, one with a value of -100 and the other with a value of +100 yields a net value of zero.

The PatchCords screen above and the diagram below show how modulation sources are connected to destinations. The modulation sources can control any of the destinations in the layer.

Instrument

Freq.

Layer

Z-Plane

Filter

Gain

Vol

Amp

Pan

L

R

Envelope

Gen.

Envelope

Gen.

LFOs

Mod

Wheel

Envelope

Gen.

MIDI

Controls

Key #

Velocity

Gate

Mod.

Proc.

Note-on modulation sources, such as key, velocity and gate output a single value at note-on time. Realtime modulation sources such as

LFOs, envelope generators and modulation wheels output continuously changing values.

The possible modulation routings are completely flexible as shown in the diagram above. Multiple sources can control the same destination, or a single source can control multiple destinations.

108

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Modulation Processors

Modulation

Processors

Modulation processors are devices which can modify modulation sources such as LFOs and envelope generators before they are applied to a destination. Modulation processors let you create patches and do tricks which would not be possible otherwise. These modulation processors are independently programmable on each of the four layers.

Switch

Outputs a digital “1” when the input is greater than “0”.

Switch

(above zero)

Summing Amp

Lets you add several modulation signals together before applying them to a destination. This processor can save PatchCords when routing the output to multiple destinations.

DC

Sum

Lag Processors

Slows down rapid changes in the input signal. The output “lags” behind the input at a pre-programmed rate. There are two lag processors, Lag 0 and Lag

1. Lag 1 has a longer lag time than Lag 0.

Lag

Processor

Absolute Value

This function inverts negative input values and outputs only positive values. This device is also called a full wave rectifier.

Absolute

Value

MK-6 Operation Manual

109

Programming Basics

Modulation Processors

Diode

The diode blocks negative input values, passing only positive values.

Diode

The value of a digital

“1” is equal to the PatchCord amount.

Flip-Flop

The output of this processor alternates between a digital “1” and digital “0” each time the input goes positive from zero or a negative value. With an

LFO input, the output will be a square wave of half the input frequency.

x y

Flip-Flop

x y

Quantizer

With the input PatchCord set to 100%, the output value is limited to 16 discrete values. The value of the input PatchCord controls the number of steps. The value of the output PatchCord controls the size of the steps.

# of

Steps

Size of

Steps

Quantizer

4x Gain

This processor amplifies the modulation source by a factor of 4.

4x

Gain

O

Summing Amps can be useful in complicated patches where you want to control a combination of modulation signals with a single patchcord.

Lag Inputs

The Lag processors can be used as 2 additional summing amps. Lag0sum and Lag1sum are modulation sources which equal the sum of PatchCords connected to the Lag in destination. The summing amp is located before the lag processor as shown in the following illustration.

Sum Node

Lag

Lag 0

Lag 0 sum

110

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Preset Modulation Processors

Preset

Modulation

Processors

There are also two “Preset Level” modulation processors located in the

“Preset Patchcords” screen of the Edit menu. It is important to understand that although the preset processors

originate

at the

Preset Level PatchCords

, their output is used in the

Layer PatchCords.

O

Preset Modulation

Processors start working as soon as the preset is selected. The

Layer Modulation Processors take effect only when a key is pressed.

Preset Lag

Like the Layer Lag processors

(described on page 109)

the Preset Lag slows down rapid changes in the input signal. The output “lags” behind the input at a pre-programmed rate. Unlike the layer level lag processors, the

preset lag

takes effect as soon as the preset is selected. In contrast, the layer level lag processors begin acting only after a keyboard key has been depressed. The

Preset Lag also has a

Lag Amount

input which controls the lag time. Positive lag amounts increase the lag time. A MIDI controller

(front panel knob)

is commonly used to control lag amount.

The preset lag can be used to “spin-up” and “spin-down” an LFO which controls some other effect, perhaps left/right panning, pitch, or the filter. A

MIDI footswitch could be used as the input to the lag which acts to slow down the instantaneous change of the switch. The slowly changing output value is then routed using a layer patchcord to crossfade between layers or change the speed of an LFO.

Preset

Lag

ex. footswitch

Lag Amount

(+ value = longer)

Preset Ramp

This processor generates a positive or negative going slope whenever the

first

key is depressed on the MIDI channel.

1st Note

Played

Preset Ramp

Positive Rate

Preset Ramp

Negative Rate

time

original value original value

time

1st Note

Played

MK-6 Operation Manual

111

Programming Basics

Preset Modulation Processors

The preset ramp instantly resets when all notes have been released and the next

first key

on the MIDI channel is pressed. The Ramp Rate polarity

(+ or -)

determines if the ramp will be positive or negative going. The value of the ramp rate sets the increment. Large values produce fast ramps and small values produce slow ramps. Multiple inputs can be connected to the ramp rate (just like all the other destinations in MK-6).

The patch below shows an application for the Preset Ramp which generates an adjustable decay envelope ONLY on the first note played to bring in the sound from another layer. Instead of routing the output to the Amp

Volume you could just as easily route it to control Pitch, LFO Speed or any other destination you can think of. Study this patch if you want to learn a few new tricks using the patchcords.

Real Rocket Science

One Layer

Percussion

Instrument

Z-Plane

Filter

Initial Setting

-96 dB

(off)

Amp

Vol

Pan

R

L

Cord

+100

Invert

DC

Rate

Out

Preset

Ramp

Cord

-100

Decay Time

(MIDI G)

O

The combination of the

DC & Perc. Decay Time Cords has the effect of reversing the

Percussion Decay Time knob.

The decay time increases as the knob is turned up.

Cord

-100

Preset

Cords

Perc. Amount

(MIDI H)

Cord

+100

Layer

Cords

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

DC

- Sets initial ramp Fast-Positive (+100)

Decay Knob

- Inverted value slows ramp as the knob value is increased.

Ramp Out Cord

- Inverts Ramp slope (downward).

Amp Vol

- Initial setting is Off (-96dB). Ramp cannot overcome this negative bias.

Perc. Amt

- When this knob is turned up, the positive bias on the Amp is restored so that so that the Ramp can now affect Amp Volume.

Volume Envelope

- Fast Attack, Full Sustain, No Release

112

E-MU Systems

Using the

Modulation

Processors

Programming Basics

Preset Modulation Processors

Modulation processors are inserted into a modulation routing as shown in the following diagram.

The modular analog synthesizers of yesteryear were incredibly flexible, partly because processing devices could be connected in any order.

Modulation processors are designed according to this modular concept.

They can be linked and used in a wide variety of ways limited only by your imagination. Consider the following example:

Velocity

~

Cord

Switch

Switch On when

Velocity > 0

Cord

Switch value is Scaled by

Cord Amount

Pitch

The patch illustrated above is programmed by setting the PatchCord screens as shown below.

L1

PATCHCORD #01

Vel+- -> Switch +100

L1

PATCHCORD #02

Switch -> Pitch +022

This particular modulation shifts the overall pitch up a fifth when the key velocity exceeds 64. Velocities below 64 play at normal pitch. Notes with velocities of 64 and above are raised a perfect fifth. The Velocity “~” source scales the played velocity around zero. In other words, low velocities (below

64) will have negative values and high velocities (64 and above) will be positive. A velocity of 64 would be zero. The Switch module only outputs a

“1” if the input value is greater than zero. This digital “1” value can be scaled through the attenuator on the PatchCord to raise or lower the pitch by any amount. In this case, a scaling value of +22 raises the pitch by a perfect fifth. The amount of the PatchCord on the input to the switch is unimportant because ANY velocity value equal or greater than 64 will flip the switch. If the input PatchCord amount were a negative value however, the action of the velocity would be reversed and velocities less than 64 would raise the pitch and velocities equal or greater than 64 would play the original pitch.

MK-6 Operation Manual

113

114

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Preset Modulation Processors

But what if you want the velocity switch point to be something other than

64? Thanks to modulation processors, it can be done. Here's how.

Velocity

~

DC

Cord

21

Cord

Switch

Switch On when

Velocity > 0

Cord

Switch value is Scaled by

Cord Amount

Pitch

Connect the DC level to the input of the switch along with the velocity value. Note that more than one modulation source can be applied to the input of a processor.

DC offset adds a fixed value based on the PatchCord Amount setting. If applied to the switch along with the velocity, it changes the velocity value required to trip the switch. By setting the DC amount to a negative amount, higher velocity values are required to trip the switch. Setting the

DC value to a positive value would bring the velocity switch point down.

The PatchCord screens for this patch are shown below.

L1

PATCHCORD #01

Vel+- -> Switch +100

L1

PATCHCORD #02

DC -> Switch -021

L1

PATCHCORD #03

Switch -> Pitch +022

More Examples

Programming Basics

Preset Modulation Processors

To derive a smooth random function you could route the Pink Noise generator through one of the Lag Processors. A smooth random wave is useful in small amounts to add a degree of natural variation to timbre when routed to filter cutoff. Normal pink noise is low pass filtered audio frequency noise with a 3 dB/octave slope to give equal energy per octave.

MK-6 pink noise is actually more like very low frequency filtered noise, but it is perfect for use as a random control source.

Pink

Noise

Cord

Lag

Processor

Lag Smooths

Pink Noise

Cord

Filter

Cutoff

Smooth

Random Function

The

Quantizer

can generate interesting whole-tone scales when envelope generators or LFOs are routed to the input. The quantizer turns a smoothly changing input signal into a series of steps. By routing the output of the quantizer to Pitch and adjusting the PatchCord amounts, you can control both the number of steps and the pitch interval of each step.

Number of

Steps

Size of

Steps

Quantizer

Cord Cord

The input PatchCord amount controls how many steps will be generated.

With a sawtooth wave (LFO+) feeding the input and the PatchCord amount set to 100%, sixteen steps are generated. The output PatchCord amount controls the size (or interval) of the steps.

Try setting up the following patch exactly as shown below using your favorite preset as a starting point.

L1

LFO1 SHAPE SYNC

sawtooth key sync

L1

LFO1 RATE DELAY VAR

0.35Hz 000 000

MK-6 Operation Manual

115

Programming Basics

Preset Modulation Processors

O

The 4x Amp can be used to get more steps or increase the interval of the Quantizer.

L1

PATCHCORD #01

LFO1+ -> Quantize +030

L1

PATCHCORD #02

Quantize -> Pitch +100

O

Experiment with this patch by connecting other sources and destinations to the

Quantizer.

L1

PATCHCORD #03

DC -> Pitch -050

This patch generates an ascending arpeggio every time a key is pressed. A diagram of the patch is shown below. The patch is very straightforward except for the DC offset which was added to bring the pitch down into tune. (Sometimes you have to fix a problem, but using the mod processors there's usually a way around it to achieve the desired result.)

LFO+

Number

100%

Size

100%

Quantizer

Pitch

Cord

Cord

Cord

DC

-50%

You can start to see some of the possibilities (and there are many).

Whenever you find yourself wishing for some esoteric type of control, take a minute to think and see if there is a way to achieve the desired result using the modulation processors.

116

E-MU Systems

Dynamic

Filters

Programming Basics

Dynamic Filters

The block diagram of the MK-6’s signal path is shown below.

Instrument

Z-Plane

Filter

Freq.

Q

Amp

Vol Pan

L

R

To understand how a filter works, we need to understand what makes up a sound wave. A sine wave is the simplest form of sound wave. Any waveform, except a sine wave, can be analyzed as a mix of sine waves at specific frequencies and amplitudes.

Any waveform can be analyzed as a mixture of sine waves.

One way to represent complex waveforms is to use a chart with frequency on one axis and amplitude on the other. Each vertical line of the chart represents one sine wave at a specific amplitude and frequency.

100

80

60

40

20

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880 ...

Frequency

MK-6 Operation Manual

117

What is a Filter?

Programming Basics

Dynamic Filters

Most sounds are complex waves containing many sine waves of various amplitudes and frequencies.

A filter is a device which allows us to remove certain components of a sound depending on its frequency.

For example, a

low-pass filter

lets the low frequencies pass and removes only the high frequencies as illustrated in the following diagram.

Cutoff Frequency

100

80

60

40

20

Output of Filter

Low Pass

Filter

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880 ...

Frequency

A filter that lets only the high frequencies pass is called a

high-pass filter

as illustrated in the following diagram

.

Initial Frequency

100

80

60

40

20

Filter Output

High Pass

Filter

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880 ...

Frequency

118

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Dynamic Filters

A filter which only lets a certain band of frequencies pass is called a

band-pass filter

.

100

80

60

40

20

Center Frequency

Filter

Output

Band Pass

Filter

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880 ...

Frequency

A

notch filter

is just the opposite of a band-pass filter and is used to eliminate a narrow band of frequencies.

Another control found on traditional filters is called Q or resonance. A lowpass filter with a high Q emphasizes the frequencies around the cutoff frequency. The following chart shows how different amounts of Q affect the low-pass filter response. In terms of sound, frequencies around the cutoff tend to “ring” with high Q settings. If a filter with high Q is slowly swept back and forth, various overtones are “picked out” of the sound and amplified as the resonant peak sweeps over them. Bells and gongs are real world examples of sounds which have a high Q.

Low Q Med Q High Q

Frequency

MK-6 Operation Manual

119

120

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Dynamic Filters

Another characteristic of a filter is the number of poles it contains. Traditional synthesizer filters were usually either 2-pole or 4-pole filters. The MK-

6 has selectable 2, 4, and 6-pole low-pass filters. The number of poles in a filter describes the steepness of its slope. The more poles, the steeper the filter's slope and the stronger the filtering action. The tone controls on your home stereo are probably one-pole or two-pole filters. Parametric equalizers are usually either two-pole or three-pole filters.

In terms of vintage synthesizers, Moog and ARP synthesizers used 4-pole filters, Oberheim and E-mu synthesizers were famous for their 2-pole filter sound.

6-pole

Lowpass

4-pole

Lowpass

2-pole

Lowpass

Frequency

Using a filter, we have a way to control the harmonic content of a sound.

As it turns out, even a simple low-pass filter can simulate the response of many natural sounds.

For example, when a piano string is struck by its hammer, there are initially a lot of high frequencies present. If the same note is played softer, there are fewer high frequencies generated by the string. We can simulate this effect by routing keyboard velocity to control the low-pass filter. The result is expressive, natural control over the sound.

If you use an envelope generator to control the cutoff frequency of a filter, the frequency content can be varied dynamically over the course of the note. This adds animation to the sound as well as simulates the response of many natural instruments.

Programming Basics

Dynamic Filters

Parametric Filters

A more complex type of filter is called a parametric filter or

Swept EQ

. A parametric filter allows control over three basic parameters of the filter. The three parameters are:

Bandwidth, Frequency

and

Gain

. The Bandwidth allows you to select the width of the range of frequencies to be boosted or cut, the

Frequency defines the center frequency of the bandwidth, and the Gain parameter either boosts or cuts the frequencies within the selected band by a specified amount. Frequencies not included in the selected band are left unaltered. This is different from a band-pass filter which attenuates

(reduces) frequencies outside the selected band.

+18 dB

Freq.

Boost

Parametric

Filter

0 dB

Bandwidth

Cut

-18 dB

Frequency

The parametric filter is quite flexible. Any range of frequencies can be either amplified or attenuated. Several parametric sections are often cascaded in order to create complex filter response curves.

If four parametric filter sections were cascaded, it would be possible to create the following complex filter response.

4 Parametric Equalizers

20

15

10

5

0

-5

500 10,000 15,000

Linear Frequency - Hertz

20,000

Many natural instruments have complex resonances which are based on their soundboard or tube size. The resonance shown above would be impossible to create using a normal synthesizer filter.

MK-6 Operation Manual

121

Programming Basics

Dynamic Filters

The Z-Plane Filter

A Z-plane filter is a filter which can change its function over time. In a

Z-plane filter, we start with two complex filter types and interpolate between them using a single parameter. See the following diagram.

Morph

B Filter

122

E-MU Systems

A Filter

Frequency

The Z-plane filter has the unique ability to change its function over time.

Morph

Filters A and B represent two different complex filters or “frames.”

Changing a single parameter, the Morph, changes many complex filter parameters simultaneously. Following along the Morph axis you can see that the filter response smoothly interpolates between the two filters. This is the essence of the Z-plane filter. Through the use of interpolation, many complex parameters are condensed into one manageable entity.

Consider, as an example, the human vocal tract, which is a type of complex filter or resonator. There are dozens of different muscles controlling the shape of the vocal tract. When speaking, however, we don't think of the muscles, we just remember how it feels to form the vowels. A vowel is really a configuration of many muscles, but we consider it a single object. In changing from one vowel to another, we don't need to consider the frequencies of the resonant peaks. You remember the shape of your mouth for each sound and interpolate between them.

This Z-plane filter sweep can be controlled by an envelope generator, an

LFO, modulation wheels or pedals, keyboard velocity, key pressure, and so on. In fact, any of the modulation sources can control the Z-plane filter.

Because creating the complex filtering is difficult and very time consuming, we have created 50 different filters and installed them permanently in ROM for your use. You simply select and use the filters in a manner similar to choosing an instrument. Because there are so many types of instruments and filters to choose from, the number of possible permutations is staggering.

Programming Basics

Signal Flow

Signal Flow

Going back to the Signal Path diagram for a single channel we can reexamine the complete signal path.

Instrument

Pitch

Sample

Start

Z-Plane

Filter

Freq Q

DCA

Filter

Envelope

Velocity

Volume

Volume

Envelope

Pan

R

L

Instrument

This is the sampled sound wave. The pitch of the instrument can be modulated by any modulation source. The sample start point can be changed only at the time the note is played.

Z-Plane Filter

The Z-Plane Filter is used to shape the harmonic content of an instrument.

The filter envelope is commonly used to shape the harmonic content dynamically over time but the filter frequency can be modulated by any source. The Q parameter can be modulated only at note-on time. There are

50 types of filters available. See “MK-6 Filter Types” on page 148 for a

complete list of the filters.

Digitally Controlled Amplifier (DCA)

Together with the Volume Envelope, the DCA is used to shape the volume contour of a sound. The DCA can be controlled by any modulation source.

Velocity is often used as a modulation source for the DCA so that the harder you play, the louder the sound becomes.

Pan

Adjusts the balance of sound to the left and right channels. Pan can be modulated by any modulation source.

MK-6 Operation Manual

123

Programming Basics

MIDI Channels & Real-time Controls

MIDI Channels

&

Real-time

Controls

The following MIDI controls are automatically routed in MK-6:

Pitch Wheel

pwh

Modulation Wheel

01

Pedal

Volume

04

07

Pan

Expression

10

11

The MIDI real-time controllers may seem confusing at first, but they are really very simple once you understand them. You already know that there are 16 MIDI channels per MIDI cable. Each MIDI channel uses three basic types of messages; note on/off, preset changes, and continuous controller messages. MK-6 can also send real-time control information, which simply means control occurring in real-time or “live.” Real-time control sources include such things as controller knobs, pitch wheels, modulation wheels, control pedals and aftertouch. These are used to add more expression or control.

The front panel control knobs send out real-time controller information on separate continuous controller numbers. There is a set of 32 continuous controller numbers for each MIDI channel. Some continuous controllers, such as modulation wheel, volume, and pan have standardized numbers.

For example, volume is usually sent on continuous controller #7. The front panel controller knobs on are pre-programmed to control the MK-6.

MIDI

Channel 1

Note

On/Off

Program

Change

Continuous

Controllers

MIDI

Channel 2

Note

On/Off

Program

Change

Continuous

Controllers

MIDI

Channel 3

Note

On/Off

Program

Change

Continuous

Controllers

MIDI

Channel 16

Note

On/Off

Program

Change

Continuous

Controllers

Any MIDI controller can be routed to any modulation destination. First, you have to know which controller numbers your keyboard transmits. Most modern MIDI keyboards let you select a controller number for each control on the keyboard. For example, it may let you select a number from 0-31 for the data slider. The realtime controller numbers that the keyboard transmits must match the numbers MK-6 is receiving, otherwise nothing will happen when you move the controls.

Suppose you wanted to send the four data knobs on another keyboard via

MIDI to MK-6. MK-6 can handle up to 16 MIDI controllers (A-P) of your choosing. “MIDI A-P” are simply names for the internal connections that link external MIDI continuous controllers to the PatchCord section of MK-

6. There are two parts to the connection. First, MIDI controller numbers are assigned to the letters A-P in the Controllers menu. Next, the letters A-P are connected to synthesizer control parameters in the PatchCord section of the Preset Edit menu. The PatchCord Amount scales the amount of each controller by a positive or negative value.

The factory presets have the MIDI A-P controls connected to standard synthesizer functions (marked on the front panel). By choosing any four of the 16 standard functions, the four sliders on your keyboard will work the

124

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

MIDI Channels & Real-time Controls

same on every preset. The chart below shows how this might work if your keyboard transmitted the slider settings on MIDI controllers 21-24.

Control MIDI Controller # Routing Standard Function

Slider 1 74 A Controls Filter Frequency

Slider 2

Slider 3

Slider 4

71

25

26

B

C

D

Controls Filter Resonance

Controls Filter Attack

Controls Filter Decay

MIDI

MIDI

Menu

0

1

2

31

64

95

MIDI

Controller

A

0

1

2

31

64

95

MIDI

Controller

B

0

1

2

31

64

95

MIDI

Controller

C

0

1

2

31

64

95

MIDI

Controller

P

16 Control

Knobs

A

B

C

P

-

-

-

Preset Edit

Menu

-

A

B

C

P

+

+

+

+

Amount

Cord

Cord

Cord

Cord

Patchcord Destinations

Key Sustain

Fine Pitch

Pitch

Glide

Chorus Amount

Sample Start

Sample Loop

Sample Retrigger

Filter Frequency

Filter Q

Amplifier Volume

Amplifier Pan

Amplifier Crossfade

Volume Envelope Rates

Volume Envelope Attack

Volume Envelope Decay

Volume Envelope Release

Filter Envelope Rates

Filter Envelope Attack

Filter Envelope Decay

Filter Envelope Release

Aux. Envelope Rates

Aux. Envelope Attack

Aux. Envelope Decay

Aux. Envelope Release

LFO 1 & 2 Rates

LFO 1 & 2 Trigger

Lag Processor

Summing Amp

Switch

Absolute Value

Diode

Quantizer

4x Gain

Cord 1-24 Amount

FXA Send 1-4

FXB Send 1-4

Preset Lag In

Preset Lag Amount

Preset Ramp Rate

Preset

Cords

MIDI A-P are internal connections which simultaneously carry front panel controller knob data and MIDI continuous controller data.

The front panel controller knobs work just like MIDI real-time controllers.

The four controller knobs can be assigned to the 16 controllers A-P. The front panel knob and incoming MIDI controller messages assigned to that letter, both control the same parameter that you select in the PatchCord screen.

MK-6 Operation Manual

125

Programming Basics

MIDI Channels & Real-time Controls

Bank Select

Commands

When you press the

Audition button, the Bank Select

MSB and LSB are displayed on the top line of the display.

When the original MIDI specification was developed, no synthesizer had more than 40 preset locations. At that time being able to select up to 128 presets didn’t seem like much of a limitation. So it was that the original

MIDI specification provided for the selection of up to 128 presets.

Musicians wanted

MORE

presets and so the MIDI specification was later amended to include

Bank Select Commands

. It was decided that Bank

Select Commands would use Continuous Controllers 0 and 32 to allow the selection of up to 16,384 banks of 128 presets (over two million presets).

Because Bank Selects are implemented using Continuous Controllers, the

Bank Selections can be made

per channel

. (This is getting better and better.)

For each MIDI channel, you can select any of 16,384 banks and then one of the 128 presets in the bank. Of course no synthesizer has 16,384 banks

(yet), but hey, it’s nice to know it’s possible (for that really BIG project).

Continuous Controller (CC) 0 is the MSB (most significant byte) and CC 32 is the LSB (least significant byte). Normally you send both the MSB and LSB controllers to implement a bank change.

MK-6 remembers the MSB and the LSB that were last sent (or last changed from the front panel). For example, if you have already set the Bank MSB to

04, you need only send the LSB to change banks within the MK-6 sound set. See the MIDI Bank Select chart below.

The selected bank remains selected until you change it (either via MIDI or by changing the bank from the front panel). Standard MIDI Program

Change commands select from 128 presets within the selected bank.

USER

USER

USER

USER

MIDI BANK SELECT

MSB LSB cc00 cc32

00

00

00

00

00

01

02

03

Bank 0

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

MROM1

MROM1

MROM1

MROM1

15

15

15

15

00

01

02

03

Bank 0

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

126

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Stereo Mix Outputs

Stereo Mix

Outputs

This feature is useful for adding signal processing (EQ, reverb, etc.) of individual sounds prior to final mixdown.

The routing can be performed according to MIDI channel from the Mix

Output screen in the Global menu. Simply assign each channel to the desired output.

Global

Menu

MIX OUTPUT channel 01: Send 1->main

To route a particular preset to a Send, first go to the Mix Output screen in the Global menu and set the MIDI channel to “use preset”.

Global

Menu

MIX OUTPUT channel 01: use preset

Next set the Mix Output routing in the preset to the desired output (for each layer). Yes, you can send each layer to a different send if you want.

Preset Edit

Menu

L1

MIX OUTPUT

Send 2 -> main

By sending different amounts of presets to the effects, subtle or striking effects can be achieved using the two effect processors. This feature allows you to get the most out of two effects since you can have eight different mixes.

For more information, refer to the diagram on the following page or,

See

“Mix Output” on page 86.

MK-6 Operation Manual

127

128

E-MU Systems

Programming Basics

Stereo Mix Outputs

Mix Output

Ch 1

Ch 2

Ch 3

Ch 16

PRESET

SEND 2

SEND 3

PRESET

EDIT MENU

Mix

Output

Send 1

SEND 4

GLOBAL MENU

S

E

N

D

3

S

E

N

D

4

S

E

N

D

2

S

E

N

D

1

OUTPUT SECTION

& EFFECTS PROCESSORS

FX Sends

Send 1

15%

Send 2

10%

Send 3

0%

Send 4

0%

Hall 1

Effect

A

B

A

FX Sends

Send 1

0%

Chorus

Send 2

0%

Send 3

20%

Send 4

15%

Effect

B

Jack Detect

M

A

I

N

S

U

B

1

The Mix Output screen in the

Global

menu assigns each MIDI channel to a

Send (1-4) or to “Preset”.

The Mix Output screen in the

Preset Edit

menu is ONLY used if the Global

Mix Output is set to “Preset”. Otherwise the Preset Edit menu Mix Output settings are ignored.

Preset Edit Menu

The Preset Edit Menu contains four layers of preset parameters that you can modify and then save as preset information in one of the user preset locations. There are four instrument layers in the Preset Edit menu. See the

illustration on page 130 for a description of the Preset Layer model.

While the Preset Edit menu is activated, all incoming

MIDI preset changes on the selected channel are ignored.

To Access the Preset Edit Menu:

Press the Preset Edit button, lighting the LED. The Preset Edit Menu screen displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up MK-6.

The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.

_

If there is no “A” option in the Layer field, you must enable the “Edit All Layers” function in the Global Menu

(page 92).

To Scroll through Layers:

Place the cursor below the layer field. Rotate the data entry control to select a layer (1-4).

You can also select

All Layers

by choosing “A” in the layer field. When All

Layers is selected, the existing parameter value for any field will be displayed if the values of all four layers are equal. If the values of all four layers are NOT equal, the value of layer 1 will be displayed with flashing characters. If you change the parameter value, all layers will assume the new value and the display will stop flashing.

To Scroll through Pages:

Whenever you are in the Preset Edit menu, the sixteen command buttons function as “jump” buttons to various screens in the Preset Edit menu, which are labelled below each button. Pressing a jump button instantly takes you to the first screen in the selected category. Pressing the button again takes you to the second screen in the category and so on. Repeated pressing will rotate you back to the first screen in the category.

You can also change pages by placing the cursor below the page title field.

This will automatically be done when you press the Home/Enter button.

Rotate the data entry control to scroll through the pages.

To Change a Parameter:

Place the cursor below the parameter field. Rotate the data entry control to change the parameter value.

MK-6 Operation Manual

129

Preset Edit Menu

Preset Name

Preset Name

You can also select characters using the keyboard.

The Preset names consists of two parts: a 3 letter preset category and a 12 letter preset name. Position the cursor under the character location and use the data entry control to change the character.

The preset category is used in conjunction with the Sound Navigator feature. Using the Sound Navigator, a category is selected and the presets in that category are listed in alphabetical order. Creating categories makes it easier to find specific sounds when you need them. For more information on Sound Navigator, see Sound Navigator in Chapter 2: Operations.

PRESET NAME

000

1

syn: VOSIM-Voc

Four Layer

Architecture

MK-6 provides a 4 layer instrument structure. Each layer is a complete synthesizer voice with 50 filter types, over 64 modulation sources, more than 64 modulation destinations and 24 patchcords to connect everything together. In addition, the four layers can be crossfaded or switched by key position, velocity or any real-time modulation source.

Instrument

Z-Plane Filter

Layer 1

DCA

Pan

R

L

Instrument

Z-Plane Filter

Layer 2

DCA

Pan

R

L

Instrument

Z-Plane Filter

Layer 3

DCA

Pan

R

L

Instrument

Z-Plane Filter

Layer 4

DCA

Pan

R

L

130

E-MU Systems

Selecting Layers

Preset Edit Menu

Selecting Layers

In most of the Preset Edit screens, the selected layer is shown in the upper left corner of the display. Layers 1-4 or All can be selected by positioning the cursor on this field and using the data entry control to change the layer.

In the screen shown below, Layer 1 is selected.

L1

INSTRUMENT ROM:MROM1

0305 bas:Moog Sub

When “All Layers” (A) is selected, the existing parameter value for any field will be displayed if all layers are equal. If the layer parameter values are

NOT equal, the value of Layer 1 will be displayed with flashing characters.

If you move the data entry control all values will be equal to this new value and the parameter value will no longer flash.

MK-6 Operation Manual

131

Defining

Layer

Parameters

Selecting an

Instrument

Preset Edit Menu

Selecting an Instrument

The Preset Edit menu parameters define the four layers and include the instrument assigned to the layer, the ranges of the layer, tuning, envelopes, filters, and patch cords. These parameters are defined for each layer on an

individual basis (based on the currently selected layer). See “Common

Preset Parameters” on page 161 for global preset settings.

The Instrument parameter defines which of the available instrument sounds is played by the current layer.

ROM SIMM Name

L1

INSTRUMENT ROM: MROM1

0078 bas : Booty Q 2

Instrument Category Instrument Name

To select an instrument for the selected layer(s), move the cursor to the bottom line of the display and change the instrument using the data entry control.

Sound Navigator

Sound Navigator also works to help select Instruments although the category names are predefined. When the cursor is on the Instrument

Category field, turning the data entry control selects different instrument categories. The Name Field will change to show the first instrument in each category. Move the cursor to the instrument name to select instruments in the selected category.

L1

INSTRUMENT ROM: MROM1

0078 bas : Booty Q 2

1. Choose Category

2. Scroll through Instruments

Selecting Categories of Instruments using Sound Navigator.

132

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Defining Key Range

Defining Key Range

The Key parameter defines the range on the keyboard used by the current layer. The Key range is from C-2 through G8.

Middle C

C-2 C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 G8

To define the range, set the low key value and the high key value.

You can select key numbers by simply pressing the desired keyboard key when the cursor is positioned on the low or high key field in the display.

Fade In Fade Out

L1

KEY: LO FADE HIGH FADE

C-2 000 C2 012

Layers can be crossfaded according to key position by adjusting the Low and High Fade parameters. The first Fade field determines how many semitones it takes the layer to Fade In from the low key. The second Fade field determines how many semitones it takes the layer to Fade Out to the high key. The screen shot above and the diagram below show Layer 1 being faded out over a one octave range.

C-2 C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 G8

Layer 1

Layer 2

Layer 3

Switch

Layer 4

With a High Fade value of zero (as in layer 3 of the diagram), the layer simply switches off at the high key.

MK-6 Operation Manual

133

Preset Edit Menu

Defining Key Range

To Switch Layers According to Key Position:

The Key Range parameter allows you to create a “split” keyboard with up to four sounds adjacent to each other on the keyboard. This is shown in the diagram below.

C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

Layer 1

Switch

Layer 2

Switch

Layer 3

Switch

Layer 4

You can select key numbers by simply pressing the desired keyboard key when the cursor is positioned on the low or high key field n the display.

Just assign the low and high key range for each of the four layers with Fade set to zero. Set the Low and High Keys so they don’t overlap other layers.

L1

KEY: LO FADE HIGH FADE

C0 000 F1 000

L2

KEY: LO FADE HIGH FADE

F#1 000 C3 000

L3

KEY: LO FADE HIGH FADE

C#3 000 F#4 000

L4

KEY: LO FADE HIGH FADE

G4 000 C6 000

If two layers do overlap, both will play as shown in the next example.

134

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Defining the Velocity Crossfade Range

To Stack Layers:

If the ranges of two or more Layers overlap it is called

stacking layers

. All

Layers assigned to a key sound when the key is played. This is shown in the following diagram. It’s very easy to stack layers. Simply duplicate the key ranges for any layers you want to stack.

C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

Layer 1

Layer 2

L1

KEY: LO FADE HIGH FADE

C0 000 C6 000

L2

KEY: LO FADE HIGH FADE

C0 000 C6 000

Defining the Velocity

Crossfade Range

Velocity is a measure of how hard the key is pressed. Velocity Range lets you control the volume of the layers using velocity. Using this function you can crossfade or cross-switch between layers according to how hard you play the keyboard.

Set the velocity range of the layer by defining the high and low velocity values. Values range from 0 (off) to 127 (hardest).

L2

VEL: LO FADE HIGH FADE

36 012 96 012

MK-6 Operation Manual

135

136

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Defining the Velocity Crossfade Range

The Fade fields define the velocity crossfade range for the currently selected layer. The first Fade field defines the Fade In range for the low velocity value. The second defines the Fade Out range for the high velocity value.

0

Velocity

127

Layer 1

36

Fade

Layer 2

Fade

96

Layer 3

Switch

Layer 4

With soft playing, Layer 1 sounds. As you play harder, Layer 1 gradually fades out and

Layer 2 fades in. When the keyboard is played hard, Layer 3 plays.

To Set Up a Velocity Crossfade Between Layers:

Set the velocity fades so that layer 1 fades out with higher key velocity, while layer 2 fades in. At a velocity of 64, the two sounds are equal volume.

You may want to adjust the fade in and fade out points to achieve a natural sounding crossfade. These parameters vary depending on the sounds.

0

Increasing Velocity

127

L1

VEL: LO FADE HIGH FADE

000 000 127 127

L2

VEL: LO FADE HIGH FADE

000 127 127 000

Preset Edit Menu

Defining the Real-time Crossfade Range

Defining the

Real-time Crossfade

Range

The Real-time Crossfade window lets you control the volume of the four layers using a real-time controller such as a front panel knob, a pedal or an

LFO or Envelope generator. The controller is defined by the PatchCord

parameter (see “PatchCords” on page 157).

The Fade fields define the crossfade range in velocity for the currently selected layer. The first Fade field defines the Fade In amount for the low

Real-time Control value. The second defines the Fade Out amount for the high Real-time Control value. The Fade value range is from 0 to 127.

0 Realtime Control Value 127

Layer 1

Fade

Layer 2

Fade

Layer 3

Switch

Layer 4

After the Ranges and Fades have been adjusted for each layer in the Realtime Crossfade screen, you must assign a real-time controller to RTXfade

(Real-time Crossfade)

on each Layer

in the PatchCord screen. Set the

PatchCord Amounts to +100.

To Set Up a Real-time Crossfade Between Two Layers:

As the real-time control (knob, pedal, LFO, etc.) is increased, Layer 1 fades out as Layer 2 fades in. This example only uses two of the possible four layers. Refer to the screen diagrams below.

L1

RT: LO FADE HIGH FADE

000 000 127 127

L2

RT: LO FADE HIGH FADE

000 127 127 000

1.

2.

3.

Select a prese

t.

Press the

Preset Edit

button to access the Preset Edit menu.

Go to the

Instrument

page and select instruments for Layers 1 and 2.

MK-6 Operation Manual

137

138

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Defining the Real-time Crossfade Range

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Press

Enter

, then use the data entry control to advance to the

Real-time

Crossfade

page.

Define the High and Low range of each Layer. In this example the entire range of 0-127 is used.

Define the Fades for each Layer. This is just an initial setting. The Range and Fade parameters may have to be adjusted later to get a smooth crossfade.

Press

Home/Enter

and use the data entry control to advance to the

PatchCord

page. Select Layer 1.

Select the modulation source for the crossfade (knob, pedal, LFO,

Envelope) and set the destination to RTXfade. Set the Cord Amount to

+100.

Select Layer 2

. Select the same source and destination for the crossfade and set the Cord Amount to +127.

L1

PATCHCORD #01

MidiA -> RTXfade +100

10.

Play the keyboard

while adjusting the real-time controller. Go back to the Real-time Crossfade screens to fine tune the crossfade if necessary.

Decreasing the fade size will narrow the region where both layers are sounding.

To Randomly Cross-Switch Between Four Layers:

In certain situations, you may want to switch between several layers randomly.

Crossfade Random

is a modulation source specifically designed to handle this situation. Unlike the other random sources, Crossfade

Random generates one random number for all layers each time a key is pressed.

To set up a four layer Cross-Switch, simply assign each of the four layers to a different Real-time Crossfade range, then assign XfdRnd to RTXfade in the PatchCords for each layer.

Realtime Control Value

0 16

Layer 1

32

Switch

48

Layer 2

64

Switch

80

Layer 3

96

Switch

112

Layer 4

127

Preset Edit Menu

Defining the Real-time Crossfade Range

1.

2.

3.

Press the

Preset Edit

button to access the Preset Edit menu.

Go to the

Instrument

screen and select Instruments for Layers 1 through 4.

Press

Enter

, then use the data entry control to advance to the

Real-time

Crossfade

page.

L1

RT: LO FADE HIGH FADE

000 000 031 000

L2

RT: LO FADE HIGH FADE

032 000 063 000

L3

RT: LO FADE HIGH FADE

064 000 095 000

L4

RT: LO FADE HIGH FADE

096 000 127 000

4.

5.

6.

7.

Define the High and Low range of each Layer as shown above.

Press

Home/Enter

and use the data entry control to advance to the

PatchCord

page. Select Layer 1.

Select

XfdRnd

as the modulation source and

RTXfade

as the destination. Set the

Cord Amount to +100

.

Repeat step 6 for the remaining three layers.

MK-6 Operation Manual

139

Preset Edit Menu

Transposing the Instrument

L1

PATCHCORD #01

XfdRand -> RTXfade +100

8.

That’s it! Now set each Layer up the way you want. Try radically different instruments, filter settings, or tunings. Or you can make each layer just slightly different for a more natural effect. Try adjusting the

Fades or overlapping the ranges if you want more than one layer to play at once.

Transposing the

Instrument

The Transpose parameter lets you transpose the key of the current layer’s

Instrument. Transpose works by shifting the keyboard position in semitone intervals relative to middle C. Use this parameter to transpose different layers apart by semitone intervals. For example, by transposing one layer by

+7 semitones, it will track other layers at a perfect fifth interval.

C-2 C-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 G8

The range of transposition is -36 to +36 semitones.

L1

TRANSPOSE

+36 semitones

140

E-MU Systems

Tuning

Amplifier

Preset Edit Menu

Tuning

The Tuning parameter changes the pitch of the key in semitone and 1/64 semitone intervals.

L1

TUNING

Coarse: +36 Fine: +63

Use the Coarse field to shift the tuning by semitone intervals. Use the Fine field to shift tuning by 1/64 semitones (or 1.56 cents) intervals.

Background: Transpose vs. Coarse Tuning

Transpose works by shifting the keyboard assignment of the Instrument (as if you were sliding the keyboard up and down with the Instrument remaining in the same position). Coarse Tuning keeps the instrument placement on the keyboard and actually tunes the samples up using a digital process called interpolation. Use Course Tuning on drum instruments to change the pitch while keeping sample placement constant.

Coarse Tuning can also be useful to slightly change the timbre of the instrument.

This parameter sets the initial volume and pan position of the current layer.

These values can be changed using any Real-time Controller set up in the

PatchCords. The value range for the volume is from -96 dB to +10 dB. 0 dB is the default setting. Routinely turning the volume up to +10 dB is not recommended because it doesn’t allow other modulation sources to increase the volume further.

L1

AMPLIFIER

Volume: +10dB Pan: 48

L

This field determines the initial Pan value for the current layer. The value range for Pan is from 64L to 0 (left) and 0 to 63R (right). Pan adjusts the volume into the left and right output channels relative to the Pan setting in

the main Preset Select screen (see “Channel Pan” on page 39). So, if you, for

example, set the Pan value in the Preset Select screen to 64L and set this

Pan value to 63R, the actual pan amount would be 0 as these two pan parameters are relative to each other.

MK-6 Operation Manual

141

Preset Edit Menu

Volume Envelope

Volume Envelope

An envelope can be described as a “contour” which is used to shape the sound over time. The

Volume Envelope

controls the volume of the sound in the current layer over time. The way the volume of a sound evolves has a profound effect on how we perceive the sound.

Each instrument has its own Factory preset Volume Envelope setting. The

Volume Envelope allows you to program your own envelope settings.

O

Factory Mode is useful for Instruments containing multiple drums, since each drum can have its own envelope settings.

Selecting the Mode

The Mode field determines whether the layer will use the instrument’s default envelope (Factory) or use the user-programmed Volume Envelope.

There are three mode options and repeat.

• Factory

: Uses the factory preset envelope contained in each instrument.

If you select the “Factory” mode, the Volume Envelope parameters are disabled and the factory defined settings are used instead.

A factory drum kit envelope actually contains a separate envelope for every voice on every key instead of a single global envelope.

L1

VOLUME ENVELOPE

Mode: factory

_

If two adjacent segments have the same level in a “timebased” envelope, the segment will be skipped. Adjacent segments must have different levels for the rate control to work.

• Time-based

: Defines the Volume Envelope rates from 0 to 127 (approximately 1 ms to 160 seconds). The Master clock has no affect on timebased rates.

• Tempo-based

: The Volume Envelope times vary based on the master tempo setting. Note values are displayed instead of a number when the time corresponds to an exact note value. Tempo-based envelopes are useful when using external sequencers and arpeggiators because the envelope rates compress and expand according to the Master Tempo setting, keeping the envelopes in sync with the sequence or arpeggio.

Tempo-Based Envelopes

= Initial Setting

= Increase Master Tempo

= Decrease Master Tempo

Tempo-based envelope rates change according to the Master Tempo rate.

142

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Volume Envelope

See the Programming

Basics section of this manual for detailed information about how the Envelopes work.

Defining the Volume Envelope

The Volume Envelope controls the volume of the layer over time. The

Volume Envelope has six stages to the contour: Attack 1, Attack 2, Decay 1,

Decay 2, Release 1 and Release 2. When a key is pressed, the Envelope goes through the first four stages. If you continue to hold down the key, the envelope holds at the Decay 2 level. When the key is released, the envelope continues through the Release stages ending at the Release 2 level.

L1

VOL ENV RATE LEVEL

Attack 1 84 100%

As soon as the Attack 1 level is reached, the Attack 2 phase begins. When the Attack 2 Level is reached, the Decay 1 phase begins. When the key is released, the envelope immediately jumps to the Release 1 stage, then the

Release 2 stage finally ending at the Release 2 level.

If you have selected the factory mode, the Volume Envelope parameter screen looks like the following illustration.

L1

VOL ENV RATE LEVEL

(using factory envelope)

_

If the Release 2 level is set at a value other than zero, the note will continue to sound after the key is released. This might be useful for drone effects, but the channel won’t stop sounding until all channels are used up.

Dcy1

Atk2

Dcy2

Rls1

Atk1

Sustain

Level

Rls2

level time

Key

Down

Key

Released

On the Volume Envelope, levels can only be set to positive values.

The value range is from 0 to +100.

MK-6 Operation Manual

143

Preset Edit Menu

Chorusing the Layer

Chorusing the Layer

Chorusing “thickens” the sound by doubling the sound in stereo and then detuning it. Every layer with chorus turned on uses twice the polyphony for that layer.

_

WARNING

: Because it works by doubling instruments,

Chorusing halves the number of notes you can play.

L1

CHORUS WIDTH

off 100%

The first field in this screen turns Chorus On or Off and allows you to adjust the amount of detuning (1 to 100%). The

Width

parameter controls the stereo spread. 0% reduces the chorus to mono and 100% provides the most stereo separation.

Sound Start Offset and Delay

Sound Start

sets where the instrument begins playing when you hit a key.

Setting the Start Offset amount to “0” plays the sample from the beginning.

Higher values move the Sample Start Point further into the sample toward the end. There is also a PatchCord source which can be used to change the

Sound Start point at note-on time.

L1

SOUND START DELAY

127 127

144

E-MU Systems

Sample

Start

Controlling the Sound Start using Key Velocity (< Amt -) brings in the attack of the wave only when you play hard. This is especially effective with percussion instruments.

Delay

defines the time between when you hit a key (note-on) and the onset of the current layer’s note and the start of the envelopes (if applicable).

Delay values below zero are

Tempo-based

values, meaning the time is based on the Master Tempo setting. Note values are displayed by adjusting the

Delay Time value below zero. The sound will be delayed by the selected note value based on the master clock.

Preset Edit Menu

Non-Transpose Mode

Non-Transpose

Mode

This function turns keyboard transposition On or Off for the current layer.

With Nontranspose “on,” the keyboard will not control the pitch of the instrument. This is a useful function for drones, attack “chiffs,” or other sound effects which you may not want to track the keyboard.

L1

NONTRANSPOSE off

Solo Mode

Provides the playing action of a monophonic instrument such as a lead synthesizer by preventing more than one note from sounding at once.

There are eight different solo modes provided. Try setting up different layers with different solo mode and glide rates or combine solo mode with polyphonic playing modes.

L1

SOLO MODE synth (low)

O

In order to define a monophonic glide (see the

Portamento parameter), you must be in Solo mode.

The Solo modes are:

Multiple Trigger:

Last note priority. No key-up action. Retriggers envelopes and samples when a key is pressed.

Melody (last):

Last note priority. No key-up action.

First solo note:

Envelopes start at Attack segment from zero. Samples start at the beginning.

If previous note is releasing:

Envelopes start at Attack segment, but from current level. Samples start at the beginning.

When playing “Legato”:

Envelopes continue from current segment and level. Samples start at the loop or the beginning if unlooped.

Melody (low):

Same as Melody (last), but with low note priority. Newly played keys which are higher than the lowest solo key held do not sound.

Melody (high):

Same as Melody (last), but with high note priority. Newly played keys which are lower than the highest solo key held do not sound.

Synth (last):

Similar to Melody (last) but this mode has key-up action.

When you release the currently sounding solo key while holding other keys down, the highest held solo key sounds in a Legato fashion.

MK-6 Operation Manual

145

Assign Group

Preset Edit Menu

Assign Group

Synth (low):

Same as Synth (last) but with low note priority. When you release the currently sounding solo key while holding other keys down, the lowest held solo key sounds in a Legato fashion (MiniMoog).

Synth (high):

Same as Synth (last) but with high note priority. When you release the currently sounding solo key while holding other keys down, the highest held solo key sounds in a Legato fashion.

Fingered Glide:

Same as Synth (last), except that Glide is disabled when playing Staccato, enabled when playing Legato.

Use the Assign Group parameter to assign a certain number of channels to each layer. By assigning all voices in the preset to assign groups, important parts are protected from being “stolen” by more recently played keys. Or you can assign a voice, such as an open high hat, to a mono channel so it is cancelled by a closed high hat on the same mono channel. Layers rotate within their assigned “bin” of channels, not interfering with other bins.

L1

ASSIGN GROUP poly all

The modes are:

Poly All:

Notes are played polyphonically with dynamic channel assignment using all 64 channels.

Poly 16 A-B:

Two bins of 16 channels each. Notes are played polyphonically with dynamic channel assignment using no more than 16 channels.

Poly 8 A-D:

Four bins of 8 channels each. Notes are played polyphonically with dynamic channel assignment using no more than 8 channels each.

Poly 4 A-D:

Four bins of 4 channels each. Notes are played polyphonically with dynamic channel assignment using no more than 4 channels each.

Poly 2 A-D:

Four bins of 2 channels each. Notes are played polyphonically with dynamic channel assignment using no more than 2 channels each.

Mono A-I:

Nine monophonic channels. Any layers assigned to the same letter interrupt each other without affecting other layers.

146

E-MU Systems

Glide

Preset Edit Menu

Glide

Glide creates a smooth transition from one note to the next instead of the normal instantaneous change in pitch when a new key is pressed. This effect is commonly heard on slide guitars, synthesizers and violins.

L1

GLIDE RATE CURVE

0.000 sec/oct linear

The front panel

Glide Button

LED comes on when the any layer of the current preset has a glide rate greater than 0.000 seconds (regardless of if a

PatchCord is connected or not). Pressing the button turns the LED and glide off. Pressing the front panel glide button when all layers are set to a glide of 0.000 turns glide on with a rate of 0.142 seconds/octave.

The

Glide Rate

parameter defines the time it takes to glide to the new pitch

(the larger the value, the slower the glide rate) The glide rate value range is from 0 through 32.738 seconds (zero means off).

The

Glide Curve

describes how the glide accelerates as it slides between notes. Because of the ear’s non-linear response to pitch, a linear glide sounds slow at the beginning and speeds up toward the end. Exponential curves actually sound smoother and more linear. Eight exponential curves are provided. Choose one that suits your style.

Linear Exp1 Exp8

Last

Note

New

Note

Last

Note

New

Note

Last

Note

New

Note

Glide can be either polyphonic or monophonic depending of the state of

Solo Mode

.

To Set up a Glide Rate Knob:

1.

2.

Set at least one layer to the minimum setting of 0.002 sec/oct. (This forces the Glide LED to come on.)

Connect the MIDI controller of your choice to Glide Rate on the layers you’d like to glide. Adjust the Cord Amount for the desired range.

3.

4.

Disconnect the MIDI controller from whatever else it was connected to before you started mucking about.

The Glide button turns Glide on/off and the knob controls the rate.

MK-6 Operation Manual

147

Preset Edit Menu

Z-Plane Filters

Z-Plane Filters

MK-6 Filter Types

A filter is a device which changes the output of a signal (sound) by removing certain elements of the signal based on the frequency and amplitude. The “Order” of a filter defines the number of filter elements it contains. The more elements, the more complex the filter.

MK-6 contains 50 different types of E-MU’s celebrated Z-plane filters. In addition to the standard Low pass, High pass and Band pass filters, MK-6 contains Swept Octave Equalizers, Phasers, Flangers, Vocal Formant Filters, and digital models of classic synthesizer filters.

In the filter chart below you will notice that the “Order” of the filters varies from 2 to 12 order. Higher order filters have more sections and can produce more complex formants. MK-6 can produce 128 filters of up to 6th order or

64 filters of 12th order complexity. Therefore, if you decided to use all 12th order filters, MK-6 would be limited to 64 voices.

This screen allows you to choose the type of filter for the current layer.

L1

FILTER Ord Type

Phazer 2 E4 6 PHA

Filter Types

LPF

Low-pass filter

PHA

Phaser

HPF

High-pass filter

FLG

Flanger

BPF

Band-pass filter

VOW

Vowel/ formant

EQ+

EQ boost

EQ-

EQ cut

SFX

Special Effect

Filter Name Order Type Description

Smooth 02 LPF Typical OB type low-pass filter with a shallow

12 dB/octave slope.

Classic 04 LPF

Steeper

MegaSweepz

EarlyRizer

Millennium

KlubKlassik

BassBox-303

Shallow

Deeper

Band-pass1

Band-pass2

06

12

12

12

12

12

02

04

02

04

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

HPF

HPF

BPF

BPF

4-pole low-pass filter, the standard filter on classic analog synths. 24 dB/octave rolloff.

6-pole low-pass filter which has a steeper slope than a 4-pole low-pass filter.

36 dB/octave rolloff!

“Loud” LPF with a hard Q. Tweeters beware!

Classic analog sweeping with hot Q and

Lo-end.

Aggressive low-pass filter. Q gives you a variety of spiky tonal peaks.

Responsive low-pass filter sweep with a wide spectrum of Q sounds

Pumped up lows with TB-like squelchy Q factor.

2-pole high-pass filter. 12 dB/octave slope.

Classic 4-pole high-pass filter. Cutoff sweep progressively cuts 4th Order High-pass.

Band-pass filter with 6 dB/octave rolloff on either side of the passband and Q control.

Band-pass filter with 12 dB/octave rolloff on either side of the passband and Q control.

148

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

MK-6 Filter Types

Filter Name Order Type Description

ContraBand

Swept1>1oct

Swept2>1oct

Swept3>1oct

DJAlkaline

AceOfBass

06

06

06

06

12

12

BPF

EQ+

EQ+

EQ+

EQ+

EQ+

A novel band-pass filter where the frequency peaks and dips midway in the frequency range.

Parametric filter with 24 dB of boost or cut and a one octave bandwidth.

Parametric filter with 24 dB of boost or cut. The bandwidth of the filter is two octaves wide at the low end of the audio spectrum, gradually changing to one octave wide at the upper end.

Parametric filter with 24 dB of boost or cut. The bandwidth of the filter is three octaves wide at the low end of the audio spectrum, gradually changing to one octave wide at the upper end.

Band accentuating filter, Q shifts “ring” frequency.

Bass-boost to bass-cut morph

TB-OrNot-TB

BolandBass

12

12

BassTracer

RogueHertz

RazorBlades

RadioCraze

AahAyEeh

Ooh-To-Aah

MultiQVox 12

Ooh-To-Eee 12

TalkingHedz 12

Eeh-To-Aah 12

UbuOrator

DeepBouche

PhazeShift1

12

12

12

12

06

06

12

12

06

EQ+

EQ+

EQ+

EQ+

EQ-

Great Bassline “Processor.”

Constant bass boost with mid-tone Q control.

Low Q boosts bass. Try sawtooth or square waveform with Q set to 115.

Bass with mid-range boost and smooth Q.

Sweep cutoff with Q at 127.

Cuts a series of frequency bands.

Q selects different bands.

Band limited for a cheap radio-like EQ EQ-

VOW Vowel formant filter which sweeps from “Ah” sound, through “Ay” sound to “Ee” sound at maximum frequency setting. Q varies the apparent size of the mouth cavity.

VOW Vowel formant filter which sweeps from “Oo” sound, through “Oh” sound to “Ah” sound at maximum frequency setting.

Q varies the apparent size of mouth cavity.

VOW Multi-Formant, Map Q To velocity.

VOW Oooh to Eeee formant morph.

VOW “Oui” morphing filter. Q adds peaks.

VOW “E” to “Ah” formant movement.

Q accentuates “peakiness.”

VOW Aah-Uuh vowel with no Q. Raise Q for throaty vocals.

VOW French vowels! “Ou-Est” vowel at low Q.

PHA Recreates a comb filter effect typical of phase shifters. Frequency moves position of notches.

Q varies the depth of the notches.

MK-6 Operation Manual

149

150

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

MK-6 Filter Types

Filter Name Order Type Description

PhazeShift2 06 PHA Comb filter with slightly different notch frequency moving the frequency of notches.

Q varies the depth of the notches.

FreakShifta 12

CruzPusher

FlangerLite

AngelzHairz

DreamWeava

MeatyGizmo

DeadRinger

ZoomPeaks

AcidRavage

BassOMatic

LucifersQ

ToothComb

EarBender

FuzziFace

BlissBatz

KlangKling

12

06

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

06

12

PHA

PHA

FLG

FLG

FLG

REZ

REZ

Phasey movement. Try major 6 interval and maximum Q.

Accentuates harmonics at high Q.

Try with a sawtooth LFO.

Contains three notches. Frequency moves frequency and spacing of notches.

Q increases flanging depth.

Smooth sweep flanger. Good with vox waves. eg. I094, Q =60

Directional Flanger. Poles shift down at low Q and up at high Q.

Filter inverts at mid-Q.

Permanent “Ringy” Q response.

Many Q variations.

REZ

REZ

REZ

REZ

High resonance nasal filter.

Great analog Q response. Wide tonal range. Try with a sawtooth LFO.

Low boost for basslines. Q goes to distortion at the maximum level.

Violent mid Q filter! Take care with Q values 40-90.

REZ Highly resonant harmonic peaks shift in unison. Try mid Q.

WAH Midway between wah & vowel. Strong mid-boost. Nasty at high Q settings.

DST Nasty clipped distortion. Q functions as mid-frequency tone control.

SFX Bat phaser from the Emulator 4.

SFX Ringing Flange filter. Q “tunes” the ring frequency.

Filter Parameters

The Freq and Q parameters control various elements of the filter depending on the type of filter used. See the table in the

Filter Types

section for details about what the Freq and Q fields control in each filter.

L1

FILTER

Freq: 255 Q: 019

Filter Envelope

Preset Edit Menu

Filter Envelope

The Filter Envelope is normally used to control the filter frequency and has six stages. Unlike the Volume Envelope, the Filter Envelope must be patched to the Filter Frequency using a PatchCord. In this respect, it can be thought of as a general purpose envelope generator which is normally patched to control the filter. The Filter Envelope Levels can be negative as well as positive.

There are three mode options:

• Time-based

: Defines the Filter Envelope rates from 0 to 127 (approximately 1 ms to 160 seconds). The Master clock has no affect on timebased rates.

L1

FILT ENV RATE LEVEL

Attack 1 84 100%

• Tempo-based:

The Filter Envelope times vary based on the master tempo setting and are displayed in values such as 1, 2, 3, etc. Note values are displayed instead of a number when the time corresponds to an exact note value. Tempo-based envelopes are useful when using arpeggiators and sequencers because the envelope rates compress and expand according to the Master Tempo setting, keeping the envelopes in sync with the

music. See the illustration on page 104.

L1

FILT ENV RATE LEVEL

Attack 1 1/4 100%

• Envelope Repeat:

The Envelope Generators can also be made to repeat.

When the envelope repeat function is On, the Attack (1&2) and Decay

(1&2) stages will continue to repeat as long as the key is held. As soon as the key is released, the envelope continues through its normal Release

stages (1 & 2). For more information see page 104.

To Turn on Envelope Repeat:

1.

Move the cursor until it is underneath the Mode field as shown below.

L1

FILTER ENVELOPE

Mode: time-based

2.

Turn the data entry control clockwise. The lower line changes to:

MK-6 Operation Manual

151

Preset Edit Menu

Auxiliary Envelope

L1

FILTER ENVELOPE

Repeat: off

3.

Move the cursor underneath the on/off field, then turn the data entry control clockwise so that Repeat is On.

See the Programming

Basics section of this manual for detailed information about how the Envelopes work.

The default PatchCord settings connect the Filter

Envelope to Filter Frequency but the envelope can be routed to any real-time control destination using a PatchCord.

Defining the Filter Envelope

The Filter Envelope controls the filter frequency of the layer over time. The

Envelope has six stages to the contour: Attack 1, Attack 2, Decay 1, Decay 2,

Release 1 and Release 2. When a key is pressed, the Envelope goes through the first four stages. If the key continues to be held, the envelope holds at the Decay 2 level. When the key is released, the envelope immediately jumps to the Release 1 stage, then the Release 2 stage finally ending at the

Release 2 level.

+100

Atk2

Dcy1

Sustain

Rls2

Atk1

0 time

Dcy2

Rls1

-100

Key Down Key Released

Auxiliary Envelope

The Auxiliary Envelope is a supplementary general purpose envelope that can be routed to any real-time control destination in the PatchCords. It is

identical to the filter envelope generator. See “Filter Envelope” on page 151

for full details.

152

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)

Low Frequency

Oscillators (LFOs)

A Low Frequency Oscillator or LFO, is simply a wave that repeats at a slow speed. MK-6 has two LFOs per layer identified on the display as LFO1 and

LFO2.

An LFO can be routed to any real-time control destination using a

PatchCord. LFOs have a myriad of uses, some of which probably haven’t been thought of yet. The following examples show a few common uses.

Control the pitch of the sound (LFO -> Pitch). This effect is called

“vibrato” and is an important performance tool. Many presets use this routing with the modulation wheel controlling “how much” modulation is applied.

Create a “tremolo” effect by routing the LFO to control the volume

(LFO -> AmpVolume).

Add a bit of animation to the sound by routing the LFO to control the filter. Set the PatchCord amount low for a subtle effect.

The LFOs have five parameters: Shape, Sync, Rate, Delay and Variation.

Shape

LFO waveforms have different shapes. The shape of the waveform determines the effect of the LFO. LFOs have traditionally been used to add vibrato or repeating movement to a sound. These new shapes offer a lot of new programming possibilities.

L1

LFO1 SHAPE SYNC

sawtooth key sync

If you modulate the pitch of an instrument, it’s easy to visualize the shape of the waveform. For example, the sine wave has a smooth, rolling shape that changes the pitch smoothly. The square waveform changes between two pitches abruptly. A sawtooth waveform increases the pitch smoothly, then abruptly changes back down. The available waveforms are shown below.

MK-6 Operation Manual

153

Preset Edit Menu

Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)

R a n d o m

T r i a n g l e

LFO Tricks & Tips

:

• The Random LFO wave is truly random and is different for each voice and layer.

• The Pattern (Pat) waveforms will sound the same on different layers and voices.

• Sine + Noise is very useful for simulating trumpet and flute vibrato.

When routing Hemi-quaver to Pitch:

+38 = major scale

-38 = phrygian scale

+76 = whole tone scale

(+38) + (+76) = diminished

(two cords) odd amount = S+H sound

S i n e

2 5 % P u l s e

S q u a r e

1 6 % P u l s e

P a t : O c t a v e s

+ Octave

- Octave

C

P a t : F i f t h + O c t a v e

C

G

Note:

References to musical intervals in the pattern LFO shapes are with the LFO routed to pitch and a

PatchCord amount of +38

.

C

A #

P a t : N e e n e r

G

S i n e + N o i s e

S i n e 1 , 2

H e m i - q u a v e r

S a w t o o t h

3 3 % P u l s e

1 2 % P u l s e

C

P a t : S u s 4 t r i p

G

F

S i n e 1 , 3 , 5

LFO Synced to 1/4 Note Clock

Sync

The Sync field specifies whether the LFO is synchronized to a key stroke or is Free Running. Key Sync starts the LFO wave at the beginning of its cycle each time you press a key on the controller. In Free Run mode, the LFO wave begins at a random point in its cycle each time you press a key on the controller.

Rate

The Rate field determines the LFO speed in absolute frequency rate values or tempo-based note values. All values equal to or greater than zero specify absolute frequency values from 0.08 Hz to 18.14 Hz.

154

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)

Values less than zero specify tempo-based rates. If you modulate the rate of a tempo-based LFO, the rates will jump between the tempo-based note values with each PatchCord increment of “1”. As an example: if the LFO rate was set to 8/1 and you patched the Mod Wheel to control rate with a

PatchCord amount of +1, turning the Mod Wheel to maximum would change the LFO rate to 4/1d. Refer to the chart below.

L1

LFO1 RATE DELAY VAR

0.08Hz 60 020

Tempo-based Rates

(based on Master Tempo)

octal whole note dotted quad whole note octal whole note triplet quad whole note dotted double whole note quad whole note triplet double whole note dotted whole note double note triplet whole note dotted half note whole note triplet half note dotted quarter note half note triplet quarter note dotted 8th note quarter note triplet

8th note dotted 16th note

8th note triplet

16th note dotted 32nd note

16th note triplet

32nd Note

Display

1/1d

2/1t

1/1

1/2d

1/1t

1/2

1/4d

1/2t

8/1

4/1d

8/1t

4/1

2/1d

4/1t

2/1

1/4

1/8d

1/4t

1/8

1/16d

1/8t

1/16

1/32d

1/16t

1/32

MK-6 Operation Manual

155

Preset Edit Menu

Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)

Delay

The Delay parameter defines the amount of time between hitting a key on the controller and the onset of the LFO modulation. Delay can be used to simulate an effect often used by acoustic instrument players where the vibrato is brought in only after the initial note pitch is established. The following illustration demonstrates how delay works.

_

Variation is disabled when a Tempo-Based LFO is selected.

time

Delay key down

All Delay values equal to or greater than zero specify absolute time rates from 0 to 127. Values less than zero specify Tempo-based mode. Refer to the previous table for times and tempo-based rates.

Variation

LFO Variation sets the amount of random variation of the LFO each time you press a key on the controller. This creates a chorus or ensemble effect since each note played has a slightly different modulation rate. The higher the value entered, the greater the note to note variation in the LFO.

The Variation value range is from 0 through 100.

156

E-MU Systems

LFO variation changes the rate of each note to create an “ensemble” effect.

PatchCords

Preset Edit Menu

PatchCords

PatchCords tie everything together by connecting modulation sources to destinations. Each PatchCord has its own

Amount

control which can be positive or negative (negative amounts invert the signal). In addition, the

PatchCord amounts themselves can be controlled by any modulation source. MK-6 provides 24 patches for each layer.

There are three permanently connected control routings: volume envelope to amplifier, pitch wheel to pitch and key to pitch. All other connections must be made using the PatchCords.

Modulation

Source

LFO 1

-

Amount +/-

+

Destination

Amp

Volume

Modulation

Source

LFO 1

LFO 2

Amp Env

Filt Env

Aux Env

Wheel

Pressure etc.

Destination

Amp Vol

Pitch

Pan

LFO Rate

Aux Env

Env Atk

Glide etc.

Each patch has an amount field which determines how much modulation is applied to the destination. The modulation amount can be positive or negative. Negative values invert the input. The amount value range is from

-100 to +100.

L1

PATCHCORD #01

RlsVel -> AmpVol +100

L1

PATCHCORD #24

Key+ -> FiltRes -27

MK-6 Operation Manual

157

158

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

PatchCords

Modulator Polarity

You will notice that some of the modulation sources have symbols following their names. For example, there are three Velocity modulation sources, Vel +, Vel ±, and Vel <.

Control

Value

0 63 127

Control Value Applied

+

±

<

0

-63

63

0

127

+64

-127 -63 0

+

modulation ADDS to the

initial value. (Normal)

± centers around Zero.

(Use for LFOs, Filt. Freq.)

<

modulation SUBTRACTS from the initial value

+

” Modulation: Uses only the positive half of the range, adding to the current value.

For example, if the filter frequency were set to 100 and you patched Vel+ to the filter, the filter frequency would increase from 100 as velocity was applied.

±

” Modulation: Uses both sides (full) range and both adding and subtracting from the current value.

For example, if the filter frequency were set to 100 and you patched Vel ± to the filter, the filter frequency would decrease from 100 with key velocities of 63 or less and increase from

100 with key velocities of 64 and above. Therefore with medium velocity, the Filter frequency is approximately where you set it at 100.

An LFO ± works the same way; on the positive half of the cycle it increases the initial amount and on the negative half of the cycle it decreases the initial amount. With a ± modulation source, a value of 64 equals 0.

<

” Modulation: Uses only the negative half of the range, subtracting from the current value.

For example, if the Amplifier Volume were set to

+3 dB and you patched Vel < to AmpVol, the volume would be at +3 dB only when maximum key velocity were applied. Lower key velocities would scale back the volume. In general, < modulation is the proper choice when modulating Volume.

Preset Edit Menu

PatchCords

Note:

Flip-Flop Footswitches

1 & 2 remain in their last condition when a new preset is selected.

Flip-Flop Footswitch 3 resets to the Off condition whenever a new preset is selected.

Note:

The Envelope Sustain parameter controls the Decay 2

Level segment of the envelope generator.

Here is a list of all layer modulation sources and destinations in MK-6.

Modulation Sources: Modulation Destinations

Off

Key (+, +)

Velocity (+, +, <)

RlsVel (Release Velocity)

Gate

Pressure (Aftertouch)

PitchWhl (Pitch Wheel)

ModWhl (Modulation Wheel)

Pedal

MIDI Volume (Controller 7)

MIDI Pan (Controller 10)

MIDI Expression (Controller 11)

MIDI A-P

PLagOut (Preset Lag Out)

PRampOut (Preset Ramp Out)

FootSw1 - 3 (Foot Switch 1-3)

FootFF (Flip-Flop Foot Switch 1 -3)

Key Glide

VolEnv +, +, < (Volume Envelope)

FilEnv +, +, < (Filter Envelope)

AuxEnv +, +, < (Auxiliary Envelope)

LFO 1 & 2 (+, +)

White (White Noise)

Pink (Pink Noise)

XfdRand (Crossfade Random)

KeyRand 1 & 2 (Key Random)

Lag 0 sum (summing amp out)

Lag 1 sum (summing amp out)

Lag 0 & 1 (Lag Processor)

Clk Divisors (Octal, Quad, Double

Whole, Whole, Half, Qtr, 8th,16th)

Off

KeySust (Key Sustain)

FinePtch (Fine Pitch)

Pitch

Glide

ChrsAmt (Chorus Amount)

‘SStart (Sample Start) -note-on)

SLoop (Sample Loop)

SRetrig (Sample Retrigger)

FiltFreq (Filter Frequency)

‘FiltRes (Filter Resonance -note-on)

AmpVol (Amplifier Volume)

AmpPan (Amplifier Pan)

RTXfade (Real-time Crossfade)

VEnvRts (Volume Envelope Rates -all)

VEnvAtk (Volume Envelope Attack)

VEnvDcy (Volume Envelope Decay)

VEnvSus (Volume Envelope Sustain)

VEnvRls (Volume Envelope Release)

FEnvRts (Filter Envelope Rates -all)

FEnvAtk (Filter Envelope Attack)

FEnvDcy (Filter Envelope Decay)

FEnvSus (Filter Envelope Sustain)

FEnvRls (Filter Envelope Release)

FEnvTrig (Filter Envelope Trigger)

AEnvRts (Auxiliary Envelope Rates -all)

AEnvAtk (Auxiliary Envelope Attack)

AEnvDcy (Auxiliary Envelope Decay)

AEnvSus (Auxiliary Envelope Sustain)

AEnvRls (Auxiliary Envelope Release)

DC (DC Offset)

Summing Amp

Switch

Absolute Value

AEnvTrig (Auxiliary Envelope Trigger)

LFO 1 & 2 Rate

LFO 1 & 2 Trigger

Lag Processor In 0 & 1

Diode Sum (Summing Amp)

Flip-Flop Switch

Quantizer

4x Gain

Abs (Absolute Value)

Diode

Quantize

Flip-Flop

Gain 4x

Cord 1-24 Amount

MK-6 Operation Manual

159

Preset Edit Menu

Pitch Bend Range

Pitch Bend Range

Specifies the Pitch Wheel range in semitones for the current layer. Pitch

Wheel is a standard synthesizer control which is transmitted as a MIDI continuous controller message used (normally) to bend the pitch up and down.

The PitchBend range is from 0 to +12 semitones or “Master.” A setting of

“0” turns the pitch wheel Off for the current layer. The Master setting uses the Pitch Bend range defined in the

Global menu

.

L1

PITCHBEND RANGE

+/- 12 semitones

Mix Output

This feature allows you to program the Effect Send as a part of the preset.

Note that for this feature to work, the Mix Output setting in the Global menu MUST be set to “Preset” on the selected MIDI channel. If you want to define output routing by MIDI channel, set it up using the Mix Output page in the Global menu.

See “Mix Output” on page 86 for more information.

L1

MIX OUTPUT

Send2->main

FX Send

Routing

Output

Routing

The Sends function as effect processor inputs (effect sends). The Output

Routing field shows the true routing of the Sends to the Main output.

To Control the Mix Output from the Preset:

1.

Move the cursor until it is underneath the Layer field and change the

Layer using the data entry control.

2.

3.

4.

Move the cursor until it is underneath the FX Send Routing field and change the Send (1-4) using the data entry control.

Locate the MIX OUTPUT screen in the Global menu.

Set the MIDI channel you are using to “use preset”.

160

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Common

Preset

Parameters

This section of the Preset Edit menu chapter describes parameters that affect all layers in the preset.

Preset Effects

MK-6 has two stereo effects processors. When playing presets one at a time, the two processors can be programmed as part of the preset. The diagram below shows how the effects are integrated into the signal path using a parallel effects send/return model, similar to a mixing console.

Layers

FX Send Amount

Reverb, Delay

Effect

A

Dry Signal

FX Send Amount

Effect

B

Chorus, Flange

Sum

Sum

Main

Outs

Refer to the Effects chapter for additional information and instructions for setting up both the Preset Effects and the Master Effects.

MK-6 Operation Manual

161

Preset Edit Menu

Preset Effects

Mix Output

Ch 1

Ch 2

Ch 3

Ch 16

PRESET

SEND 2

SEND 3

PRESET

EDIT MENU

Mix

Output

Send 1

SEND 4

GLOBAL MENU

S

E

N

D

4

S

E

N

D

3

S

E

N

D

2

S

E

N

D

1

OUTPUT SECTION

& EFFECTS PROCESSORS

FX Sends

Send 1

15%

Send 2

10%

Send 3

0%

Send 4

0%

Hall 1

Effect

A

B

A

FX Sends

Send 1

0%

Chorus

Send 2

0%

Send 3

20%

Send 4

15%

Effect

B

Jack Detect

M

A

I

N

S

U

B

1

The Mix Output setting in the Global Menu determines if the Preset’s Mix

Output routing will be used. This allows the Sends to be programmed by either

MIDI Channel

or by

Preset

, whichever you prefer.

162

E-MU Systems

FXA Algorithm

Preset Edit Menu

FXA Algorithm

This screen selects the effect type for Effect Processor A. The “A” effects consist of different reverb types and digital delays. Move the cursor to the lower line of the display and select the effect you want.

FXA ALGORITHM

Lg Concert Pan

A Effect Types

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

Room 1

Room 2

Room 3

Hall 1

Hall 2

Plate

Delay

Panning Delay

Multitap 1

Multitap Pan

3 Tap

3 Tap Pan

Soft Room

Warm Room

Perfect Room

Tiled Room

Hard Plate

Warm Hall

Spacious Hall

Bright Hall

Bright Hall Pan

Bright Plate

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

35.

36.

37.

38.

39.

40.

41.

42.

43.

44.

BBall Court

Gymnasium

Cavern

Concert 9

Concert 10 Pan

Reverse Gate

Gate 2

Gate Pan

Concert 11

Medium Concert

Large Concert

Large Concert Pan

Canyon

DelayVerb 1

DelayVerb 2

DelayVerb 3

DelayVerb 4 Pan

DelayVerb 5 Pan

DelayVerb 6

DelayVerb 7

DelayVerb 8

DelayVerb 9

MK-6 Operation Manual

163

Preset Edit Menu

FXA Parameters

FXA Parameters

The FXA parameters are Decay, High Frequency Damping, and the FxB to

FxA send.

Decay

sets the length of time it takes an effect to fade out.

HF

Damping

causes the high frequency energy to fade away more quickly during the reverb decay.

FxB to FxA

controls the amount of the “B” effect sent through effect “A”. This allows you to place the two effects in series and create setups such as “distortion through reverb” among others. Please refer to the Effects chapter for more information about the effects.

FXA DECAY HFDAMP FxB>FxA

048 064 000

FXA Send Amounts

These parameters set the effects amounts for each of the four stereo effects busses.

FXA SEND AMOUNTS 1:100%

2: 50% 3: 10% 4: 0%

FXB Algorithm

This screen selects the effect type for Effect Processor A. Move the cursor to the lower line of the display and select the effect you want.

FXB ALGORITHM

Panning Delay

B Effect Types

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Chorus 1

Chorus 2

Chorus 3

Chorus 4

Chorus 5

Doubling

Slapback

Flange 1

Flange 2

Flange 3

Flange 4

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

Flange 5

Flange 6

Flange 7

Big Chorus

Symphonic

Ensemble

Delay

Delay Stereo

Delay Stereo 2

Panning Delay

Delay Chorus

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

PanDelay Chorus 1

PanDelay Chorus 2

Dual Tap 1/3

Dual Tap 1/4

Vibrato

Distortion 1

Distortion 2

Distorted Flange

Distorted Chorus

Distorted Double

164

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

FXB Parameters

FXB Parameters

The FXB parameters are Feedback, LFO Rate and Delay.

Feedback

sends the output of the effect back into the input. This creates multiple echoes on a delay effect and intensifies a chorus or flange effect.

LFO Rate

allows you to change the speed of the modulation oscillator for flange and chorus effects.

Delay

sets the length of the delay line. This affects the time between echoes, or the tone of flange effects.

FXB FEEDBK LFORATE DELAY

032 003 200ms

FXB Send Amounts

These parameters set the effects amounts for the four stereo effects busses.

FXB SEND AMOUNTS 1:100%

2: 50% 3: 10% 4: 0%

Preset Patchcords

O

To crossfade between effects.

1) Set FXA Send 1 to 100%.

2) Set FXB Send 1 to 0%.

3) Set FX Cord #1 to FXA Send 1 at -100.

4) Set FX Cord #2 to FXB Send 1 at +100.

Increasing the controller amount will crossfade from FXA to FXB.

Preset PatchCords give you real-time control of global parameters. The effect processors are a powerful synthesis tool and this feature lets you control and use them in exciting new ways. For example, you can dynamically adjust the effects mix during a sequence or live performance.

There are many exciting performance possibilities using Preset PatchCords to control Arpeggiator parameters and Effects Sends. The front panel knobs

15 & 16 are usually connected to Arp parameters in factory presets marked

“arp:” Be sure to try out these controls

There are 12 Preset PatchCords per preset with a source, a destination and an amount control. The amount can be set from -100 to +100. The Preset

PatchCord controls are

added

to the FX Send Amounts set in the Global or

Preset Edit menus. In other words, multiple sources connected to destinations are

summed

.

PRESET CORDS #01

Pedal -> FXBSend2 +100

MK-6 Operation Manual

165

166

E-MU Systems

Modulation Sources:

Off

PitchWhl (Pitch Wheel)

ModWhl (Modulation Wheel)

Pedal

MIDI Volume (Controller 7)

MIDI Pan (Controller 10)

MIDI A-L

Footswitch 1

Flip-Flop Footswitch 1

Footswitch 2

Flip-Flop Footswitch 2

Footswitch 3

Flip-Flop Footswitch 3

DC

Preset Edit Menu

Preset Patchcords

Modulation Destinations

Off

Effect A Send 1

Effect A Send 2

Effect A Send 3

Effect A Send 4

Effect B Send 1

Effect B Send 2

Effect B Send 3

Effect B Send 4

Preset Lag In

Preset Lag Amount

Preset Lag Rate

Preset Ramp Rate

Arp Resolution

Arp Extension

Arp Velocity

Arp Gate

Arp Interval

Beats Velocity, Group 1-4

Beats Transpose (Xps), Group 1-4

Beats Busy

Beats Variation

Preset Edit Menu

Initial Controller Amount

Initial Controller

Amount

This parameter sets the initial value of MIDI controllers A-P when the preset is first selected. The front panel Control Knobs can be thought of as front panel MIDI controllers because in the MK-6, they are treated just as if they originated from an external MIDI device. Refer to the following diagram.

There are 4 Initial Controller Amount screens (A-D, E-H, I-L, M-P).

MIDI

MIDI

Menu

0

1

2

31

64

95

MIDI

Controller

A

0

1

2

31

64

95

MIDI

Controller

B

0

1

2

31

64

95

MIDI

Controller

C

0

1

2

31

64

95

MIDI

Controller

P

16 Control

Knobs

A

B

C

P

Preset Edit

Menu

-

-

-

-

A

B

C

P

+

+

+

+

Amount

Cord

Cord

Cord

Cord

Patchcord Destinations

Key Sustain

Fine Pitch

Pitch

Glide

Chorus Amount

Sample Start

Sample Loop

Sample Retrigger

Filter Frequency

Filter Q

Amplifier Volume

Amplifier Pan

Amplifier Crossfade

Volume Envelope Rates

Volume Envelope Attack

Volume Envelope Decay

Volume Envelope Release

Filter Envelope Rates

Filter Envelope Attack

Filter Envelope Decay

Filter Envelope Release

Aux. Envelope Rates

Aux. Envelope Attack

Aux. Envelope Decay

Aux. Envelope Release

LFO 1 & 2 Rates

LFO 1 & 2 Trigger

Lag Processor

Summing Amp

Switch

Absolute Value

Diode

Quantizer

4x Gain

Cord 1-24 Amount

FXA Send 1-4

FXB Send 1-4

Preset Lag In

Preset Lag Amount

Preset Ramp Rate

Preset

Cords

External MIDI controller numbers are assigned to the Letters A-P in the

MIDI menu. The Initial Controller Amount value is sent to the PatchCord destination when the Preset is first selected. If you move the Control Knob, then that value replaces the initial value. If MIDI controller data is received it will similarly replace the knob or initial setting.

INITIAL CONTROLLER AMT

A:017 B:112 C:127 D: off

The Initial controller amounts can be set from 000-127 or they can be turned Off. If set to Off, the current controller value is used when the preset is first selected. Setting the Initial Amount to “off” uses the values from the previously selected preset.

MK-6 Operation Manual

167

Preset Edit Menu

Keyboard Tuning

Keyboard Tuning

In addition to the standard equally divided octave tuning, MK-6 contains twelve factory programmed tunings and 12 user-definable tunings. The

Keyboard Tuning parameter selects which tuning is used by the current preset. The User Tuning tables are defined in the Global menu

.

The factory Keyboard Tuning tables are described in the following table.

Tuning Tables

Equal Temperament

Just C

Vallotti

19-Tone

Gamelan

Just C2

Just C-minor

Just C3

Werkmeister III

Kirnberger

Scarlatti

Repeating Octave

User 1-12

Description

Standard Western tuning

(12 equally spaced notes per octave)

Just intonation. (Based on small interval ratios. Sweet and pure, non-beating intervals.)

Valotti & Young non-equal temperament. (Similar to 12 tone equal temperament. Each key has a different character for a given scale.)

19 tone equal temperament. (19 notes per octave.

Difficult to play, but works well with a sequencer.)

5 tone Slendro and 7 tone Pelog. (Javanese. Pelog are white keys, Slendro are black keys. Exotic tunings of

Gamelan flavor.

Allows you to play the following chords in the key of C:

C, E, F, G, A, B, C#m, D#m, Em, F#m, G#m, Am, Bm

Allows you to play the following chords in the key of C:

C, E, F, G, A, B, Em, Am, Bm, C#m, D#m, G#m

Allows you to play the following chords in the key of C:

C, D, F, Bb, C#m, Dm, Em, F#m, G#m, Am

A “well” temperament developed in the 17th century.

Although you can play in all keys, each key sounds slightly different.

Another well temperament developed by Johann

Philipp Kirnberger where no pitch is more than 12 cents off from equal temperament.

A variant of Meantone tuning which was used from the

15th to 18th centuries.

Middle C octave is repeated up and down the keyboard.

Link with a preset in equal temperament to form unusual inversion up and down the keyboard.

Define your own tuning tables

(Global menu)

.

Refer to “User Key Tuning” on page 92 in the Global Menu chapter for

instructions on how to define your own Keyboard Tunings.

168

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Keyboard Tuning

MK-6 implements the

MIDI Tuning Dump protocol which allows you to create tuning tables on your personal computer and download them via MIDI. There are several computer applications available on the internet which let you create and download tuning tables via MIDI.

The Just C Tuning Tables

Well Tempered and Just were standard keyboard tunings up until the 20thcentury when the current “equal tempered” scale became prevalent. In an equal tempered scale, the octave is equally divided into 12 parts. In Just or

Well Tempered scales, the 12 notes are separately tuned to produce pure chords. However, in Just tunings you are limited to playing certain chords and if you play the wrong chord it may sound very BAD!

MK-6 allows you to modulate between keys by providing you 12 user tuning tables. Tuning tables can be changed as you play using a program change (create several presets with the same sound and different tuning tables), by MIDI SysEx command (using a programmable MIDI footswitch or other device), or using a continuous controller (link 2 presets and crossfade between them using a controller).

The Just C2, Just C min, Just C3 Tuning Tables

These new tuning tables take the concept of just intonation a step beyond previous E-MU products. Fully explaining the mysteries of just intonation is beyond the scope of this manual, but the subject is covered exhaustively in

Hermann Helmholtz’s On the Sensations of Tone, available at most libraries and bookstores.

The new tables are called Just C2, Just C3, and Just C Minor. Try playing in the key of C/Cm using each table. You’ll quickly discover both the wonders and the frustrations of just intonation! In Just C, for example, you’ll find that the chords C, Em, F, G, and Am sound beautiful. If you hold one of these chords, you’ll hear no “beating”. After playing for a few minutes, switch back to Equal Temperament for a rude awakening!

At this point you might wonder why anyone would use Equal Temperament to begin with. For the answer to that question, play a D, Dmi, or Bb chord!.The intervallic ratios that make the C & G chords sound so pure make the D chord sound horribly out of tune. That's why we had to include

Just C3. In this tuning, D, Dmi and Bb sound in tune, but the G chord will sound wrong.

Each of the 4 tables allows you to play a different group of common chords in just intonation. Sadly, there is no single 12 note tuning that will allow all of the common chords to be in tune, and of course that's why they invented the equal temperament tuning system that we use today.

Just C

Play these chords:

C, E, F, G, A, C

m

, C#

m

, E

m

, F#

m

, G

m

, A

m

Just C2

Play these chords:

C, E, F, G, A, B, C#

m

, D#

m

, E

m

, G#

m

, A

m

, B

m

Just C2 minor

Play these chords:

C, D

b

, D, E

b

, G, A

b

, C

m

, E

m

, F

m

, G

m

Just C3

Play these chords:

C, D, F, B

b

, C#

m

, D

m

, E

m

, F#

m

, G#

m

, A

m

MK-6 Operation Manual

169

Preset Links

Preset Edit Menu

Preset Links

You can link presets to other presets to create layering or keyboard splits.

The current preset can be linked with up to two other presets (Links 1 & 2).

Each linked preset can be assigned to a specific range in order to create keyboard splits or can be assigned a velocity range to switch links according to key velocity. In addition, you can specify Volume, Pan, Transpose and

Delay settings for each Link. The modulation parameters specified in each preset remain in effect for each preset in the link.

LINK 1 Preset MROM

000

2

Preset Name

LINK 1 KEY VEL

RANGE C-2 G8 000-127

LINK 1 VOLUME PAN

+0dB 00

LINK 1 TRANSPOSE DELAY

+00 0

Links provide an easy way to create new sounds by combining the existing presets. Or, you can create your own custom stacked presets with up to 12 layers! We’re talking LARGE sounds here. Of course Links can also be used when you just want to stack up two sounds.

As an example, let’s stack two presets to create a big sound. Start with a preset you like, then go into the Links screen and start scrolling through the preset list while you play to hear both presets together. When you find a winner, simply Save the preset and you’re finished!

You can “Split” the keyboard up to 12 ways by using combinations of the

Layers and Links.

By adjusting the Velocity for the link, you can bring in the link by playing hard.

Transposing the Link can radically change the sound.

The delay parameter lets you create surprise effects, echoes or cascades of sound as you continue to hold the keys.

170

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Preset Tempo Offset

Preset Tempo Offset

This function allows you to double or halve the Master Tempo as it applies to this preset. When playing or sequencing several presets in Multi mode, the Master Tempo may be too fast or slow for one preset. Using this feature, you can adjust the tempo for the misbehaving preset. The Tempo Offset can use the

current tempo

or be set to

half

or

twice

the current tempo.

TEMPO OFFSET use current tempo x 2

Audition Riff

Selection

O

Listening to the Riffs is a quick way to learn the sounds in

MK-6. If a preset has hidden tricks or controllers, these will be shown off in the Riff.

A Riff is a short pre-recorded musical phrase which can be anything from a single note to a full 16-track sequence. This function allows you to assign a

Riff to a Preset. The Preset Riff will be used when the front panel Audition button is pressed.

The Riffs themselves cannot be modified.

AUDITION SELECTION

Plays:KEY-MiddleC

Play Solo Layers

When constructing multilayer sounds it is often useful to turn off one or more of the layers so you can hear what you’re doing! This feature allows you to temporarily solo individual layers or listen to them in any combination. This screen differs from the other Preset Edit screens in that it is

NOT saved with the preset. The values reset each time you exit the Preset

Edit menu.

Solo is activated by setting any layer to On (On = the layer is being Soloed).

Any layers set to

On will play

and any layers set to

Off will be muted

. If all layers are set to Off, then Solo mode ends and all layers play normally.

When you exit the Preset Edit menu, all layers play normally.

PLAY SOLO LAYERS

1: off 2: off 3: off 4: off

MK-6 Operation Manual

171

172

E-MU Systems

Preset Edit Menu

Play Solo Layers

Effects

Effects

Overview

The Effects Sends

MK-6 has two stereo effects processors. When playing presets one at a time, the two processors can be programmed as part of the preset. When the

MIDI Mode is set to “multi,” the MK-6 uses a global effects assignment

(Master Effects). The diagram below shows how the effects are integrated into the signal path using a parallel effects send/return model, similar to a mixing console.

FX Send Amount

Reverb, Delay

Effect

A

Sum

Preset

Dry Signal

Main

Outs

Sum

FX Send Amount

Effect

B

Chorus, Flange

On a mixing console you can control the amount of signal each channel

Sends to the effect bus. This allows each channel to be placed in a slightly different “sonic space” which creates an airy, open sound.

MK-6 uses this basic concept, but works in a slightly different manner.

There are four effects busses: Send1-Send4. Each preset or each MIDI channel (you determine which), can be directed to one of the four busses.

Each effect processor has four Send Amounts which allow you to set the wet/dry mix on each of the four busses going into the effect. A setting of

0% is completely dry (no effect). A setting of 50% contains an equal mix of affected and normal (dry) signal.

MK-6 Operation Manual

173

174

E-MU Systems

Effects

Effects Overview

Send 2 is also used to route sounds to the Sub 1 outputs on the back panel.

When a plug is inserted into the associated Submix jack on the back panel, the Dry portion of the Send is disconnected from the effects processor and the Dry signal is routed directly to the output jack.

The Arrow (->) in the display points to the actual output routing

.

The Dry Send is disconnected from the Effects Processors even if only one plug is inserted into a Submix pair.

The Effects Send is programmed for each layer in the Preset Edit menu.

These routings can be overruled in the Global menu

Mix Output

screen by changing the submix setting from “preset”, which uses the preset routing, to Send1-Send4. In the diagram below, MIDI channel 1 is programmed to obey the preset routing, which in this case is Send 1.

OUTPUT SECTION

& EFFECTS PROCESSORS

PRESET

EDIT MENU

FX Sends

Send 1

15%

Send 2

10%

Send 3

0%

Send 4

0%

Hall 1

Effect

A

B

A

Mix

Output

Send 1

S

E

N

D

1

M

A

I

N

FX Sends

Send 1

0%

Send 2

0%

Chorus

Send 3

20%

Send 4

15%

Effect

B

Mix Output

Ch 1

Ch 2

PRESET

SEND 2

S

E

N

D

2

Jack Detect

S

U

B

1

Ch 3

Ch 16

SEND 3

SEND 4

GLOBAL MENU

S

E

N

D

4

S

E

N

D

3

Individual layers or entire MIDI channels can be routed to any of the four busses.

The four Effect Sends allow you to get the most out of the two effect processors. For example, with Effect B set to an echo algorithm, you could route one MIDI channel to Send 3 and set the effect amount to 80%.

Another MIDI channel could be routed to Send 4 with an effect amount of only 5%.

The Mix Output function is also useful when sequencing since it lets you route specific MIDI channels to specific Sub outputs (on the back panel) where there they can be processed with EQ or other outboard effects.

Effects

Effect Types

Effect

Types

Effect Parameters

A Effect Types

Room 1-3

Hall 1 & 2

Plate

Delay

Panning Delay

Multitap 1

Multitap Pan

3 Tap

3 Tap Pan

Soft Room

Warm Room

Perfect Room

Tiled Room

Hard Plate

Warm Hall

Spacious Hall

Bright Hall

Bright Hall Pan

Bright Plate

BBall Court

Gymnasium

Cavern

Concert 9

Concert 10 Pan

Reverse Gate

Gate 2

Gate Pan

Concert 11

Medium Concert

Large Concert

Large Concert Pan

Canyon

DelayVerb 1-3

DelayVerb 4-5 Pan

DelayVerb 6-9

B Effect Types

Chorus 1-5

Doubling

Slapback

Flange 1-7

Big Chorus

Symphonic

Ensemble

Delay

Delay Stereo

Delay Stereo 2

Panning Delay

Delay Chorus

Pan Delay Chorus 1 & 2

Dual Tap 1/3

Dual Tap 1/4

Vibrato

Distortion 1 & 2

Distorted Flange

Distorted Chorus

Distorted Double

“A” Effect types contain Reverb and Delay effects. “B” Effect types contain

Chorus, Flange and Distortion effects. There are 44 “A” effects and 32 “B” effects. In addition to the effect type, there are user adjustable parameters for each effect. The “A” effects have programmable Decay and High

Frequency Damping. The “B” effects have user programmable Feedback,

LFO Rate, and Delay Time.

MK-6 Operation Manual

175

176

E-MU Systems

Effects

Effect Types

Decay

The Decay parameter is used when setting “A” type effects. Decay sets the length of time it takes an effect to fade out. When setting up reverb effects,

Decay controls the room size and the reflectivity of the room. For larger room sizes and greater reflectivity, set the Decay value higher. When setting up delay effects, the Decay parameter controls how many echoes are produced or how long the echoes last. The greater the value, the more echoes and longer lengths of time.

The Decay value range is from 0 through 90.

High Frequency Damping

The HF Damping parameter is used when setting “A” type effects. High

Frequency energy tends to fade away first as a sound is dissipated in a room. the HF Damping parameter adjusts the amount of damping applied to the signal’s high frequency elements which, in turn, changes the characteristics of the room. Rooms with smooth, hard surfaces are more reflective and have less high frequency damping. Rooms filled with sound absorbing materials, such as curtains or people, have more high frequency damping.

The value range for High Frequency Damping is from 0 through 127.

Feedback

The Feedback parameter is used when setting “B” type effects. The Chorus and Flange effects have a controllable feedback loop after the delay element. Feeding back a small amount of the signal intensifies the effect by creating multiple cancellations or images. Higher feedback values increase the amount of the Feedback loop.

The Feedback value range is from 0 to 127.

LFO Rate

The LFO Rate parameter is used when setting “B” type effects. Both Chorus and Flange effects use a Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) to animate the effect. LFO applied to a chorus effect creates the slight changes necessary for a realistic choral effect. Applied to a flanger effect, the LFO moves the comb filter notches and adds animation to the sound.

The LFO Rate value range is from 0 to 127.

Delay

Flanging, chorus and echoes are all based on a delay line where the signal is delayed by some time period and then mixed back with the unaltered signal. This parameter specifies the how much time passes before you hear the delayed signal. On some effects, this value cannot be changed. In this case, the field contains a dash.

The Delay value range is from 0ms to 635ms.

Effects

Effects Programmed in the Preset

Effects

Programmed in the Preset

Effects are normally programmed as part of the preset allowing you to have a different effect for each. This section describes how to program and modify MK-6’s preset effects.

To Program the Effects as Part of the Preset:

1.

Press the Preset Edit button. The LED illuminates and the Preset Edit screen appears.

2.

Use the data entry control to select the FXA Algorithm screen.

FXA ALGORITHM

Lg Concert Pan

3.

4.

Select an Effect. Do not select the “Master Effect” setting or the global effects set up in the Global menu will be used instead of the Preset

Effect settings.

Use the data entry control to select the FXA parameter screen.

FXA DECAY HFDAMP FxB>FxA

90 127 127

The FxB -> FxA parameter lets you route the B effect through the A effect.

See “Effect B Into Effect A” on page 182.

5.

6.

Set the other effect parameters to your preference. Refer to the information in the last section for detailed descriptions of these parameters.

Use the data entry control to select the FXB Algorithm screen.

FXB ALGORITHM

Distorted Flange

7.

8.

Select an Effect. Do not select the “Master Effect” setting or the global effects set up in the Global menu will be used instead of the Preset

Effect settings.

Use the data entry control to select the FXB parameter screen.

MK-6 Operation Manual

177

Effects

Master Effects

FXB FEEDBK LFORATE DELAY

127 127 635ms

9.

10.

Set the other effect parameters to your preference. Refer to the information in the last section for detailed descriptions of these parameters.

Save the preset. The programmed effects setting will be saved along with the preset.

Master Effects

When playing single presets, the effects are normally programmed as part of the preset. In Multimode the Master effects are used, since there are only two effect processors to serve 16 MIDI channels.

You might also want the effects to be programmed on a global basis when in Omni or Poly modes. You could choose your favorite reverb, for example, and have it applied to any preset you select.

To Program the Master Effects

1.

2.

Press the Global menu button. The LED illuminates and the Global screen appears.

Use the data entry control to select the FXA Algorithm screen.

FXA ALGORITHM

Lg Concert Pan

3.

4.

Select an Effect.

Use the data entry control to select the FXA parameter screen.

FXA DECAY HFDAMP FxB>FxA

90 127 127

The FxB -> FxA parameter lets you route the B effect through the A effect.

See “Effect B Into Effect A” on page 182.

178

E-MU Systems

Effects

Master Effects

5.

6.

Set the other effect parameters to your preference. Refer to the information in the last section for detailed descriptions of these parameters.

Use the data entry control to select the FXB Algorithm screen.

FXB ALGORITHM

Distorted Flange

7.

8.

Select an Effect.

Use the data entry control to select the FXB parameter screen.

FXB FEEDBK LFORATE DELAY

127 127 145ms

_

The MIDI mode (MIDI

Menu) must be set to Omni or

Poly mode in order to select the effects in the preset.

9.

10.

11.

Set the other effect parameters to your preference. Refer to the information in the last section for detailed descriptions of these parameters.

Press the Preset Edit menu button. The LED illuminates and the Preset

Edit menu displays the last screen used.

Use the data entry control to access the FXA Algorithm page and select

“Master Effect A.”

FXA ALGORITHM

Master Effect A

12.

13.

Repeat step 11 for the FXB Algorithm

Save the preset. The Master effects routing will be saved along with the preset.

MK-6 Operation Manual

179

Effects

Master Effects

Effects Mode

This control provides a true bypass of the effects engine. Bypass is a useful feature if you are using external effects at the mixing console and want to turn the effects off for all presets.

To Bypass the Effects:

1.

Press the Global menu button. The LED lights and the last Global parameter screen used is displayed.

2.

Use the data entry control to select the Effects Mode screen.

FX MODE enabled

3.

4.

5.

Use the cursor button to advance the cursor to the bottom line in the screen.

Use the data entry control to change the value.

Press the Enter key to save the settings.

The Effects Mode values are “enabled” and “bypassed.” Enabling the Effects

Mode turns on effects. Selecting “bypassed” turns off the effects.

Flexible Effects

Control

The effects processor controls are very flexible. The effects can be controlled in three different ways to suit your personal preference and to adapt to different situations.

When in Omni or Poly mode, effects are normally programmed as part of the preset. In Multi mode, the two effects processors can be controlled using the Master settings or by using the effects settings of a preset on a specific MIDI channel. Effects can be programmed in the following ways:

You can create special

“Effects Presets” which are assigned to the FX Multi mode

Control channel, then use standard MIDI Program Change commands to switch effects during sequence playback.

1.

Programmed as part of the preset when playing single presets

(Omni or Poly Modes).

2.

Programmed from the Master Effects Section when playing either single presets (preset Effect Type set to “Master”) or when in Multi Mode.

3.

Programmed from the designated control preset when in Multi

Mode.

180

E-MU Systems

Effects

Master Effects

Refer to the following diagram for a look at how effects are programmed.

1

Master

FX

Preset

FX

Effects are part of the Preset

(Omni or Poly Mode)

2

Master

FX

Preset

Ch 1

FX

Master Effects

(Multi mode)

Preset

Ch 16

FX

3

Master

FX

(Multi mode)

Selected FX Control Channel

Preset

Ch 1

FX

Preset

Ch 16

FX

One Channel's

Preset determines the Effect Settings

To Program the Effects Globally for all Presets in Multi Mode:

1.

2.

Press the MIDI menu button. The LED illuminates and the MIDI menu screen appears.

Use the data entry control to select the MIDI mode page. Choose

“multi” for the mode.

MIDI MODE CHANGE multi accepted

MK-6 Operation Manual

181

Effects

Master Effects

3.

Move the cursor to the Multi mode Effects Control page using the data entry control.

FX MULTIMODE CONTROL use master settings

4.

5.

Set the Effect Control channel to

use master settings

using the data entry control.

Press the Enter key to save the settings and return to the main screen.

Using the Effects Channel Settings in Multi Mode

In Multi mode, the two effects processors can be controlled from the Master

Effects settings or they can follow the effects settings of the preset on a special MIDI channel. The effect settings on this special channel will be applied to all the other MIDI channels. This allows the effects to be changed during a sequence simply by changing the preset on a specified

MIDI channel.

To Program the Effects by Channel Number in Multi Mode:

1.

2.

Press the MIDI menu button. The LED illuminates and the MIDI menu screen appears.

Use the data entry control to select the MIDI mode page. Choose

“multi” for the mode.

3.

4.

5.

Move the cursor to the Multi mode Effects Control field using the data entry control

Set the Effect Control to “preset on Channel #” (where # is replaced by the actual channel number from 1 through 16) using the data entry control.

Press Enter to save the settings and return to the main screen.

Effect B Into Effect A

The output of effects processor B can be routed into effects processor A.

This connects the effects in series instead of their normal parallel configuration. Two effects connected in series sound very different than the same two effects in parallel. For example, a chorus patched through reverb can turn a bland string section into a lush wall of sound. The B –>A amount can also be controlled for even more flexibility.

To Send the Output of Effect B through Effect A:

In this example, 100% of Effect B will be sent into Effect A.

1.

Access the FXA parameter screen (in either the Global or Preset Edit menus) that contains the FXB –>FXA parameter.

182

E-MU Systems

Effects

Master Effects

FXA DECAY HFDAMP FxB>FxA

127 127 127

2.

3.

Set this amount to 127. Press the cursor button to return the cursor to the top line in the display.

Use the data entry control to select the FXA submix routing parameter screen.

FXA SEND AMOUNTS 1: 10%

2: 20% 3: 30% 4: 40%

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Press the cursor buttons to advance the cursor to the Main field.

Set the Main send amount to any amount other than zero.

Press the cursor button again to return the cursor to the FXA title. Use the data entry control to advance to the FXB Algorithm page.

Select an effect.

Advance to the FXB submix routing page and set the Main FXB send percentage to zero.

Play the keyboard and you should hear the B Effect running through

Effect A. This patch is shown below.

Main Send

50%

Effect B

B

A

100%

Main Send

0%

Effect A

MK-6 Operation Manual

183

Effects

General Effect Descriptions

General Effect

Descriptions

Reverb

Reverberation is a simulation of a natural space such as a room or hall. The reverb algorithms in MK-6 simulate various halls, rooms and reverberation plates. In addition, there are several other reverb effects such as Gated

Reverbs, Multi Tap (early reflections), Delay and Panning effects. There are two adjustable parameters on the reverb effects - Decay Time and High

Frequency Damping.

Decay time defines the time it takes for the reflected sound from the room to decay or die away. The diagram below shows a generalized reverberation envelope.

Pre

Delay

Reflex

Cluster

Reverb

TIME

Decay Time

After an initial pre-delay period, the echoes from the closest walls or ceiling are heard. These first echoes, or the early reflection cluster, vary greatly depending on the type of room. Roughly 20 milliseconds after the early reflection cluster, the actual reverberation begins and decays according to the time set by the Decay Time parameter.

High frequency energy tends to fade away first as a sound is dissipated in a room. The High Frequency Damping parameter allows you adjust the amount of high frequency damping and thus change the characteristics of the room. Rooms with smooth, hard surfaces are more reflective and have less high frequency damping. Rooms filled with sound absorbing materials such as curtains or people have more high frequency damping.

General Descriptions of the Reverb Types

Room

: Programs simulate small rooms with high frequency absorption caused by drapes and furniture.

Plates

: Simulates plate type reverbs with their tight, dense, early reflections and sharp reverb buildup.

Hall

: Presets recreate the open, spacious ambience of large concert halls.

Gated Reverbs

: Add ambience only while the original signal is still sounding. As soon as the signal falls below a threshold, reverb is cut off.

Delay

: Programs can be used to create echo and doubling effects.

Multi Tap

: Programs consist of the reflection cluster only without the reverb decay.

184

E-MU Systems

Chorus

Doubling

Slapback

Stereo Flanger

Effects

General Effect Descriptions

The function of a chorus device is to thicken the sound or to make one voice sound like many. This effect is usually created by mixing one or more delayed versions of the signal with the original. The delay times used are too short to be perceived as an echo, but long enough so that comb filtering does not occur. In addition, the delay time is varied via a low frequency oscillator to simulate the random differences which occur when multiple instruments are playing together. A slight amount of feedback improves the effect by creating multiple images of the sound as it recirculates again and again.

All the choruses are true stereo using two separate delay lines controlled by a single set of controls. The delay times are slightly different for each channel and the LFO phase is inverted on one channel to help contribute to the overall chorus effect. The LFO Rate and Depth settings are critical to achieving a realistic effect, with faster LFO rates generally requiring less LFO amount and vice-versa.

When a copy of a sound delayed by about 26 milliseconds is added back to the original, two audio images are perceived by your brain. When the delayed image is slightly varied or modulated, the illusion of two voices is created.

Slapback is a single short echo in the range of 50-60 milliseconds. A sound delayed by this length of time is perceived as a discrete and separate image which is useful for a thickening effect or as a pre-delay for reverb simulating a hard, reflective surface such a gymnasium wall.

A flanger consists of a short audio delay line whose output is mixed together with the original signal. Mixing the delayed and original signals results in multiple frequency cancellations called a comb filter. Since the flanger is a type of filter, it works best with harmonically rich sounds.

This is the frequency response of a Comb Filter.

Flanging was originally created using two tape recorders playing identical recordings. By exactly synchronizing the two decks and then slowing the speed of one by grasping the tape reel flanges, the flanging effect was born.

MK-6 Operation Manual

185

Delay

Stereo Delay

Panning Delay

Dual Tap

Vibrato

Distortion

Effects

General Effect Descriptions

The MK-6 flanger is a stereo device consisting of two separate delay lines controlled by a single set of controls. A Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) varies this initial delay setting, changing the frequency of the notches and adding animation to the sound. LFO Rate controls the rate of change and

LFO Depth controls how much the LFO changes the delay.

The Feedback control sends some of the delayed signal through the delay line again. When feedback is used the comb filter notches are deepened.

Delay is an effect which can be used for doubling, reverb pre-delay, or echoes.

Delay Time is variable from 0-635 mS and controls the time between echoes. Feedback and determines how long the echoes continue sounding.

“Infinite” delay effects are also possible without the risk of runaway.

Similar to delay except that the delay line outputs a stereo signal from the mono input. The two output signals are a few milliseconds apart to create a stereo image. The delay times are variable from 0-635 mS.

A panning delay is similar to the normal delay lines except that the echoes bounce back and forth between the two stereo speakers.

These are delay lines where the signal is “tapped off” at two unevenly spaced locations. When feedback is used, multiple complex echoes are produced. The fraction in some of the algorithm names (i.e. 1/3, 1/4) refers to the time ratio between the taps.

Basically, this a delay line modulated by an LFO, but with none of the original signal added in. The LFO modulation creates a Doppler shift and a resultant cyclical pitch shift. The vibrato created in this manner sounds very different than vibrato created by frequency modulating the sample.

Distortion uses a technique called “soft-clipping” to create additional harmonics in the signal. As the level increases, the top of the waveform becomes somewhat squared. As the level increases further, it transforms into a true square wave.

Soft clipping gradually squares the edges of the waveform as the amplitude is increased.

186

E-MU Systems

Save/Copy Menu

Saving a Preset

The Save/Copy button is used to save changes to a preset, copy data between presets, randomize presets and to move other types of data. The menu is context-sensitive and will start at the appropriate save screen. If multiple items need to be saved, then the screens have the following priority: pattern, song, preset. Use the data entry control to navigate to other pages that support copying information.

Any time you make a change to a preset, either using the Preset Edit menu or by changing the Controller Knobs in Quick Edit mode, you must save the preset in order for the change to become permanent. When you save a preset it erases any existing preset information in that location. Make sure that the destination location does not contain preset information you want to keep.

SAVE PRESET to User

020

1

Destination Preset

To Save a Preset:

1.

2.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

Move the cursor

to the bottom line on the display.

3.

4.

Select

the new preset location using the data entry control.

Press the

Home/Enter

button.

MK-6 Operation Manual

187

Save/Copy Menu

Copy Preset

Copying

Information

Copy Preset

The Copy operations let you copy information from any preset or layer to any other preset or layer. To use the copy command, first select the preset or layer to which you want to copy (the destination location). Then, from the copy screen, select the preset or layer you want to copy to the currently selected location (the source location). Using the copy commands you can copy preset, layer, PatchCord and arpeggiator information.

The Copy Preset command lets you copy all of the preset information from one location into the preset of the current location. The preset information in the source location (the preset location from which you want to copy) is not deleted from the original location, just copied to the destination location.

COPY PRESET from MROM1

009

3 pad: Dreamer

All the Sound Navigator features work when using the

Copy functions.

To Copy a Preset:

1.

Select the Preset

you want to copy information

into

.

2.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Select

“Copy Preset from”

using the data entry control.

Select the preset

you want to copy using the data entry control. The

ROM Bank, Preset Number, Bank Number, Category and Preset Name fields are all selectable.

Press the

Home/Enter

button.

A warning appears asking you to confirm once more. Press the

Home/

Enter

button to copy the selected preset into the current location.

Copy Layer

The Copy Layer command lets you copy any layer information from one preset into any layer of the current preset location. The layer information in the source location (the layer location from which you want to copy) is not deleted from the original location, just copied to the destination location.

COPY LAYER User

L1 -> L4

020

1

Source Preset

188

E-MU Systems

Save/Copy Menu

Copying Information

Copy PatchCords

To Copy a Layer:

1.

Select the Preset and Layer

you want to copy information

into

.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display.

Select the preset location

using the data entry control, of the preset containing the information you want to copy into the current preset.

Move the cursor to the top line in the display.

Select the layer

of the source preset in the first field on the right.

Select the destination layer

in the second field.

Press the

Home/Ent

er button.

The Copy Patch Cord command lets you copy the PatchCord settings from one layer of the preset location into the current layer of the current preset location. The preset information in the source location (the preset location from which you want to copy) is not deleted from the original location, just copied to the destination location.

COPY CORDS User

L1 -> L4

020

1

Source Preset

To Copy a PatchCord:

1.

2.

S

elect the Preset and Layer

you want to copy information

into

.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display.

Select the preset location

using the data entry control, of the preset containing the information you want to copy into the current preset.

Move the cursor to the top line in the display.

Select the layer

of the source preset in the first field on the right.

Select the

destination layer

in the second field.

Press the

Home/Enter

button.

MK-6 Operation Manual

189

Copy Preset

PatchCords

Save/Copy Menu

Copy Preset PatchCords

The Copy Preset PatchCord command lets you copy the preset patchcord settings from one preset location into the current preset location. The preset information in the source location (the preset location from which you want to copy) is not deleted from the original location, just copied to the destination location.

COPY PRESET CORDS User

020

1

Source Preset

To Copy a Preset PatchCord:

1.

2.

Select the Prese

t you want to copy information

into

.

Press the

Save/Cop

y menu button.

3.

4.

5.

Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display.

Select the prese

t containing the information you want to copy.

Press the

Home/Enter

button.

Copy Arpeggiator

Settings

This function lets you copy the Arpeggiator settings from any ROM or RAM preset location into the current RAM (User) preset.

COPY ARP SET from MROM1

052

0

syn: Syn Chaos

To Copy the Arpeggiator Settings:

1.

From the Main screen,

select the User Preset

you want to copy the Arp setting

into

.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

Move the cursor to any of the fields on the bottom line on the display.

Use the data entry control to

select the preset

you want to copy

from

.

Press

Enter

when you have made your selection.

The Enter LED is flashing indicating that MK-6 is waiting for your response.

The Arp Settings are copied into the current preset.

190

E-MU Systems

Save/Copy Menu

Copy Arpeggiator Pattern

Copy Arpeggiator

Pattern

This function lets you copy the Arpeggiator pattern from any ROM or RAM preset to any RAM (user) pattern.

COPY ARP PAT from MROM1

96

1

TRANCED

Copy

Preset Bank

To Copy the Arpeggiator Pattern:

1.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

2.

3.

4.

Move the cursor to any of the fields on the bottom line on the display.

Use the data entry control to

select the preset

you want to copy

from

.

Press

Enter

when you have made your selection.

Overwrite pattern:

00

0

No Control

5.

Press

Enter

. The Arp Pattern is copied into the selected User Pattern.

The Copy Preset Bank command lets you copy an entire bank from any

ROM or RAM bank location to any RAM (user) bank. This function can be especially useful after installing a new sound SIMM.

COPY BANK

From: MROM1

2

To: User

1

ROM or RAM

Preset Location

Bank No.

Destination

Bank No.

To Copy a Preset Bank:

1.

2.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

Move the cursor to the

“From”

field on the bottom line on the display.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Use the data entry control to

select the preset bank

you want to copy

from

.

Move the cursor to the

“To”

field on the bottom line on the display.

Use the data entry control to

select the User preset

bank you want to copy

into

.

Press the

Home/Enter

button to overwrite the bank.

MK-6 Operation Manual

191

Save/Copy Menu

Copy Preset Bank

Sound

Authoring

Copy User Bank to Flash

This is a special purpose function to be used with the Flash sound authoring feature. Flash Sound SIMMs created on an EOS Ultra sampler can be used as a custom MK-6 bank. Presets are then created in a User bank.

When the bank of presets is finished, it can be copied, using this function, to the Flash SIMM. Flash SIMMs contain two separate memory locations.

One of these memories contains the sound samples and the other memory can hold four banks of 128 presets.

For instructions on how to remove and replace ROM SIMMs,

please see “Installing Sound SIMMs” on page 238

.

The four sound SIMM sockets in MK-6 are marked 0-3.

The destination

Flash SIMM must be placed in SIMM socket 1.

COPY USER BANK TO FLASH

From: User

0

To: Flash

2

_

If there is no Flash SIMM in the unit, the error message,

“Requires Flash SIMM” will be displayed.

To Copy a User Bank to Flash:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Make sure a Flash SIMM is inserted into the extra MK-6 SIMM socket.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

Rotate the data entry control to select the

“Copy User Bank”

function shown above.

Move the cursor to the

“From”

field and select the User bank that you want to copy to the Flash SIMM.

Move the cursor to the

“To”

field and select the Flash bank that you want to contain the User bank.

Press

Enter

. The Enter LED will flash and the screen below appears.

Press ENTER to Overwrite

Flash SIMM Presets

7.

Press

Enter

again to confirm. The following screen appears:

COPYING USER BANK TO FLASH

Done. Please Reboot Now.

8.

The Flash presets cannot be used until MK-6 is rebooted (power off then on).

Reboot

the MK-6 and verify that the new Flash bank has been properly copied.

192

E-MU Systems

Save/Copy Menu

Rename Flash SIMM

Rename Flash SIMM

This utility allows you to rename the Flash SIMM and change its ID number. Flash SIMMs can have any five letter name you choose. Each Flash

SIMM in a MK-6 unit must have a unique ID number (106-119).

The field in the upper right corner selects between multiple Flash SIMMs. If only one Flash SIMM is installed, the field cannot be modified.

The Flash ID is the MSB of the MIDI Bank Select command used to select the

Sound Bank.

RENAME FLASH SIMM Flash

New Name: Drums ID: 110

_

If there is no Flash SIMM in the unit, the error message,

“Requires Flash SIMM” will be displayed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Make sure a Flash SIMM is inserted in a MK-6 SIMM socket.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

Rotate the data entry control to select the “Rename Flash SIMM” function shown above.

Move the cursor to the

“New Name”

field and rename the SIMM using the data entry control to select the letter and the cursor keys to select the position.

Set the Sound ID number

for the SIMM. It doesn’t matter which number you choose as long as the same number isn’t used in another

SIMM.

Press

Enter

. The following screen appears and the Enter LED will be flashing.

Press ENTER to Update

Flash SIMM data

7.

Press

Enter

again to confirm or any other button to abort. The following screen appears:

CHANGING SIMM NAME & ID

(takes about 2 minutes)

8.

The Flash presets cannot be used until MK-6 is rebooted (power off then on).

Reboot

the MK-6 and verify that the new Flash bank has been properly renamed.

MK-6 Operation Manual

193

Save/Copy Menu

Duplicate Flash

Duplicate Flash

This utility allows you to duplicate Flash SIMMs using MK-6. Both Sound and Preset data is copied when a Flash SIMM is duplicated. A factory sound

SIMM cannot be copied using this utility.

The SIMM sockets are marked 0, 1, 2, 3. The Flash SIMM you want to copy

MUST be placed into SIMM Socket 0. The destination Flash SIMM must be

placed in SIMM socket 1. See “Installing Sound SIMMs” on page 238.

DUPLICATE SLOT 0 FLASH

Start

_

If there are no Flash

SIMMs in the unit, or if the

SIMMs are in the wrong slots, an error message will be displayed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Make sure the two Flash SIMM are located in the required SIMM sockets.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

Rotate the data entry control to select the

“Duplicate Flash SIMM”

screen shown above.

Move the cursor

to the bottom line and press

Enter

. The following screen appears and the Enter LED will be flashing.

Press ENTER to overwrite the Flash SIMM in Slot 1

5.

Press

Enter

again to confirm or any other button to abort. The following screen appears and the SIMM is copied.

DUPLICATING SLOT 0 -> SLOT 1

(Takes about 5 minutes)

6.

When MK-6 has finished duplicating the SIMM, turn power off, remove the copied SIMM, then

reboot

. That’s it!

194

E-MU Systems

Save/Copy Menu

Sound Authoring

Create Random

Preset

This is a great feature which creates a new preset using portions of the ROM presets as source material. By merging random presets, really great sounding presets can be generated with ease. Use this feature to generate wild new sounds, get new programming ideas or just for fun.

RANDOMIZE PRESET User

000

0

Any User Preset

Examine interesting presets to learn how they work using the Edit menu.

To Create a Random Preset:

1.

Press the

Save/Copy

menu button.

2.

3.

4.

Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display and press

Enter

.

A new random preset will be created.

Don’t like the sound? Press

Enter

again and a new random sound will be generated.

MK-6 Operation Manual

195

196

E-MU Systems

Save/Copy Menu

Create Random Preset

Preset Programming

There is so much you can do with the MK-6 it would be impossible to describe it all. This chapter is will give you a few ideas for programming your own custom sounds and contains step-by-step instructions to help you get started. In order to get the most from this chapter, we recommend you actually try each example.

Editing Presets

One of the easiest ways to make a new preset is to edit an existing preset.

This is also an excellent way of becoming familiar with MK-6. If you don’t like what you hear, simply select a new preset, then MK-6 reverts to the original sound. Changes are not permanent until you Save them (see

“Saving a Preset” on page 187).

Let’s experiment and modify a few parameters of an existing preset. We’ll start with functions that have an obvious effect on the sound: Instrument

Select, Tuning, and Chorus.

Changing the

Instrument

O

The

Preset Edit Jump

Buttons

are located in the

“Command Functions” section of the front panel.

Changing the instrument is the easiest and most dramatic way to modify an existing preset.

To Change the Instrument for the Current Layer:

1.

Choose any cool preset, then press the

Preset Edit

button.

2.

Press the

#1 Jump button

twice to jump directly to the Instrument

page.

See “Preset Menu Jump Keys” on page 36.

L1

INSTRUMENT ROM:MROM1

0320 str:RapOrchRiff

3.

4.

5.

Move the

cursor

down to the bottom line (using a Cursor button).

Use the

Channel

button to turn select the various layers. Use the

data entry control

to turn

OFF

all layers except

L1.

This allows you to hear the different instruments by themselves.

Play the keyboard

as you scroll through the various instruments.

MK-6 Operation Manual

197

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

To Change the Instrument for any Layer in the Preset:

6.

Use the

Channel Select

buttons to select another layer.

L2

INSTRUMENT ROM:MROM1

0321 str:Heartbreaker

7.

8.

Find another instrument that sounds good when combined with the previous instrument selected.

Repeat steps 6 and 7 if you want to add additional layers (although two layers will be enough for these experiments).

Now let’s play with the tuning.

Changing the Tuning of an Instrument

Tuning the selected layer of the preset changes the pitch of the key on the controller. If the numbers are “00,” it means that the instruments are tuned to concert pitch (A=440 Hz). The Coarse tuning value represents whole semitone intervals. The Fine tuning value shifts the pitch in 1/64 semitones

(or 1.56 cents).

To Tune the Instrument of the Current Layer:

1.

Press the

#3 Jump button

twice to jump directly to

Tuning

page.

L1

TUNING

Coarse: +36 Fine: +6

2.

3.

Move the cursor to the

Coarse

field (using the cursor button).

Set the value to +12

to shift the pitch up a whole octave. To shift the pitch in smaller units than a semitone,

use the Fine field

.

Try tuning one of the instruments to a perfect fifth above the other by setting the Coarse value to +7.

Tuning an instrument far out of its normal range completely changes the character of the sound. For example, if you tune a bass guitar up 2 octaves, it's going to sound rather petite. On the other hand, if you tune it down 2 octaves, you can probably rattle plaster off the walls! Experiment with radical pitch shifting. You'll be surprised at the results.

198

E-MU Systems

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

Chorus

This is an easy one. Chorus works by doubling the instruments and detuning them slightly. The larger the chorus value, the more detuning occurs. The Width parameter controls the stereo spread. A Width value of

0% reduces the chorus to mono, a value of 100% provides the most stereo separation. Chorus is useful when you want to “fatten up” a part quickly and easily.

_

WARNING

: Since it works by doubling the instruments, Chorusing halves the number of notes you can play on MK-6.

To Chorus a Layer:

1.

Press the

#5 Jump button

to jump directly to the Chorus page.

2.

Use the

cursor buttons

to advance the cursor to the Chorus field (the first field in the bottom line of the display). Use the

data entry control

to turn on chorus.

L1

CHORUS WIDTH

off 100%

Volume Envelope

3.

Select a Width value

based on the amount of detuning you want.

Smaller numbers mean less detuning, larger ones more.

You can select various amounts of chorusing for each of the instruments, just play around with the Chorus and Width parameter until you like what you hear.

Every sound you hear, whether it’s a piano note, a drum, or a bell, has a characteristic volume curve or envelope. This Volume Envelope shapes the volume of the sound which grows louder or softer in various ways during the course of the sound. The volume envelope of a sound is one of the clues our brain uses to determine what type of sound is being produced.

An envelope shapes the sound or volume of the sound over time. The envelope generators in MK-6 all have six stages to the contour: Attack 1,

Attack 2, Decay 1, Decay 2, Release 1 and Release 2. When you press a key on the keyboard, the envelope goes through each of the first four stages, advancing to the next stage when the defined Level for each is reached. As long as you continue to hold the key down, the envelope continues through the first four stages holding at the end of the Decay 2 level until the key is released. When you release the key, the envelope jumps to the

Release stages (no matter where the envelope is when you release the key) ending at the Release 2 level.

MK-6 Operation Manual

199

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

Piano

Organ

Strings

Percussion

Dcy1

Atk2

Dcy2

Rls1

level

Atk1

Sustain

Rls2

time

Key Down Key Released

Every instrument in MK-6 has it's own predetermined volume envelope which is used when the Volume Envelope parameter is set to “factory.” By setting the Volume Envelope to “time-based” or “tempo-based,” we can reshape the instrument's natural volume envelope any way we want. By reshaping the volume envelope of a instrument, you can dramatically change the way the sound is perceived. For example, you can make

“bowed” pianos or backward gongs. The diagrams to the left show the characteristic volume envelopes of a few common sounds.

In preparation for this experiment choose almost any of the standard organ presets which sustain as long as the key is held down. Go to the Instrument page and set it to “None” on all layers except Layer 1. Now you’re ready to play with the Volume Envelope.

Adjusting the Volume Envelope (the easy way):

Many sounds don’t require a complex six-segment envelope. Over the years, a simpler Attack-Decay-Sustain-Release envelope, or ADSR, have become standard. The front panel controller knobs on MK-6 have been preprogrammed to adjust these four volume envelope parameters. A diagram of this standard ADSR envelope is shown below.

Decay

Attack

Release

Sustain

Level

level me

Key Down Key Released

1.

2.

Front panel knobs E-H are routed to the volume envelope parameters.

This is the easiest way to change the volume envelope settings.

Press the front panel Controller button E-H to select: Amp Attack, Amp

Decay, Amp Sustain, Amp Release.

200

E-MU Systems

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

3.

4.

5.

Increase the Amp Attack knob and play a note. The attack controls the time it takes for the sound to reach the Attack level when a key is pressed and held.

Increase the Amp Release knob. Note the effect as you release the key.

The Release stages controls the time it takes for the sound to die away when a note is released.

Try out the Sustain & Release knobs. The Sustain knob control the volume LEVEL after the Decay phase has finished and while the key continues to be held. As soon as you release the key, the Release phase begins.

To Create a Complex Volume Envelope:

1.

Go to the

Volume Envelope

mode screen, by pressing the “Amp” jump button twice, and set the Volume Envelope mode to “time-based.”

L1

VOLUME ENVELOPE

Mode: time-based

Front panel knobs 5-8 are routed to the volume envelope parameters and thus affect the settings. You may want to disconnect the

PatchCords to gain total control of the envelope parameters.

(Alternately, you can create a completely blank preset and start from there.)

2.

Now move on to the next screen to set the Volume Envelope parameters.

L1

VOL ENV TIME LEVEL

Attack 1 50 100%

3.

4.

5.

Increase the Attack 1 time value and play a note. The attack controls the time it takes for the sound to reach the Attack level when a key is pressed and held.

Move the cursor to the first field in the bottom line and use the cursor buttons to advance to the Release pages.

Increase the Release 1 and 2 times. Note the effect as you release the key on the controller. The Release stages controls the time it takes for the sound to die away when a note is released.

To Setup the Volume Envelope as an ADSR:

The classic synthesizer ADSR (Attack-Decay-Sustain-Release) envelope is easy to create using the MK-6 six segment envelope generators. The trick is to only use segments: Attack1, Decay2, and Release1.

1.

2.

Set Atk1, Atk2 & Dcy1 levels to 100.

Set Rls1 & Rls2 levels to 0.

MK-6 Operation Manual

201

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

3.

4.

Set Atk2, Dcy1 and Rls2 rates to 0.

Program the Atk1, Dcy2 and Rls1 segments as you wish. Decay 2 level is your Sustain level.

Atk1

Dcy2

Used

Atk1

Dcy2

Rls1

Rls1

Unused

Atk2

Dcy1

Rls2

Sustain

Level

level time

Key

Down

Key

Released

Working with Filters

The filters make it possible to remove certain components of the sound. A low pass filter removes the high frequency components or put another way, it “lets the low frequencies pass.” A high-pass filter removes the low frequency components from the sound letting only the high frequencies

pass. See “MK-6 Filter Types” on page 148 for a complete list of MK-6’s

filters and their descriptions.

In preparation for the next tutorial, set up the MK-6 with a single instrument layer on Layer 1.

1.

1.

Go to the Instrument screen (Preset Edit menu) and select

Instrument

#434 - Wave Cutter

. This is a harmonically rich sound. Since filters work by removing or accentuating certain frequencies, we want to make sure that we have a lot of frequencies to start with.

Advance to the Filter Type screen using the data entry control. Select the

Classic 4th order filter

.

L1

FILTER Ord Type

Classic 4 LPF

Front panel knobs A & B are routed to the filter parameters and will affect the initial settings made here.

1.

2.

The Filter Frequency and Q (resonance) are preprogrammed to the front panel controller knobs A & B. This is the easiest way to change the volume envelope settings.

Press the front panel

Controller button A-D

to select controls A-D

The Frequency parameter determines the filter cutoff frequency or the frequency the filter uses as the highest frequency allowed to pass. If you play the keyboard now, you should hear the raw sound. Slowly decrease the filter cutoff frequency value as you play the keyboard. The sound

202

E-MU Systems

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

gets more and more dull as you remove more and more high frequencies from the sound. At some point, the sound completely disappears. (You have filtered out everything.) The chart on the following page illustrates what you just did.

100

80

60

40

20

Cutoff Frequency

Output of Filter

40 80 160 360 720 1440 2880 ...

Frequency

3.

4.

Turn the filter back up to full, then

adjust the Q

.

Set the Q about halfway up, then adjust the

Cutoff

as you play the keyboard. As you change the Cutoff, notice that the sound now has a sharp, nasal quality. A high Q boosts or amplifies the frequencies at the cutoff frequency (Fc).

Adding the Filter Envelope

Now let's modulate the Filter Frequency with the Filter Envelope. The Filter

Envelope is a device that can automatically change the filter frequency during the course of the note. Before we define the Filter Envelope, we need to patch the Filter Envelope to the Filter Frequency.

To Setup the Filter Envelope:

1.

Go to the

PatchCord

screen by pressing the

Cords

Jump Key.

L1

PATCHCORD #03

FiltEnv+ -> FiltFreq +100

2.

3.

Move the

cursor

to

PatchCord #3

. This patchcord is preprogrammed to connect the Filter Envelope to Filter Cutoff Frequency.

Move the

cursor

to the last field in the lower line. This is the

Amount

field. The Amount field determines the amount of modulation applied.

Set this value to

+100

.

MK-6 Operation Manual

203

204

E-MU Systems

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

L1

PATCHCORD #01

FiltEnv+ -> FiltFreq +100

This setup connects the Filter Envelope Generator to the Filter Cutoff as shown in the following diagram.

R

Instrument

Fc

Filter

Q

DCA Pan

L

Filter Env.

4.

5.

6.

On the front panel knob controllers, choose controls

A-D

.

Adjust

Filter Attack

and

Filter Release

knobs and note their effect on the sound.

Now, return to the

Filter Envelope Mode

screen. Set the Mode to

“time-based.”

L1

FILTER ENVELOPE

Mode: time-based

7.

Advance to the

Filter Envelope

parameter page.

L1

FILT ENV RATE LEVEL

Attack1 50 100%

8.

Move the cursor underneath the

time field

and change the value to about +50. Now when you press a key the filter slowly sweeps up.

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

L1

FILT ENV RATE LEVEL

Attack1 50 +88%

9.

10.

Change the

attack rate

and note the change in the sound.

Set the envelope parameters as shown in the following table.

Envelope Phase

Attack 1

Attack 2

Decay 1

Decay 2

Release 1

Release 2

Time

40

65

80

25

97

73

Level %

65

100

85

50

20

0

With the above setup, the filter sweeps up, then Decays back down to the Decay 2 Level until you release the key. Then it sweeps down at the

Release rates. Play with the envelope parameters for awhile to get a feel for their function. (If you're having trouble understanding the Envelope

Generators, please refer to the Programming Basics section in this manual.)

Changing Filter Types

Go back to the Filter Type screen shown below and move the cursor down the lower line of the display. Change the filter type while playing the keyboard. There are 50 different filter types.

L1

FILTER Ord Type

Aah-Ay-Eeh 6 VOW

These filters are extremely powerful and have been carefully crafted to offer maximum flexibility and musical control. You may want to change the

Envelope (PatchCord) Amount, Q and/or the Filter Frequency to get the right sound for each filter and instrument. These three controls, coupled with the Filter Envelope, are perhaps the most important controls on any synthesizer. Take the time to learn how they interact with each other and you will be able to create sounds beyond imagination.

MK-6 Operation Manual

205

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

Envelope Repeat

The Envelope Generator can also be made to repeat. When the envelope repeat function is On, the Attack (1&2) and Decay (1&2) stages will continue to repeat as long as the key is held.

To Make the Filter Envelope Repeat:

1.

2.

Go to the Filter Envelope

Mode

screen shown below.

Move the

cursor

to the Mode field.

L1

FILTER ENVELOPE

Mode: time-based

3.

Turn the

data entry control

clockwise. The Mode field will change to

Repeat as shown below.

L1

FILTER ENVELOPE

Repeat: on

4.

5.

6.

Move the

cursor

to the on/off field and turn

Envelope Repeat On

.

Play a key

on the keyboard. You should now hear the envelope repeating.

Go back to the envelope parameter page and

adjust the Attack 1&2

, and Decay 1&2 parameters. The repeating envelope cycles through these four stages as long as the key is held.

Practice Modulating

Try modulating the pitch with the Filter Envelope generator.

Use Velocity to modulate the Filter Envelope PatchCord or the Filter

Frequency. This brightens the sound as you play harder.

Program the LFO to modulate Filter Frequency and Volume (Patch-

Cord screen).

Modulate the LFO with the other LFO, with Velocity, and with the

Pitch Wheel.

Examine the Factory presets to learn how they’re constructed. There are lots of cool synthesis tricks you can use in your own presets.

We’ve programmed the front panel knobs our way, but since they’re completely programmable there’s no reason why you can’t create your own custom controls.

Think of ten exotic modulation routings, then try them out.

Experimentation is the key to learning how to control MK-6.

206

E-MU Systems

Troubleshooting

Preset Programming

Editing Presets

A common source of confusion when working with the filter envelope is that the Attack or Release parameters might not seem to be working correctly. If you are not getting the expected result, try to analyze the situation. There will be many times when you will have to stop for a minute and think, “What am I trying to do and why isn't it working?”

When this happens (and it will), don't panic. Troubleshooting is a normal part of the synthesis process. Simply examine the various parameters and try to be as analytical as possible as you solve the problem. The solution is usually simple. (“The filter is already wide open and can't open any more.” or “Another PatchCord is connecting something to the parameter and affecting it.”) Learning to play any instrument takes a little patience and practice.

Referring to the diagram below which shows the MK-6 signal flow, notice that the DCA comes after the Filter. The DCA controls the final volume of the sound, so if the filter's release is longer than the release for the DCA, you won't hear it, because the DCA has already shut off the sound.

R

Instrument

Z-Plane

Filter

DCA Pan

L

You’re getting the general idea by now. Remember not to select a new preset before saving the current one or all your changes will be lost (the preset reverts to the last saved version). If you want to save your creation, select the Save/Copy menu and select a destination preset location for your masterpiece, then press Enter.

Because you can save your work, it’s worth spending time to get the sound just right. When designing sounds you become an instrument builder as well as a musician. With MK-6 you can design the custom radical instruments you’ve always wanted!

MK-6 Operation Manual

207

Preset Programming

Linking Presets

Linking

Presets

Using the Link pages in the Edit menu is a quick and easy way to create new sounds. Use the Links to “layer” presets and to “split” a keyboard into sections containing different sounds.

O

See “Preset Links” on page 170 for more information.

To Layer Two Presets:

1.

2.

Select the first preset you want to layer.

Press the

Preset Edit

button.

3.

Go to the

Link

screen by pressing the

Links

Jump Key.

LINK 1 PRESET MROM1

off

4.

5.

Move the cursor to the second line of the display. Select the preset you want to link with the preset you selected in step 1. Play the keyboard as you scroll through the various presets to hear the results.

If you want the link to be a permanent part of the preset, be sure to save the preset. Otherwise, simply change the preset to erase your work.

To Create a Split Keyboard Using Links:

1.

2.

Follow steps 1 through 4 above.

Press

Enter

and use the

Jump Key

to advance to the next page.

LINK 1 KEY VEL

RANGE C-2 B4 000 127

3.

4.

Set the keyboard range of the linked preset as desired.

Press

Enter

and use the

data entry control

to go to the Key Range page using the

Ranges

jump key.

L1 KEY:LO FADE HIGH FADE

C5 000 G8 000

5.

Set the range of the original preset so it fills the remaining keyboard area.

Save the preset.

208

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Front Panel

Knob

Functions

This section provides some of the more technical information about MK-6.

In this appendix, you will find information about velocity curves, MIDI commands and PatchCord charts.

The front panel knob functions are standardized for most of the factory presets. The typical functions of the controller knobs are described below.

Match the controller knobs on an external MIDI controller to the Realtime

Controller Assignments in the Controllers menu if you want to externally control these functions.

MK-6 Operation Manual

209

Appendix

Front Panel Knob Functions

Knob Controller

Descriptions

The Front Panel Knobs can be reprogrammed for each preset and stored in any of the

User Presets. The functions shown here are the factory programmed settings.

Filter Cutoff

............... Filter Frequency

Filter Q

....................... Filter Resonance

Filter Attack

................ Filter Envelope Attack Rate

Filter Decay

................ Filter Envelope Decay and Release Rate

Amp Attack

................ Volume Envelope Attack Rate

Amp Decay

................. Volume Envelope Decay Rate

Amp Sustain

............... Volume Envelope Sustain Level

Amp Release

.............. Volume Envelope Release Rate

Velocity -> Amp

.......... Key Velocity to Volume

Velocity -> Filter

......... Key Velocity to Filter Frequency

LFO 2 Amount

............ LFO 2 Amount

LFO 2 Rate

.................. LFO 2 Frequency

Mod 1

......................... FX Send A (bts:preset = Beats Busy)

Mod 2

......................... FX Send B (bts:preset = Beats Variation)

Arp Velocity

................ Scales the Velocity values of arpeggiated notes

Arp Gate

..................... Varies the arpeggiator Gate Time

210

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Preset Listing

Preset Listing

User Bank 0, MK-6 Bank 4

0.

1.

bts:Plinky bts:TellUSumptin

43.

44.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

bts:Sensitive bts:Only Paper bts:Litey Luv arp:C1 LatchGruv key:RodeWarrior str:Harp+String led:SoExpressive bas:Monoical gtr:U & I syn:Invitation hit:LovePad

45.

46.

47.

48.

49.

50.

51.

52.

53.

54.

55.

PITCH WHEEL

Select preset kit:Platinum

Move the Pitch Wheel in either direction. The Pitch Wheel is usually assigned to pitch, but here it controls envelope retrigger, creating machinegun rolls, etc.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

pad:Aaart Vox kit:WheelO'Fuzz sfx:Mytummyhertz bts:Creekside bts:Po! Noe bts:HeartBroken bts:Uptown bts:Dirt Bag

56.

57.

58.

59.

60.

61.

62.

63.

21.

22.

23.

24.

bts:KandyRappR bts:Her Echo bts:ShagNastee bts:Mello Lady

64.

65.

66.

67.

25.

26.

27.

28.

bts:DeepFried bts:Fan Tu C bts:ParlorOrgan bts:So'Wut

68.

69.

70.

71.

29.

30.

31.

32.

bts:KnoWudIMean?

bts:E-MU Class bts:Sandcastle bts:So'

72.

73.

74.

75.

33.

34.

35.

36.

bts:NoT awrite bts:Mad MP bts:BackInTheDay bts:Rodeo

76.

77.

78.

79.

37.

38.

39.

40.

bts:GritzKeyd bts:?:) bts:Yup bts:Sic Yo

80.

81.

82.

83.

41.

42.

bts:Circulatin' bts:Qic Lee

84.

bts:NoDogFights bts:Perc Jam bts:Mo n' Mo bts:SheikFunk bts:QicTasy bts:MikroSize bts:ToTheRToTheB bts:LeadR Phatt bts:Oo! Noe bts:Next Stop bts:Laid&Back bts:Les Gooo arp:RUFillinDis?

arp:XTREMScratch arp:PluckMaster arp:BassAnnoyze arp:SynchroHorn arp:Penetrate arp:BellRinger arp:Big Beater arp:DirtyPianoze arp:RapPizzSeq arp:SkipRope arp:DaGranSlam!

arp:Pattern Mac arp:Ice Beep arp:Big GeetaR arp:Extasy EP arp:Seagul Hit arp:HipGHit arp:Qwik Cut key:Mutant Wheel key:OceanEP key:Synetics key:Org Maker key:CartoonOrgan key:Dirkey key:DiscontinYou key:Veracity key:PickOrgan key:Tough Keez key:Yulee

85.

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

91.

92.

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98.

99.

100.

101.

102.

103.

104.

105.

106.

107.

108.

109.

110.

111.

112.

113.

114.

115.

116.

117.

118.

119.

120.

121.

122.

123.

124.

125.

126.

127.

key:PleasuR bas:Talkie bas:BassBallz bas:Puncher syn:Synpatico syn:Cubix syn:PlooKing syn:Milano syn:InTheValley syn:WOOBLE syn:SHOO Fly syn:SAD soSad syn:Whappo syn:Dejour syn:SupozWeLisTn str:AngryStrings str:St Section str:GritUpright str:SAD...sad

str:Crazy String gtr:Adults Only!

gtr:Funk Likka gtr:70eez Mute gtr:Knock Gtr gtr:Guit Fall hit:AttackThis hit:OOOnnf hit:The Drop hit:WindChimeHit hit:Patrice hit:ThatsTheHorn led:Mod Bites pad:ChemTrails pad:Its A....?

vox:Base B vox:StarChoir vox:Uncy Mono sfx:BedSprings sfx:BeepKeep kit:Brikz hertz kit:NewPhidelity kit:Tru Spit kit:NewFunk

MK-6 Operation Manual

211

Appendix

Preset Listing

Preset Listing

PRESET NOTES

102-0 Str:Pizz&Sct MW

Move the Mod. Wheel as you play and notice the legato section sound added to the pizz section.

125-0 Prc:Fill Me

The Mod. Wheel repeats the scratch.

The Controller N knob brings in three separate new parts to the fill.

User Bank 1, MK-6 Bank 0

0.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

kit:Becky Boise kit:Platinum kit:Reaper bas:SubLevel gtr:Wah Getarrs kit:Pun Chee key:Chords&Hits

6.

7.

8.

pad:Spirit Call str:GothStrings

9.

brs:"Pow"

10.

kit:The Mo'Pho'

11.

kit:Hive Jiver

12.

syn:Plucky

13.

bas:Slap Pop

14.

gtr:Sexy Slider

15.

pad:Cherubs

16.

syn:Kutter

17.

vox:theWatcher

18.

key:SOOTCaSE'000

19.

led:Handwormed

20.

hit:PongPing

21.

str:Sincerely

22.

syn:Synelead

23.

syn:Prof Brass

24.

gtr:HardCore

25.

bpm:Clockworx 1

26.

gtr:General'sGtr

27.

syn:SycoGirL

28.

key:Klav Synth

29.

str:MadDramA \

30.

hit:All 1

31.

gtr:NyLonArP

32.

bas:Juice

33.

str:Harpo

34.

pad:Synthetic

35.

bas:YarsRevenge

36.

pad:Blades

37.

brs:SlapdatBrass

38.

key:VINYL 73

39.

key:FAR-FG-NUGEN

40.

syn:LadyOrgan1

41.

pad:QuietTime

42.

led:Hopeless

43.

gtr:Linky Fingaz

44.

str:Ooops!

45.

pad:Nitrogen

46.

str:Pizz Strings

47.

kit:YeaYeaZ

48.

arp:SupermanSaw

49.

key:Orgg Doggie

50.

syn:TinkerToyz

51.

pad:JP Layer

52.

gtr:BedofFire

53.

key:Phat Klav

54.

prc:PHATTrSnares

55.

kit:Betta Beata

56.

led:AllJackedUp!

57.

prc:Itchey

58.

syn:DeGlown

59.

syn:Magic Harp

60.

kit:MuSic2DrIvBy

61.

gtr:SyCoCry

62.

vox:All Talk

63.

bas:Digger Bass

64.

gtr:Heavy

65.

kit:Oh Yeah

66.

kit:Jelly Belly

67.

str:Old Movie

68.

kit:Cool Guy

69.

kit:FriscoLayer

70.

gtr:Dist Dull

71.

key:Stereo Labs

72.

led:Pothole

73.

syn:WePhattField

74.

syn:Ohoooo!

75.

sfx:MarsattaksII

76.

key:Sitar 88

77.

vox:Agony Agony

78.

vox:Voicyst

79.

sfx:BLABTAR

80.

bas:Reedy Thang

81.

amb:Underground

82.

bas:Rez Ripper

83.

pad:DeadMetal 1

84.

syn:Pan Coyote

85.

key:Piano Jam

86.

key:Tiny Wonders

87.

kit:Obsession

88.

kit:Regal Gate

89.

bas:Fretless

90.

sfx:Sick Girl

91.

sfx:KindaMuddy

92.

syn:SPICEBOY:-)

93.

gtr:Destruct

94.

str:Fade It

95.

hit:StrikezAgain

96.

syn:REWIND

97.

bas:Box O Bass

98.

bas:Poppy

99.

pad:OuterLimits

100.

str:FakingIt

101.

102.

103.

104.

105.

106.

107.

108.

109.

110.

111.

112.

113.

114.

115.

116.

117.

118.

119.

120.

121.

122.

123.

124.

125.

126.

127.

str:Section

str:Pizz&Sct MW

str:Nightmare syn:SoftStuff kit:10HiHatMode str:MistyStrng pad:StringLayer pad:HiQ Skwarez vox:FemmeDoTell prc:Kix 1 prc:Kix 2 prc:Snares 1 prc:Snares 2 prc:Snares 3 prc:Hats 1 prc:Hats 2 prc:Cymbals prc:CongasBongos prc:ClapsnSnaps prc:Toms prc:Bells prc:Claves amb:LiquidBatz prc:ShakeHerz

prc:Fill Me

prc:Misc led:I Saw Worms

212

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Preset Listing

Preset Listing

PRESET NOTES

107-1 Gtr:Chickn’Slide

108-1 Gtr:Exciteable

109-1 Gtr:Hen Drix

110-1 Gtr:Lik Delay

Move the Controller N knob while re-triggering notes to hear the start of the sample change. You can tailor the sound to taste with this knob.

User Bank 2, MK-6 Bank 1

0.

1.

syn:Alkalined syn:Auto Doom II

2.

3.

led:Touche pad:Darth Works

4.

5.

key:Harp Klav key:Tine Split

6.

7.

syn:VoxRoller prc:Rainstick

8.

9.

prc:WhirlyBird prc:Fills

10.

prc:MO STacT Snr

11.

prc:Scratches

12.

prc:SciFi Toy 1

13.

prc:SciFi Toy 2

14.

hit:SaddyFace

15.

gtr:Gener El

16.

hit:All 2

17.

prc:Thumb Piano

18.

prc:Per Oct

19.

prc:PerOctLink

20.

gtr:NylonFantasy

21.

brs:Crunchy

22.

syn:Swapy Brass

23.

bas:SubVocoder

24.

brs:Blowhard

25.

brs:Synth Brass

26.

kit:TribeOMatic

27.

bas:Standin

28.

str:Ballad Harp

29.

hit:Sucka Punch

30.

key:CityGiggin

31.

brs:Philta

32.

brs:Biggg

33.

gtr:WackaParty83

34.

gtr:WackaParty2

35.

gtr:Wacka 96

36.

gtr:Wacka 113

37.

gtr:Wacka 3 83

38.

key:Crunch Klav

39.

brs:Hitz

40.

bas:Sonic Sine

41.

vox:TB Eweew

42.

gtr:Cyclone

43.

sfx:DownTheDrain

44.

arp:PhiltaSweepa

45.

kit:09HiHatMode

46.

bas:SubSonicTri

47.

brs:Brass+Tine

48.

sfx:YaYaYa

49.

bas:Deeper

50.

bas:Acid

51.

bas:BelowaWoofer

52.

bas:GutPunched

53.

kit:WhatYouWant?

54.

bas:It Too

55.

brs:Lotsa

56.

bas:Fishy

57.

bas:SubOne

58.

sfx:Brain Rot

59.

bas:FuzzSubby

60.

bas:SubTwo

61.

bas:Pikes Pick

62.

bas:SubFour

63.

bas:SubFive

64.

bas:Pick-A-Sub

65.

bas:Phunky Slap

66.

bas:Homisquare

67.

bas:Crandle

68.

bas:Frogged

69.

bas:Babybass

70.

bas:Soulfuzz

71.

bas:Speakeasy

72.

bas:BellyButton

73.

bas:KeyOnate

74.

bas:Prophet

75.

bas:Persistent

76.

bas:Squared

77.

bas:TheoryBass

78.

bas:MarkOther

79.

bas:Analow

80.

bas:Funk Pop 2

81.

bas:Velo SlapPop

82.

bas:Funky Finger

83.

bas:Funky Pik

84.

bas:Funk Wave

85.

bas:Accidental

86.

bas:Finger Bass

87.

bas:Bagg

88.

bas:Distroy

89.

bas:Blip

90.

bas:Hecho Itter

91.

bas:Dubby

92.

bas:Dubby 2

93.

bas:Grit

94.

bas:Dubby 3

95.

bas:Obeidoo It

96.

bas:Technoid

97.

bas:Akoostik

98.

bas:Plucky

99.

bas:Harpbass

100.

101.

102.

103.

bas:Upright gtr:Crybabe 1 gtr:Chop Drone gtr:Wacka Talkin

104.

105.

106.

107.

108.

109.

110.

111.

112.

113.

114.

115.

116.

117.

118.

119.

120.

121.

122.

123.

124.

125.

126.

127.

gtr:Wacka Do gtr:Chickn'1 gtr:Chickn'Dist

gtr:Chickn'Slide gtr:Exciteable gtr:Hen Drix gtr:Lik Delay

gtr:Lik Choppy gtr:Wackaloo gtr:Willpy gtr:Odlil gtr:YeWah gtr:Wah DisLik gtr:Wah Not gtr:Wah Scale 4 gtr:Wah Scale 7 gtr:Wah Upper gtr:SpRinkel hit:Blue Note syn:WapperFuzz syn:Slippery gtr:DirtyNoter kit:HappY'Z str:Uni Strings

MK-6 Operation Manual

213

Appendix

Preset Listing

Preset Listing

PRESET NOTES

034-2 Vox:All Female

035-2 Vox:All Male

Try moving the Mod Wheel and notice that a presence filter is introduced to give the vocals a high-end sizzle. Move the FC knob (A) in conjunction for some interesting EQ settings.

038-2 Key:RoBotRhodes

056-2 Key:SYCO KOOL

063-2 Key:DEEPrTHaN?8

Watch your ears!

Fc transforms everything!

000-2 Gtr:Wah Walker

122-2 ScratchMatic

Move the Mod Wheel while holding a note. The note repeats!

User Bank 3, MK-6 Bank 2

0.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

gtr:Wah Walker syn:Sin Symph 1 gtr:Mood gtr:Nylon gtr:Nylon 2 gtr:Slide Hit gtr:Fine Slide gtr:Grit Slide

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

gtr:Strata gtr:Strum Glass gtr:Flange Pick gtr:Grunge

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

syn:Cutting Thru gtr:Slo Strum gtr:Kraked Tube gtr:Burnt vox:Skylab gtr:Slicer gtr:Dissed Hit gtr:Doom 1

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

35.

36.

37.

38.

39.

40.

41.

42.

pad:Drone 1 pad:Drone 2 pad:Drone Swirl str:Ensemble 1 key:Frittering hit:Guit n Hat hit:Satisfying hit:Org Creept led:Deep Thought led:70's Lead led:Guitlet syn:Synthomatic pad:Transform key:Syco vox 88

vox:All Female vox:All Male

gtr:Dev Bitter key:So Kazual

key:RoBotRhodes

bas:DropOffSine1 bas:DropOffSine2 key:Org Basic key:Klav Mav

43.

44.

45.

46.

47.

48.

49.

50.

51.

52.

53.

54.

55.

56.

57.

58.

59.

60.

61.

62.

63.

64.

65.

66.

67.

68.

69.

70.

71.

72.

73.

74.

75.

76.

77.

78.

79.

80.

81.

82.

83.

84.

85.

syn:ReturnToZoo str:Disco Diva pad:DanceLitez gtr:Weeoww led:RaveEEEE led:RaveAAHH pad:AditivOrgan pad:Trans pad:Narwhal str:Mondostring kit:WideOne kit:ThugItUp kit:OnDaStreet

key:SYCO KOOL

pad:KnobbyTwirly kit:PhilterFreak kit:Nu Funk kit:Relapse kit:HardStep rom:Play Thru key:DEEPrTHaN?8

hit:Knock U Out hit:Nice Under hit:Splash str:Suspence key:Growl Drop key:HarpsiFlange str:HybridSweep key:Kool Kord key:Org Roll key:Perk Organ str:Synth String key:Horror Glide brs:Caliente brs:Trump Slide led:FantasyWormz led:Asthma Wheez led:Yearning led:Reeder led:Violetta led:Stevie sfx:Mr.Clean

sfx:Shield

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

91.

92.

93.

sfx:Syclear sfx:GoDzilaVsEmu vox:Ahyeeyah pad:Pulsar hit:Carney Hits hit:Brazit 1 hit:Brazit 2 hit:Brazit 3

94.

95.

96.

97.

hit:Multiphase hit:Brazit 4 hit:Spizy pad:Worry

98.

99.

100.

101.

str:Orchestsyn syn:Grinder syn:Weeperr amb:Seascape

102.

103.

104.

105.

106.

107.

108.

109.

110.

111.

112.

113.

114.

115.

116.

117.

118.

119.

120.

121.

122.

123.

124.

125.

126.

127.

sfx:Wet Trippy syn:Two Step syn:Prosync kit:Mo Dist kit:Slappy kit:DarkFlower kit:Funk 4 Life kit:Perky kit:Crunch kit:Klippy kit:GM Two kit:SubwayTunnel kit:ClasikStudio kit:Tracer gtr:Vinylist kit:Vilper kit:DubItUp kit:NewBeat kit:CornaSto' sfx:BlowinUp1MW prc:ScratchMatic kit:Construction kit:NuMetal bas:Cube Bass bas:Iggio Basso syn:Objections

214

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Preset Listing

Preset Listing

PRESET NOTES

051-3 Str:VIRGOE

Play the sound then move the

FC knob all the way to the right and notice how the sound completely transforms from a string section to a distorted bass tone.

040-3 Key:Pretteeee

045-3 Key:MO 88

048-3 Gtr:Gen X

050-3 Key:Pretteeee

056-3 Key:StoneGroove

057-3 Key:WaThunk

These presets change timbres significantly when the FC knob is turned.

MK-6 Bank 3

0.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

vox:Dronodians C kit:ItsUAgAIn?

kit:[email protected]&#!

prc:Randition prc:Ms.Alaneous

sfx:D'struCshunn kit:Final Fill str:StackedLegs

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

syn:FunkBut!

vox:SingingTB vox:La Robofemme kit:RiDe E-Z

12.

13.

kit:Doopy Dooy kit:Krazy Kit

14.

15.

kit:SalsA Crunk kit:Wobulator

16.

17.

kit:Lesster key:NoMoreKlav

18.

19.

gtr:Phasy Strat kit:A YO IIGHT

20.

21.

kit:GOOD MU Sic syn:Sin Symph 2

22.

23.

hit:Dancerail hit:BiggieOrch

24.

25.

kit:GuesWho'sBak pad:Siren Spin

26.

27.

vox:Pretteeee.II

syn:OsterVoxer C

28.

29.

rom:I Like U bas:Bo's Bass

30.

31.

kit:TiME SquaRe led:Replicant

32.

33.

syn:Synth Symph syn:Cutter Lead

34.

35.

hit:Moody gtr:Geet Pik

36.

37.

str:Sa-Spen Ful key:Perc Klav

38.

39.

key:SiMPeL sfx:theHitcher

40.

41.

key:Pretteeee..

.

led:DARKLEAD

42.

amb:CosmicKlasik

43.

44.

syn:WAWIFLHEAD vox:Voxcade

45.

46.

key:MO 88

key:Piano Blip

47.

48.

syn:After Pluck key:Doodee

49.

50.

gtr:Gen X key:KeyStonE

51.

52.

str:VIRGOE

syn:Buchla Boy

53.

54.

arp:AgonyOrgon syn:Dreemy

55.

56.

key:MO'E DAN

key:StoneGroove

57.

58.

key:WaThunk

syn:CountryTalk

59.

60.

gtr:SprinkleItOn kit:EasyRider

61.

62.

led:KritterChiff kit:Stoopit

63.

64.

syn:SilkWerm syn:LadyOrgan2

65.

66.

hit:Houseping brs:Brashit

67.

68.

kit:Young Luv pad:TheMadSweep

69.

70.

kit:Woo Kid pad:JoVox

71.

72.

bas:Razza led:RaveLine

73.

74.

led:SineWorm led:ProphetLine

75.

76.

led:Worm4th led:Wheezy

77.

78.

led:Homie pad:OB Layer

79.

80.

amb:VocodAhhh...

key:PhatttTines

81.

82.

sfx:JedImindtrik syn:Whisle Heave

83.

84.

key:FuTureRHodes syn:PowerTool

85.

pad:Luxury

86.

87.

led:Glue Tone kit:MarchMadnezZ

88.

89.

key:Tine Fuzzies gtr:Voyeur Trax

90.

91.

syn:BLASTO bas:Melophase

92.

93.

key:IntoTheLight gtr:Psycho

94.

95.

kit:7 HiHatMode key:Touch Klav

96.

97.

hit:Evil 8bit kit:WhatUstarted

98.

99.

kit:BabyDoll kit:Lo Kit

100.

led:Play Day

101.

kit:U NO

102.

prc:Hummer thumb

103.

kit:My Main Man

104.

vox:Releaser$

105.

scr:ItPlat Num

106.

arp:Nefarious

107.

prc:HiHatMono 1

108.

prc:HiHatMono 2

109.

key:Skini Klav

110.

prc:Bells Mono

111.

key:HipHopTines1

112.

key:HipHopTines2

113.

led:Reedy Leed

114.

led:Screamer

115.

led:MonoBrass

116.

pad:Chasers MW

117.

key:TremblRODES

118.

pad:MeltingHartz

119.

arp:Low&Square

120.

sfx:Tin Man

121.

str:Pitzy Pluck

122.

led:Slo Sex

123.

key:Love Phase

124.

key:NerveOrgan

125.

key:ReBeckTines

126.

key:Mutten Org

127.

:Default v1.0

MK-6 Operation Manual

215

Appendix

Preset Application Notes

Preset

Application

Notes

It is recommended you set the Master Tempo to 91 in the Controllers menu. Most of the MK-6 riffs were designed to be played at this tempo.

If you always want your unit to boot at 91 BPM, save that tempo to the first

Multisetup in the Multi Menu.

Preset #005-4 arp:C1 LatchGruv

Pressing

C1

latches an arpeggiated groove until retriggered.

• CTLs A-L

do the usual.

The

Mod Wheel

(which is also CTL M) controls the amount of FXB, fattening or thinning the mix with more or less chorus.

• CTL N

controls the tempo, from super slow to hyper fast.

• CTL O

extends the events of the arp pattern

• CTL P

extends the intervals of the arp pattern

Most of the control lies in the Preset Edit menu under Arps. Most importantly, the pattern selected determines the sound. Also, pattern speed, gate, pre delay, duration and recycle shape the results.

The rest of the control lies in selecting the sounds to arpeggiate (kits, perc or otherwise) in the Instrument menu. And of course, moving the knobs makes everything change!

This idea can spawn entire banks of spin-off grooves. Just select new arp patterns and/or kits and mess with the settings of the arps and controllers until you like what you hear. It's fun to save a bunch of preset variations, then scroll thru them with the groove latched on for cool beat variations and breaks.

Preset #011-4 syn:Invitation

This is a lovely and very involved preset. The tribal back beat on the bottom half of the keyboard can be added and removed with the mod wheel. The top half's harmonics can be controlled by moving Knob N.

Knob O is usually reserved for arpeggiator functions, but we made an exception this time. If you would like to change the speed of the backbeat

(which will also change the pitch), turn it!

Beats

There are lots of beats in the riff list that can be assigned to presets. For example, the following kit category presets become beats (bts) when assigned their respective beats riffs.

000-0 Becky Boiz

098-3 BabyDoll

047-0 YeaYeaZ

001-3 ItsUAgAIn?

And many existing beats presets play beats not designed for them with surprisingly cool results.

216

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Riff Listing

Riff Listing

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

AUD-C Triad

AUD-C1 (4 bars)

AUD-C3 (1 bar)

AUD-C3 (2 Bars)

AUD-C3 (4 Bars)

AUD-C4

7.

8.

AUD-Cm7

AUD-Cm9

9.

10.

AUD-Cmaj7

AUD-Cs Up

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

AUD-Cs Up-Down

AMB-Underground

AMB-Vocoder

BAS-Acid1

BAS-AnythingOnce

BAS-Avalanched

BAS-Bagg

BAS-Baby

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

34.

BAS-BellyButton

BAS-BellyButton2

BAS-BelowaWoofer

BAS-Blip

BAS-Box O

BAS-Crandle

BAS-Cube

BAS-Decision99

BAS-Deeper

BAS-Digger

BAS-EatMe

BAS-Fishy

BAS-Frogged

BAS-Funk PM

BAS-Funk Pop

BAS-Funk Slap

35.

36.

37.

38.

39.

40.

41.

42.

43.

44.

45.

46.

BAS-Funky Pik

BAS-Grit

BAS-GutPunched

BAS-HarpOS1

BAS-HarpOS2

BAS-HarpOS3

BAS-HellaBoom

BAS-Hummertime

BAS-InTheory

BAS-It Too

BAS-KeyONate

BAS-KeyONate2

74.

75.

76.

77.

70.

71.

72.

73.

66.

67.

68.

69.

62.

63.

64.

65.

58.

59.

60.

61.

54.

55.

56.

57.

47.

48.

49.

50.

51.

52.

53.

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

91.

92.

82.

83.

84.

85.

78.

79.

80.

81.

BAS-MarkOther

BAS-MidWest

BAS-Nanife

BAS-Persistence

BAS-PhattPeaches

BAS-Plucky

BAS-PluckySynth

BAS-Poppy

BAS-Prophet

BAS-RezRipper

BAS-SP Stand-Up

BAS-SlapPop

BAS-SonicSine

BAS-Soulified

BAS-Soul Trouble

BAS-Soulfuzz

BAS-Speakeasy

BAS-Speakeasy 2

BAS-Squared

BAS-Standin

BAS-Standin 2

BAS-Subby

BAS-SubFive

BAS-SubOne

BAS-SubsonicTRi

BAS-Talk2Me

BAS-Technoid

BAS-TheDeepest

BAS-TheDeepest2

BAS-Theory

BAS-TheOtherMarc

BAS-Upright One

BAS-WarmWelcome

BAS-We Be Subbin

BAS-WhereIsShe

BAS-WoofaWrekka

BAS-YarsRevenge

BRS-Bigg

BRS-BrassTine

BRS-Hitz

BRS-Caliente

BRS-Crunchy

BRS-Lotsa

BRS-Lotsa2

BRS-Mo

BRS-Philta

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

BRS-SlapDatBrass

BRS-SlapDat 2

GTR-AllWahs

GTR-Burnt

GTR-Chord Bed

GTR-Cyclone

98.

99.

100.

GTR-DissedHit

GTR-Fine Slide

101.

GTR-Flange Pick

102.

103.

104.

105.

GTR-Gen X

GTR-Gen X 2

GTR-GenerEl

GTR-Grit Slide

106.

107.

108.

109.

110.

111.

112.

113.

GTR-Grunge

GTR-HrndrixWah

GTR-Lik Choppy

GTR-LikeThisLik

GTR-Mood Riff

GTR-Nylon

GTR-Nylon 1 2

GTR-Nylon 2

114.

115.

116.

117.

118.

119.

120.

121.

122.

123.

124.

125.

126.

127.

128.

129.

130.

131.

132.

133.

134.

135.

136.

137.

GTR-Nylon 2 2

GTR-NylonArp

GTR-NylonArp2

GTR-NylonFantasy

GTR-One Shot

GTR-PhiltaSweep

GTR-Pinky Fingaz

GTR-Pop 2

GTR-RBNylonWav

GTR-SlideHit

GTR-Slo Strum

GTR-Sprinkle

GTR-Strata

GTR-Strata 2

GTR-StrumGlass

GTR-Wacka 113

GTR-Wacka 96

GTR-Wackaloo

GTR-WahGettars

GTR-Wah Not

GTR-WahScale4

GTR-WeezlFuzz

HIT-DroppinOff

HIT-GuitHat

MK-6 Operation Manual

217

Riff Listing

Appendix

Riff Listing

139.

140.

141.

142.

143.

144.

145.

146.

147.

148.

149.

150.

151.

152.

153.

154.

155.

156.

157.

158.

159.

160.

161.

162.

163.

164.

165.

166.

167.

168.

169.

170.

171.

172.

173.

174.

175.

176.

177.

178.

179.

180.

181.

182.

HIT-InConcert

HIT-KnockUOut

HIT-Nice Under

HIT-OrgCreept

HIT-Satisfying

HIT-Serious

HIT-Serious2

HIT-Splash

HIT-StrikezAgain

HIT-Sweeit

KEY-010FuzzTine

KEY-1NoteMello

KEY-ChordsHits

KEY-ChordsHits2

KEY-CityGiggin

KEY-DX Organ

KEY-Far fg nOrgn

KEY-GrowlDrop

KEY-HarpsiFlange

KEY-Horror Glide

KEY-HybridSweep

KEY-Keystone

KEY-Klav Synth

KEY-Klavin It

KEY-KoolKord

KEY-Mo 88

KEY-Mo E Dan

KEY-Org Roll

KEY-OrgLite

KEY-OrgRoll2

KEY-OrgStoneGruv

KEY-Perc Org

KEY-Sitar 88

KEY-Syco Vox 88

KEY-TremblRODES

KEY-Vinyl 73

KEY-WahChunk

LED-70s Lead

LED-Deep Thought

LED-DeepThought2

LED-Fantasy

LED-Fantasy2

LED-Fantasy3

LED-I Saw Worms

183.

184.

185.

186.

187.

188.

189.

190.

191.

192.

193.

194.

195.

196.

197.

198.

199.

200.

201.

202.

203.

204.

205.

206.

207.

208.

209.

210.

211.

212.

213.

214.

215.

216.

217.

218.

219.

220.

221.

222.

223.

224.

225.

226.

LED-ProphetLine

LED-Raveline

LED-Raveline2

LED-Reeder

LED-SineWorm

LED-SineWorm2

LED-Stevie

LED-Violetta

LED-Wali Wali

LED-Yearning

PAD-Addtive Org

PAD-Cherubs

PAD-Cherubs 2

PAD-DanceLitez

PAD-DeadMetal1

PAD-Drone 1

PAD-Drone 1 2

PAD-Drone 2

HIT-InConcert

HIT-KnockUOut

HIT-Nice Under

HIT-OrgCreept

HIT-Satisfying

HIT-Serious

HIT-Serious2

HIT-Splash

HIT-StrikezAgain

HIT-Sweeit

KEY-010FuzzTine

KEY-1NoteMello

KEY-ChordsHits

KEY-ChordsHits2

KEY-CityGiggin

KEY-DX Organ

KEY-Far fg nOrgn

KEY-GrowlDrop

KEY-HarpsiFlange

KEY-Horror Glide

KEY-HybridSweep

KEY-Keystone

KEY-Klav Synth

KEY-Klavin It

KEY-KoolKord

KEY-Mo 88

227.

228.

229.

230.

231.

232.

233.

234.

235.

236.

237.

238.

239.

240.

241.

242.

243.

244.

245.

246.

247.

248.

249.

250.

251.

252.

253.

254.

255.

256.

257.

258.

259.

260.

261.

262.

263.

264.

265.

266.

267.

268.

269.

270.

KEY-Mo E Dan

KEY-Org Roll

KEY-OrgLite

KEY-OrgRoll2

KEY-OrgStoneGruv

KEY-Perc Org

KEY-Sitar 88

KEY-Syco Vox 88

KEY-TremblRODES

KEY-Vinyl 73

KEY-WahChunk

LED-70s Lead

LED-Deep Thought

LED-DeepThought2

LED-Fantasy

LED-Fantasy2

LED-Fantasy3

LED-I Saw Worms

LED-ProphetLine

LED-Raveline

LED-Raveline2

LED-Reeder

LED-SineWorm

LED-SineWorm2

LED-Stevie

LED-Violetta

LED-Wali Wali

LED-Yearning

PAD-Addtive Org

PAD-Cherubs

PAD-Cherubs 2

PAD-DanceLitez

PAD-DeadMetal1

PAD-Drone 1

PAD-Drone 1 2

PAD-Drone 2

SYN-PLUCKY

SYN-Plucky 2

SYN-Prosync

SYN-Silkwerm

SYN-Syco Girl

SYN-Wan X

SYN-Weeperr

SYN-Winny

218

E-MU Systems

Riff Listing

Appendix

Riff Listing

271.

272.

273.

274.

275.

276.

277.

278.

279.

280.

281.

282.

283.

284.

285.

286.

287.

288.

289.

290.

291.

292.

293.

294.

295.

296.

297.

298.

299.

300.

301.

302.

303.

304.

305.

306.

307.

308.

309.

310.

311.

312.

313.

314.

315.

VOX-Agony Agony

VOX-DaddysGal

VOX-Voicyst

VOX-Voxcade

WAV-Sinusoid

WAV-Square

PRC-Kicks 1

PRC-Kix 1

PRC-Kix 2

PRC-Misc

PRC-Per Oct

PRC-Scratches

KIT-AllmyMoMeeS

KIT-BettaBeata

KIT-Construction

KIT-CornaSto

KIT-CornaSto2

KIT-Crunch

KIT-DarkFlower

KIT-DarkFlower2

KIT-DePhlanga

KIT-FriscoLayer

KIT-Funk 4 Life

KIT-GM One

KIT-GM Two

KIT-GuessWhosBak

KIT-HappyZ

KIT-HiverJiver

KIT-HiverJiver2

KIT-Hot n Steamy

KIT-KattznJammah

KIT-KlasicStudio

KIT-Klippy

KIT-Lesster

KIT-MO GM 1

KIT-MarchMadness

KIT-MarchMadnezZ

KIT-Mo Dist

KIT-Music2DrivBy

KIT-New Beat

KIT-NuMetal

KIT-Oh Yeah

KIT-OnDaStreet

KIT-Perky

KIT-Perky2

316.

317.

318.

319.

320.

321.

322.

323.

324.

325.

326.

327.

328.

329.

330.

331.

332.

333.

334.

335.

336.

337.

338.

339.

340.

341.

342.

343.

344.

345.

346.

347.

348.

349.

350.

351.

352.

353.

354.

355.

356.

357.

358.

359.

360.

KIT-PhiltaFreak

KIT-PhiltaFreak2

KIT-Relapse

KIT-Relapse2

KIT-ScratchHead

KIT-Slappy

KIT-SubwayTunnel

KIT-The Ultimate

KIT-ThugitUp

KIT-TimesSquare

KIT-U Aint

KIT-U No

KIT-Vilper

KIT-Vilper2

KIT-Warp

KIT-Wide One

KIT-WideOne2

KIT-Woo Kid

BTS-8nt Urz

BTS-AllMyMomeeS

BTS-BabyDoll

BTS-Beat Prophet

BTS-Becky Boise

BTS-Can I Talk

BTS-ClapYoHandZ

BTS-CreatrLayr

BTS-CreatrLayr2

BTS-DialToneZ

BTS-DirTay drTee

BTS-DJ GLO Jenkn

BTS-DoiTZ

BTS-Dr. Banner

BTS-FemaleBasher

BTS-Geechee GLO

BTS-GLO BabieeS

BTS-GrungeZ

BTS-HeY

BTS-Hot n Steam2

BTS-Hot n Steamy

BTS-I Miss U

BTS-Iced Out

BTS-ItsLikeDat

BTS-ItsUAgAIn

BTS-KattznJammah

BTS-LaLaZ

361.

362.

363.

364.

365.

366.

367.

368.

369.

370.

371.

372.

373.

374.

375.

376.

377.

378.

379.

380.

381.

382.

383.

384.

385.

386.

387.

388.

389.

390.

391.

392.

393.

394.

395.

396.

397.

398.

399.

400.

401.

402.

403.

404.

405.

BTS-Last Chance

BTS-Lily 3

BTS-Lily 4

BTS-Lily 5

BTS-Luv Joens

BTS-MaleBasher

BTS-MoHappyFeet

BTS-MooshooClan

BTS-MounTenbery

BTS-My Girl

BTS-NWO

BTS-Oh BaebeeZ

BTS-Play Cousin

BTS-Q BORO

BTS-ShakitZ

BTS-SistaHoney

BTS-SmoothOneZ

BTS-SpaceBoyZ

BTS-The Ultimate

BTS-U4 Got ME

BTS-VideoGamez

BTS-While U Werk

BTS-Wide Hive

BTS-YeaYeaZ

BTS-ZMan

BTS-BackInTheDay

BTS-Creekside

BTS-Dirt Bag

BTS-Emu Class

BTS-Fan Tu C

BTS-HeartBroken

BTS-Her Echo

BTS-KnoWudIMean

BTS-Les Gooo

BTS-Litey

BTS-Litey Luv

BTS-Mad MP

BTS-Mello Lady

BTS-Nitey Luv

BTS-NoT awrite

BTS-Oo

BTS-Oo! Noe

BTS-Plinky

BTS-Po! Noe

BTS-Qic Lee

MK-6 Operation Manual

219

Riff Listing

Appendix

Riff Listing

406.

407.

408.

409.

410.

411.

412.

413.

414.

BTS-Qictasey

BTS-Rodeo

BTS-Sic Yo

BTS-So

BTS-So Wut

BTS-Too Biz E

BTS-ToTheRToTheB

BTS-Vel awrong

BTS-Wel awrite

415.

416.

417.

418.

419.

420.

421.

422.

423.

BTS-Wut Smile

BTS-Yup

BTS-Z Lala

BTS-Zyon

BTS-ZMicrosize2

BTS-ZOnlyPaper4

BTS-ZSandpaper3

BTS-ZSandpaper5

BTS-ZGritzkeyz

424.

425.

426.

427.

428.

429.

430.

BTS-ZParlor Org

BTS-ZSensitive

BTS-ZShagNST

BTS-ZTellUSumpn

BTS-LaidBack

BTS-MillaTime

BTS-PercJam

220

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument

Listing

27.

28.

29.

30.

23.

24.

25.

26.

19.

20.

21.

22.

15.

16.

17.

18.

35.

36.

37.

38.

31.

32.

33.

34.

39.

40.

11.

12.

13.

14.

7.

8.

9.

10.

3.

4.

5.

6.

0.

1.

2.

:None bas:The Deepest bas:Hummertime bas:WoofaWrekka bas:Hella Boom bas:Decision'99 bas:Acid 1 bas:Acid 2 bas:Crandle bas:Frog Factory bas:Talk2MeBaby bas:Soulified bas:Speakeasy bas:Warm Welcome bas:Belly-Button bas:KeyONate bas:TheOtherMarc bas:Closer To It bas:Fish Fry bas:Prophet bas:In Theory bas:Persistence bas:Funk Pop 1 bas:Funk Pop2 bas:Funk Slap bas:SlapPopSwtch bas:Funk Finger bas:Funk Hollow bas:Funk Pick bas:Funk Wave 1 bas:Funk Wave 2 bas:Accidental bas:Finger Bass bas:Bagg bas:Destroyer bas:Blipp bas:Echo Hitter bas:DubbyDoRite bas:Dub 2 bas:GrittyStanda bas:Gritty Pulla

This section lists the raw instruments in the MK-6 “MROM1” set.

Instruments consist of either multisamples or single samples.

41.

42.

43.

44.

45.

46.

47.

48.

49.

50.

51.

52.

53.

54.

55.

56.

57.

58.

59.

60.

61.

62.

63.

64.

65.

66.

67.

68.

69.

70.

71.

72.

73.

74.

75.

76.

77.

78.

79.

80.

81.

bas:Krafty 1 bas:Krafty 2 bas:Swing Hitter bas:Technoid bas:Bender Hit bas:Synth Boom bas:PluckySynth bas:HarpOneShot1 bas:HarpOneShot2 bas:HarpOneShot3 bas:Upright One bas:SP Stand-Up bas:Bass Slide bas:FX F#0-B0 gtr:All Wahs gtr:Crybaby Wah1 gtr:Crybaby Wah2 gtr:5strkchuck83 gtr:Wow Wacka 83 gtr:WackaGruv283 gtr:Wah Jan 83 gtr:Wacka 96bpm gtr:Wah 96 2 gtr:Wah 96 3 gtr:CoolWaRif113 gtr:WACKA Do 113 gtr:113 Wackaloo gtr:Wah Coming gtr:Chickenpickr gtr:Chickjacked gtr:Chucka Run gtr:ExcitableWah gtr:Hendrix Wah gtr:LikethisLik gtr:Lil' Chopper gtr:Lil' Chukka gtr:Lil Wah Run gtr:Oddlilhitter gtr:Oh YEahWah gtr:Versa Wa gtr:Wah LikDis

82.

83.

84.

85.

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

91.

92.

93.

94.

95.

96.

gtr:Wah Not?

gtr:Wah Scale 1 gtr:Wah Scale 2 gtr:Wah Scale 3 gtr:Wah Scale 4 gtr:Wah Scale 5 gtr:Wah Scale 6 gtr:Wah Scale 7 gtr:Wah Scaler gtr:Wah Scaler 2 gtr:WahSurprised gtr:Wah Upper gtr:Walk On Waka gtr:Walker Wah gtr:Wuckit

97.

98.

gtr:Funky Likka gtr:Squawk Hit

99.

gtr:Vinyl Mood

100.

gtr:1 Note Mute

101.

gtr:RapNylonWave

102.

gtr:R&B NylonWav

103.

gtr:EffectsD0-B0

104.

gtr:Happy Strum

105.

gtr:Sexy Slide 1

106.

gtr:Sexy Slide 2

107.

gtr:2StrokeStrum

108.

gtr:Fast Slider

109.

gtr:Fine Slider

110.

gtr:Nln Strum Dn

111.

gtr:Gritty Slide

112.

gtr:Knock 1

113.

gtr:Knock 2

114.

gtr:Squeak 1

115.

gtr:Squeak 2

116.

gtr:General Elec

117.

gtr:Strat 1 Shot

118.

gtr:NotherElWave

119.

gtr:Dis One Notr

120.

gtr:Funk Pop

121.

gtr:Pop 2

122.

gtr:Chord Bed

MK-6 Operation Manual

221

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument Listing

147.

148.

149.

150.

151.

152.

153.

154.

139.

140.

141.

142.

143.

144.

145.

146.

131.

132.

133.

134.

135.

136.

137.

138.

123.

124.

125.

126.

127.

128.

129.

130.

155.

156.

157.

158.

159.

160.

161.

162.

163.

164.

165.

166.

167.

gtr:Krackly Kord gtr:Amp Noise gtr:Amp Ped gtr:All Burners gtr:Hardcore gtr:Psycho Noise gtr:Fuzz Tone gtr:Slicer gtr:Dissed Hit gtr:Doooom pad:Drone 1 pad:Drone 2 pad:Drone 3 pad:Sirens hit:Guit n Hat hit:Wah Kicker hit:Satisfying hit:SP12OrgChord hit:Weird Gtr led:DeepThoughts led:Fantastic70s led:Guitlet Wave syn:Synthomatic led:Transformed brs:Caliente!

hit:Tpt Solo led:Hoodwormed led:Yearning 2 B led:ReedOPlenty led:AmberVioleta led:Stevie Rockz pad:Mr. Clean sfx:Shield sfx:Deadly Cycle sfx:Reaper vox:Atseeyeah pad:Pulsar gtr:1ShotElectra brs:CarnavalHits brs:Carnaval 1 brs:Carnaval 2 brs:Carnaval 3 brs:Carnaval 4 brs:Carnaval 5 hit:Spicy Brass

192.

193.

194.

195.

196.

197.

198.

199.

184.

185.

186.

187.

188.

189.

190.

191.

176.

177.

178.

179.

180.

181.

182.

183.

168.

169.

170.

171.

172.

173.

174.

175.

200.

201.

202.

203.

204.

205.

206.

207.

208.

209.

210.

211.

212.

sfx:Worry Pad str:Orcha Chord hit:DeathStrike hit:Sweetness 1 hit:Sweetness 2 hit:QuirkyDrmBed hit:Intro Beat hit:Knock U Out!

hit:Blip hit:Caprice hit:Sax Line gtr:Owp Hit hit:Bottom 1 hit:Bottom 2 hit:Nice Under hit:Nice Under 2 hit:Righteous sfx:Cop Tone 1 sfx:Cop Tone 2 sfx:Beep Tone 1 sfx:Beep Tone 2 sfx:ComputerBeep sfx:Ping Beep hit:Key Kord min hit:X hit:Honk sfx:Dial 8 sfx:Dial 6 sfx:Dial 5 sfx:Dial 4 sfx:Dial 3 sfx:Dial 2 sfx:Dial 1 hit:Annoy hit:Orchit brs:Waver Stab brs:40's Horn sfx:Bat hit:Bass Note hit:Hatthang sfx:AmusemntCrwd hit:SynChord hit:Synthetic hit:Padlove hit:8 Bit Fright

237.

238.

239.

240.

241.

242.

243.

244.

229.

230.

231.

232.

233.

234.

235.

236.

221.

222.

223.

224.

225.

226.

227.

228.

213.

214.

215.

216.

217.

218.

219.

220.

245.

246.

247.

248.

249.

250.

251.

252.

253.

254.

255.

256.

257.

hit:Synth Ditty hit:House Chrd ?

hit:HornStabber brs:Stabber sfx:JungleWiggly sfx:Wet Tripper hit:Dum Dum 1 hit:Dum Dum 2 hit:Jungle hit:Bongo Fury hit:Drop Off syn:2 Step hit:the Snap sfx:HookReverse brs:Tasty Lick brs:Next Tasty 1 brs:NotherTasty brs:Next Tasty 2 syn:Flutey hit:Brass Attack gtr:Single Next brs:Falling brs:Sfz syn:Grinder hit:HardSynStab1 hit:HardSynStab2 brs:Quirky Hit hit:StressRelief hit:Korn syn:Wheeeeper hit:It's A...

hit:It's A nothr hit:Rap Zapper hit:Uplifter hit:Good'Nuff hit:Laser Strike hit:Wild Horns hit:Cluster hit:To the Point hit:Tentative hit:Mood Swing syn:Sea Story str:Fade Hit hit:Sentimental hit:DeD RINGER

222

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument Listing

258.

hit:Chord Ends

259.

hit:Monster

260.

hit:SP Super

261.

hit:With 2 Tts

262.

hit:Splashy

263.

str:SP Suspense

264.

hit:Weird Nylon

265.

hit:Sp Reversal

266.

gtr:Mood Riff

267.

syn:BrassProphet

268.

pad:Plucked Gold

269.

syn:Winny

270.

syn:P5 Sync

271.

wav:Sinusoid

272.

wav:Sine /\ 2

273.

wav:SineInvrt/\2

274.

wav:Sine /\ 3

275.

wav:SineInvrt/\3

276.

wav:Sawtooth

277.

wav:Square

278.

wav:Triangle

279.

key:010 El Tine

280.

key:1 Note Mello

281.

key:Nother1Noter

282.

key:010 FuzzTine

283.

key:Res 1 Shot

284.

key:Chords/Hits

285.

key:KoolOrgKord1

286.

key:Kool Kord 2

287.

key:Rhodes FX 1

288.

key:WindownLetGo

289.

key:Loop da Loop

290.

key:Growl Drop

291.

key:Org Roll 1

292.

key:Harpsinote

293.

hit:DanceKey1

294.

hit:DanceKey2

295.

hit:DanceKey3

296.

hit:DanceKey4

297.

hit:DanceKey5

298.

hit:Organ

299.

hit:Maj Org

300.

hit:DirtyTine

301.

hit:Piano Lick

302.

hit:In Concert

303.

key:Kool Kord

304.

key:Nother 'No

305.

key:Perc Organ

306.

str:Interrupted

307.

str:Section Pizz

308.

str:Orch Harp

309.

str:Hybrid Synth

310.

str:Sctn Legato

311.

str:Synthetic

312.

str:MoodChrdStab

313.

str:Mood Stab 2

314.

str:Harp Gliss

315.

str:Screenplay

316.

str:Sp Loooopy

317.

hit:Brass Balls

318.

str:Hip Hop Pizz

319.

str:Big PluckHit

320.

str:Rap OrchRiff

321.

str:Heartbreaker

322.

vox:TB Ooh! 1

323.

vox:TB Ooh! 2

324.

vox:Talk Box Ooh

325.

vox:Talk Box Aha

326.

vox:Freak!

327.

vox:TBLet'sDance

328.

vox:Booms!

329.

vox:Doit!

330.

vox:Oh Yeahs!

331.

vox:Dan Cher 1

332.

vox:Dan Cher 2

333.

vox:Funky 1

334.

vox:Funky 2

335.

vox:All Vowels

336.

vox:AllNTPVowels

337.

vox:VowelEachOct

338.

vox:Vowel Train

339.

vox:Vowel Train2

340.

vox:Vocoder

341.

vox:All Men

342.

vox:All Femmes

343.

vox:Owwwwwwww

344.

vox:Screamer

345.

vox:YahWailer

346.

vox:Wassup???

347.

vox:Techno Yeah

348.

vox:Scratch Talk

349.

hit:Scratch Box

350.

vox:Podge

351.

syn:Vox Pad

352.

vox:TB Pad 1

353.

vox:TB Pad 2

354.

vox:Talk Brush

355.

gtr:DistantCry

356.

gtr:Heavy

357.

syn:Vox Roller

358.

vox:TB Boom 1

359.

vox:TB Boom 2

360.

vox:TB Boom 3

361.

vox:TB Boom 4

362.

vox:TB Boom 5

363.

vox:TB Boom 6

364.

vox:TB Do It 1

365.

vox:TB Do It 2

366.

vox:TB Do It 3

367.

vox:TB Do It 4

368.

vox:TB Do It 5

369.

vox:TB Oh Yeah 1

370.

vox:TB Oh Yeah 2

371.

vox:TB Oh Yeah 3

372.

vox:TB Oh Yeah 4

373.

vox:TB Oh Yeah 5

374.

vox:TB Oh Yeah 6

375.

vox:TB Oh Yeah 7

376.

vox:TB Vowel A

377.

vox:TB Vowel E

378.

vox:TB Vowel I

379.

vox:TB Vowel O

380.

vox:TB Vowel U

381.

vox:TB Vowel Ah

382.

vox:TB Vowel Eh

383.

vox:TB Vowel Uh

384.

vox:TB Vowel Oo

385.

vox:Gina Ew 1

386.

vox:Gina Ew 2

387.

vox:Earth Lisa

388.

vox:Male 1

389.

vox:Male 2

390.

vox:Male 3

391.

vox:Male 4

392.

vox:Male 5

MK-6 Operation Manual

223

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument Listing

393.

vox:Male 6

394.

vox:Male 7

395.

396.

397.

398.

vox:Male 8 vox:Male 9 vox:Male 10 vox:Femme 1

399.

400.

401.

402.

403.

404.

405.

406.

vox:Femme 2 vox:Femme 3 vox:Femme 4 vox:Femme 5 vox:Femme 6 vox:Femme 7 vox:Femme 8 vox:Femme 9

407.

408.

409.

410.

411.

412.

413.

414.

415.

416.

417.

418.

419.

420.

421.

422.

vox:Femme 10 vox:Femme 11 vox:Femme 12 vox:Femme 13 key:Farfisa Low key:Farfisa key:Vox Organ key:Organ 1 key:Organ 2 key:Org Day key:Org Nod key:Org Lite key:Disco Organ key:DX Organ key:JX Organ led:Full Force

423.

424.

425.

426.

427.

428.

429.

430.

431.

432.

433.

434.

435.

436.

syn:Brite Brass syn:Muted Brass syn:Classic 1 syn:Classic 2 syn:EdgyVeryEdgy syn:Tone Wall syn:Jungle Lead led:Wormy 1 led:Wormy 2 led:Wormy 3 led:H20 syn:Wave Cutter syn:Rail to Rail key:Klavin It

461.

462.

463.

464.

465.

466.

467.

468.

453.

454.

455.

456.

457.

458.

459.

460.

445.

446.

447.

448.

449.

450.

451.

452.

437.

438.

439.

440.

441.

442.

443.

444.

469.

470.

471.

472.

473.

474.

475.

476.

477.

478.

479.

480.

key:Klav Love key:Klav Love b syn:Buzz Wave prc:All Kicks 1 prc:All Kicks 2 prc:Kicks 2 Tuned prc:All Snares 1 prc:All Snares 2 prc:All Snares 3 prc:KikSnarePlc1 prc:All Hats 1 prc:All Hats 2 prc:All Cymbals prc:Rainstick prc:Whirlybird prc:All Stix prc:All Bongos prc:AllClaps&Snp prc:All Claves prc:All Toms prc:All Bells prc:All Fills prc:All Shakers prc:AllScratches prc:All Misc sfx:ScaryBastard prc:Sci Fi Toy 1 prc:Sci Fi Toy 2 prc:Thumpiano scr:Scratch Map scr:Scratch Talk scr:Rodeo Roper scr:Chipmunk Rap scr:StuttrSteppr scr:Whale backer scr:Nother Drop scr:Hiccup scr:Rotator scr:Hard Drop prc:Shaker Loop prc:St Flexi 1 prc:Flexi 2 prc:Flexi 3 prc:Flexi 4

505.

506.

507.

508.

509.

510.

511.

512.

497.

498.

499.

500.

501.

502.

503.

504.

489.

490.

491.

492.

493.

494.

495.

496.

481.

482.

483.

484.

485.

486.

487.

488.

513.

514.

515.

516.

517.

518.

519.

520.

521.

522.

523.

524.

prc:Kick 5 prc:Kick 6 prc:Kick 7 prc:Kick 8 prc:Kick 9 prc:Kick 10 prc:Kick 11 prc:Kick 12 prc:Kick 13 prc:Kick 14 prc:Kick 15 prc:Kick 16 prc:Kick 17 prc:Kick 18 prc:Kick 19 prc:Kick 20 prc:Flexi 5 kit:Lily GM1 kit:Lily GM2 kit:Lily GM3 kit:Lily GM4 kit:Lily GM5 kit:Funky GM One kit:Funky GM 2 kit:Funky GM 3 kit:Funky 4 kit:Funky 5 kit:Funky 6 prc:Kick 1 prc:Kick 2 prc:Kick 3 prc:Kick 4 prc:Kick 21 prc:Kick 22 prc:Kick 23 prc:Kick 24 prc:Kick 25 prc:Kick 26 prc:Kick 27 prc:Kick 28 prc:Kick 29 prc:Kick 30 prc:Kick 31 prc:Kick 32

224

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument Listing

549.

550.

551.

552.

553.

554.

555.

556.

541.

542.

543.

544.

545.

546.

547.

548.

533.

534.

535.

536.

537.

538.

539.

540.

525.

526.

527.

528.

529.

530.

531.

532.

557.

558.

559.

560.

561.

562.

563.

564.

565.

566.

567.

568.

569.

prc:Kick 49 prc:Kick 50 prc:Kick 51 prc:Kick 52 prc:Kick 53 prc:Kick 54 prc:Kick 55 prc:Kick 56 prc:Kick 57 prc:Kick 58 prc:Kick 59 prc:Kick 60 prc:Kick 61 prc:Kick 62 prc:Kick 63 prc:Kick 64 prc:Kick 33 prc:Kick 34 prc:Kick 35 prc:Kick 36 prc:Kick 37 prc:Kick 38 prc:Kick 39 prc:Kick 40 prc:Kick 41 prc:Kick 42 prc:Kick 43 prc:Kick 44 prc:Kick 45 prc:Kick 46 prc:Kick 47 prc:Kick 48 prc:Kick 65 prc:Kick 66 prc:Kick 67 prc:Kick 68 prc:Kick 69 prc:Kick 70 prc:Kick 71 prc:Kick 72 prc:Kick 73 prc:Kick 74 key:Tine Chord 1 key:Tine Chord 2 key:Tine Chord 3

594.

595.

596.

597.

598.

599.

600.

601.

586.

587.

588.

589.

590.

591.

592.

593.

578.

579.

580.

581.

582.

583.

584.

585.

570.

571.

572.

573.

574.

575.

576.

577.

602.

603.

604.

605.

606.

607.

608.

609.

610.

611.

612.

613.

614.

prc:Snare 6 prc:Snare 7 prc:Snare 8 prc:Snare 9 prc:Snare 10 prc:Snare 11 prc:Snare 12 prc:Snare 13 prc:Snare 14 prc:Snare 15 prc:Snare 16 prc:Snare 17 prc:Snare 18 prc:Snare 19 prc:Snare 20 prc:Snare 21 key:Tine Chord 4 key:Tine Chord 5 key:Tine Chord 6 key:Tine Chord 7 key:Tine Hit 1 key:Tine Hit 2 key:Tine Hit 3 key:Tine Hit 4 key:Tine Hit 5 key:Tine Hit 6 key:Tine Hit 7 prc:Snare 1 prc:Snare 2 prc:Snare 3 prc:Snare 4 prc:Snare 5 prc:Snare 22 prc:Snare 23 prc:Snare 24 prc:Snare 25 prc:Snare 26 prc:Snare 27 prc:Snare 28 prc:Snare 29 prc:Snare 30 prc:Snare 31 prc:Snare 32 prc:Snare 33 prc:Snare 34

639.

640.

641.

642.

643.

644.

645.

646.

631.

632.

633.

634.

635.

636.

637.

638.

623.

624.

625.

626.

627.

628.

629.

630.

615.

616.

617.

618.

619.

620.

621.

622.

647.

648.

649.

650.

651.

652.

653.

654.

655.

656.

657.

658.

659.

prc:Snare 51 prc:Snare 52 prc:Snare 53 prc:Snare 54 prc:Snare 55 prc:Snare 56 prc:Snare 57 prc:Snare 58 prc:Snare 59 prc:Snare 60 prc:Snare 61 prc:Snare 62 prc:Snare 63 prc:Snare 64 prc:Snare 65 prc:Snare 66 prc:Snare 35 prc:Snare 36 prc:Snare 37 prc:Snare 38 prc:Snare 39 prc:Snare 40 prc:Snare 41 prc:Snare 42 prc:Snare 43 prc:Snare 44 prc:Snare 45 prc:Snare 46 prc:Snare 47 prc:Snare 48 prc:Snare 49 prc:Snare 50 prc:Snare 67 prc:Snare 68 prc:Snare 69 prc:Snare 70 prc:Snare 71 prc:Snare 72 prc:Snare 73 prc:Snare 74 prc:Snare 75 prc:Snare 76 prc:Snare 77 prc:Snare 78 prc:Snare 79

MK-6 Operation Manual

225

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument Listing

684.

685.

686.

687.

688.

689.

690.

691.

676.

677.

678.

679.

680.

681.

682.

683.

668.

669.

670.

671.

672.

673.

674.

675.

660.

661.

662.

663.

664.

665.

666.

667.

692.

693.

694.

695.

696.

697.

698.

699.

700.

701.

702.

703.

prc:Snare 96 prc:Snare 97 prc:Snare 98 prc:Snare 99 prc:Snare 100 prc:Snare 101 prc:Snare 102 prc:Snare 103 prc:Snare 104 prc:Snare 105 prc:Snare 106 prc:Snare 107 prc:Snare 108 prc:Snare 109 prc:Snare 110 prc:Snare 111 prc:Snare 80 prc:Snare 81 prc:Snare 82 prc:Snare 83 prc:Snare 84 prc:Snare 85 prc:Snare 86 prc:Snare 87 prc:Snare 88 prc:Snare 89 prc:Snare 90 prc:Snare 91 prc:Snare 92 prc:Snare 93 prc:Snare 94 prc:Snare 95 prc:Snare 112 prc:Snare 113 prc:Snare 114 prc:Snare 115 prc:Snare 116 prc:Snare 117 prc:Snare 118 prc:Snare 119 prc:Snare 120 prc:Snare 121 prc:Snare 122 prc:Snare 123

226

E-MU Systems

728.

729.

730.

731.

732.

733.

734.

735.

720.

721.

722.

723.

724.

725.

726.

727.

712.

713.

714.

715.

716.

717.

718.

719.

704.

705.

706.

707.

708.

709.

710.

711.

736.

737.

738.

739.

740.

741.

742.

743.

744.

745.

746.

747.

prc:Snare 140 prc:Snare 141 prc:Snare 142 prc:Snare 143 prc:Snare 144 prc:Snare 145 prc:Snare 146 prc:Snare 147 prc:Snare 148 prc:Snare 149 prc:Snare 150 prc:Snare 151 prc:Snare 152 prc:Snare 153 prc:Snare 154 prc:Snare 155 prc:Snare 124 prc:Snare 125 prc:Snare 126 prc:Snare 127 prc:Snare 128 prc:Snare 129 prc:Snare 130 prc:Snare 131 prc:Snare 132 prc:Snare 133 prc:Snare 134 prc:Snare 135 prc:Snare 136 prc:Snare 137 prc:Snare 138 prc:Snare 139 prc:Snare 156 prc:Snare 157 prc:Snare 158 prc:Snare 159 prc:Snare 160 prc:Snare 161 prc:Snare 162 prc:Snare 163 prc:Snare 164 prc:Snare 165 prc:Snare 166 prc:Snare 167

772.

773.

774.

775.

776.

777.

778.

779.

764.

765.

766.

767.

768.

769.

770.

771.

756.

757.

758.

759.

760.

761.

762.

763.

748.

749.

750.

751.

752.

753.

754.

755.

780.

781.

782.

783.

784.

785.

786.

787.

788.

789.

790.

791.

prc:Snare 168 kit:Nu Soul kit:80s+Drm&Bass kit:Electronica1 kit:Dub Reggae kit:DarkBeats kit:DarkBeats2 kit:LoFi Kit kit:Nu Metal hit:All Hits 1 rom:Thru Memory rom:Vowels hit:All Hits 2

kit:1NoHats kit:1NoKickSnare kit:2NoHats kit:2NoKickSnare kit:3NoHats kit:3NoKickSnare kit:4NoHats kit:4NoKickSnare kit:5NoHats kit:5NoKickSnare kit:6NoHats kit:6NoKickSnare kit:7NoHats kit:7NoKickSnare kit:8NoHats kit:8NoKickSnare kit:9NoHats kit:9NoKickSnare kit:10NoHats kit:10NoKikSnare kit:11NoHats kit:11NoKikSnare kit:12NoHats kit:12NoKikSnare kit:13NoHats kit:13NoKikSnare kit:14NoHats kit:14NoKikSnare kit:15NoHats kit:15NoKikSnare kit:16NoHats

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument Listing

816.

817.

818.

819.

820.

821.

822.

823.

808.

809.

810.

811.

812.

813.

814.

815.

800.

801.

802.

803.

804.

805.

806.

807.

792.

793.

794.

795.

796.

797.

798.

799.

824.

825.

826.

827.

828.

829.

830.

831.

832.

833.

834.

835.

prc:Hat 18 prc:Hat 19 prc:Hat 20 prc:Hat 21 prc:Hat 22 prc:Hat 23 prc:Hat 24 prc:Hat 25 prc:Hat 26 prc:Hat 27 prc:Hat 28 prc:Hat 29 prc:Hat 2 prc:Hat 3 prc:Hat 4 prc:Hat 5 prc:Hat 6 prc:Hat 7 prc:Hat 8 prc:Hat 9 prc:Hat 10 prc:Hat 11 prc:Hat 12 prc:Hat 13 prc:Hat 14 prc:Hat 15 prc:Hat 16 prc:Hat 17

kit:16NoKikSnare kit:17NoHats kit:17NoKikSnare kit:18NoHats kit:18NoKikSnare kit:19NoHats kit:19NoKikSnare

gtr:Scrape 1 gtr:Strum Up gtr:Strum Down gtr:Bonk gtr:Chop gtr:Pick Noise vox:All Talkbox str:StackedLegs prc:Hat 1

860.

861.

862.

863.

864.

865.

866.

867.

852.

853.

854.

855.

856.

857.

858.

859.

844.

845.

846.

847.

848.

849.

850.

851.

836.

837.

838.

839.

840.

841.

842.

843.

868.

869.

870.

871.

872.

873.

874.

875.

876.

877.

878.

879.

prc:Hat 46 prc:Hat 47 prc:Hat 48 prc:Hat 49 prc:Hat 50 prc:Hat 51 prc:Hat 52 prc:Hat 53 prc:Hat 54 prc:Hat 55 prc:Hat 56 prc:Hat 57 prc:Hat 58 prc:Hat 59 prc:Hat 60 prc:Hat 61 prc:Hat 30 prc:Hat 31 prc:Hat 32 prc:Hat 33 prc:Hat 34 prc:Hat 35 prc:Hat 36 prc:Hat 37 prc:Hat 38 prc:Hat 39 prc:Hat 40 prc:Hat 41 prc:Hat 42 prc:Hat 43 prc:Hat 44 prc:Hat 45 prc:Hat 62 prc:Hat 63 prc:Hat 64 prc:Hat 65 prc:Hat 66 prc:Hat 67 prc:Hat 68 prc:Hat 69 prc:Hat 70 prc:Hat 71 prc:Hat 72 prc:Hat 73

904.

905.

906.

907.

908.

909.

910.

911.

896.

897.

898.

899.

900.

901.

902.

903.

888.

889.

890.

891.

892.

893.

894.

895.

880.

881.

882.

883.

884.

885.

886.

887.

912.

913.

914.

915.

916.

917.

918.

919.

920.

921.

922.

923.

prc:Hat 74 prc:Hat 75 prc:Hat 76 prc:Hat 77 prc:Cymbal 1 prc:Cymbal 2 prc:Cymbal 3 prc:Cymbal 4 prc:Cymbal 5 prc:Cymbal 6 prc:Cymbal 7 prc:Cymbal 8 prc:Cymbal 9 prc:Cymbal 10 prc:Cymbal 11 prc:Cymbal 12 prc:Cymbal 13 prc:Cymbal 14 prc:Cymbal 15 prc:Cymbal 16 prc:Cymbal 17 prc:Cymbal 18 prc:Cymbal 19 prc:Cymbal 20 prc:Bongo 1 prc:Bongo 2 prc:Bongo 3 prc:Bongo 4 prc:Bongo 5 prc:Bongo 6 prc:Bongo 7 prc:Bongo 8 prc:Bongo 9 prc:Bongo 10 prc:Bongo 11 prc:Bongo 12 prc:Bongo 13 prc:Bongo 14 prc:Bongo 15 prc:Bongo 16 prc:Bongo 17 prc:Claps&Snp 1 prc:Claps&Snp 2 prc:Claps&Snp 3

MK-6 Operation Manual

227

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument Listing

948.

949.

950.

951.

952.

953.

954.

955.

940.

941.

942.

943.

944.

945.

946.

947.

932.

933.

934.

935.

936.

937.

938.

939.

924.

925.

926.

927.

928.

929.

930.

931.

956.

957.

958.

959.

960.

961.

962.

963.

964.

965.

966.

967.

prc:Clave 6 prc:Clave 7 prc:Clave 8 prc:Clave 9 prc:Clave 10 prc:Clave 11 prc:Clave 12 prc:Clave 13 prc:Clave 14 prc:Clave 15 prc:Clave 16 prc:Clave 17 prc:Tom 1 prc:Tom 2 prc:Tom 3 prc:Tom 4 prc:Claps&Snp 4 prc:Claps&Snp 5 prc:Claps&Snp 6 prc:Claps&Snp 7 prc:Claps&Snp 8 prc:Claps&Snp 9 prc:Claps&Snp 10 prc:Claps&Snp 11 prc:Claps&Snp 12 prc:Claps&Snp 13 prc:Claps&Snp 14 prc:Clave 1 prc:Clave 2 prc:Clave 3 prc:Clave 4 prc:Clave 5 prc:Tom 5 prc:Tom 6 prc:Tom 7 prc:Tom 8 prc:Tom 9 prc:Tom 10 prc:Tom 11 prc:Tom 12 prc:Tom 13 prc:Tom 14 prc:Tom 15 prc:Tom 16

968.

969.

970.

971.

972.

973.

974.

975.

976.

977.

978.

979.

980.

981.

982.

983.

984.

985.

986.

987.

988.

989.

990.

991.

992.

993.

994.

995.

996.

997.

998.

999.

1000.

1001.

1002.

1003.

1004.

1005.

1006.

1007.

1008.

1009.

1010.

1011.

prc:Bell 11 prc:Bell 12 prc:Bell 13 prc:Bell 14 prc:Bell 15 prc:Bell 16 prc:Fill Etc 1 prc:Fill Etc 2 prc:Fill Etc 3 prc:Fill Etc 4 prc:Fill Etc 5 prc:Fill Etc 6 prc:Fill Etc 7 prc:Fill Etc 8 prc:Fill Etc 9 prc:Fill Etc 10 prc:Tom 17 prc:Tom 18 prc:Tom 19 prc:Tom 20 prc:Tom 21 prc:Tom 22 prc:Bell 1 prc:Bell 2 prc:Bell 3 prc:Bell 4 prc:Bell 5 prc:Bell 6 prc:Bell 7 prc:Bell 8 prc:Bell 9 prc:Bell 10 prc:Fill Etc 11 prc:Shaker 1 prc:Shaker 2 prc:Shaker 3 prc:Shaker 4 prc:Shaker 5 prc:Shaker 6 prc:Shaker 7 prc:Shaker 8 prc:Shaker 9 prc:Shaker 10 prc:Shaker 11

1012.

1013.

prc:Shaker 12 prc:Shaker 13

1014.

1015.

prc:Shaker 14 prc:Shaker 15

1016.

1017.

prc:Shaker 16 prc:Shaker 17

1018.

1019.

prc:Shaker 18 prc:Shaker 19

1020.

1021.

prc:Shaker 20 prc:Shaker 21

1022.

1023.

prc:Shaker 22 prc:Shaker 23

1024.

1025.

prc:Shaker 24 prc:Shaker 25

1026.

1027.

prc:Shaker 26 prc:Shaker 27

1028.

1029.

prc:Shaker 28 prc:Shaker 29

1030.

1031.

prc:Misc 1 prc:Misc 2

1032.

1033.

prc:Misc 3 prc:Misc 4

1034.

1035.

prc:Misc 5 prc:Misc 6

1036.

1037.

prc:Misc 7 prc:Misc 8

1038.

1039.

prc:Misc 9 prc:Misc 10

1040.

1041.

prc:Misc 11 prc:Misc 12

1042.

1043.

prc:Misc 13 prc:Misc 14

1044.

1045.

prc:Misc 15 prc:Misc 16

1046.

1047.

prc:Misc 17 prc:Misc 18

1048.

1049.

prc:Misc 19 prc:Misc 20

1050.

1051.

prc:Misc 21 prc:Misc 22

1052.

1053.

prc:Misc 23 prc:Misc 24

1054.

1055.

prc:Misc 25 prc:Misc 26

228

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Instrument Listing

Instrument Listing

1056.

1057.

prc:Misc 27 prc:Misc 28

1058.

1059.

prc:Misc 29 prc:Misc 30

1060.

1061.

prc:Misc 43 prc:Misc 44

1062.

1063.

prc:Misc 31 prc:Misc 32

1064.

1065.

prc:Misc 33 prc:Misc 34

1066.

1067.

prc:Misc 35 prc:Misc 36

1068.

1069.

prc:Misc 37 prc:Misc 38

1070.

prc:Misc 39

1071.

1072.

prc:Misc 40 prc:Misc 41

1073.

1074.

prc:Misc 42 prc:Misc 45

1075.

1076.

prc:Misc 46 prc:Misc 47

1077.

1078.

prc:Misc 48 prc:Misc 49

1079.

1080.

prc:Misc 50 prc:Misc 51

1081.

1082.

prc:Misc 52 prc:Misc 53

1083.

1084.

prc:Misc 54 prc:Misc 55

1085.

prc:Misc 56

1086.

1087.

1088.

1089.

1090.

1091.

1092.

1093.

1094.

1095.

1096.

1097.

1098.

1099.

prc:Misc 57 prc:Misc 58 prc:Misc 59 prc:Misc 60 prc:Misc 61 prc:Misc 62 prc:Misc 63 prc:Misc 64 prc:Misc 65 prc:Misc 66 prc:Misc 67 prc:Misc 68 prc:Misc 69 prc:Misc 70

MK-6 Operation Manual

229

Appendix

Keyboard Velocity Curves

Keyboard

Velocity

Curves

For more information about the velocity curves, see

page 73.

The keyboard velocity curves modify the response of the MK-6 keyboard to adapt to your personal playing style. The “Keyboard Velocity Curve” selection screen is located in the Controllers menu.

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Soft 1

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Soft 2

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Soft Hard

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Soft 3

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Soft 5

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Soft 4

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Medium 1

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

230

E-MU Systems

Keyboard Velocity

Curves

60

40

20

0

120

100

80

Medium 2

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

60

40

20

0

120

100

80

Medium 4

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Medium 6

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Soft Hard

Appendix

Keyboard Velocity Curves

60

40

20

0

120

100

80

Medium 3

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Medium 5

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Medium 7

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Soft Hard

MK-6 Operation Manual

231

Keyboard Velocity

Curves

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Medium 8

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Loud 2

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

All 127

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

Outputs velocity 127 only

232

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Keyboard Velocity Curves

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Loud 1

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Soft Hard

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

All 64

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Soft Hard

Outputs velocity 64 only

Appendix

Master Velocity Curves

Master

Velocity

Curves

For more information about the velocity curves, see

page 73.

This section provides diagrams and descriptions of the MK-6 velocity curves. The master velocity curves modify the velocity values from the

MIDI input port and the keyboard before going into thesynthesizer engine.

120

100

80

60

40

Linear

20

0

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Input Velocity

Linear - No Change to Velocity

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Curve 1

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Input Velocity

Compresses Velocity Range

120

100

80

60

40

20

Curve 2

0

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Input Velocity

Expands Dynamics in low range,

emphasizing medium velocity

values and compressessing high

velocity values.

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Curve 4

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Input Velocity

Expands Velocity Range.

Outputs High Values.

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Curve 3

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Input Velocity

Expands Velocity Range.

Soft -> Loud

120

100

80

60

40

20

Curve 5

0

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Input Velocity

Shifts Velocity Values Upward.

Good Dynamic Range.

MK-6 Operation Manual

233

Master Velocity

Curves

Appendix

Master Velocity Curves

120

100

80

60

40

20

Curve 6

0

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Input Velocity

Shifts Velocity Values Up, while compressing the midde range

120

100

80

60

40

Curve 8

20

0

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Input Velocity

Similar to number 6 with more emphasis on the middle range.

120

100

80

60

40

20

Curve 10

0

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Input Velocity

Extreme Dynamic Range

Compression. Outputs Low Values.

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Curve 7

0 20

40

60

80 100 120

Input Velocity

Similar to Curve 6.

Curve 9

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Input Velocity

Extreme Dynamic Range

Compression.

Curve 11

0 20 40

60 80 100 120

Input Velocity

Extreme Dynamic Range

Compression, but doesn't output low values.

234

E-MU Systems

Appendix

PatchCord Amount Chart

120

100

80

60

40

20

Curve 12

0

0 20 40

60

80 100 120

Input Velocity

Less Severe Version of Curve 11.

40

20

0

120

100

80

60

Curve 13

0 20 40

60

80 100 120

Input Velocity

Extreme Expansion of Velocity

Range.

PatchCord

Amount Chart

The following chart shows the PatchCord “Amount” settings in order to get semitone intervals when modulation sources are connected to pitch.

Semitone

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

19

20

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

PatchCord

Amount

3

6 approx. 9 approx. 12

16

19

22

25

28 approx. 31

35

38

41

44

47

50 approx. 53

57

60

63

Semitone

33

34

35

36

29

30

31

32

37

38

39

40

25

26

27

28

21

22

23

24

PatchCord

Amount

66

69 approx. 72.5

approx. 76

79

82

88

91 approx. 95

98

MK-6 Operation Manual

235

E-MU

Expansion

Sound Sets

Appendix

E-MU Expansion Sound Sets

Eleven different ROM expansions are currently available, with more being developed every day. ROM expansions typically add 32MB of sound data and 512 additional presets. Adding new sounds is like getting a new instrument and a sure way to spark your creativity. ROM Expansions are available from your E-MU dealer. Also check out the official E-MU website:

www.emu.com

for the latest sounds.

Orchestral Sessions VOLUME 1

The Orchestral Sessions Vol. 1 expansion 32 MB ROM offers you the most realistic and comprehensive collection of section strings available, complete with legato, spiccato, pizzicato and tremolande samples, and includes special presets for 4 speaker applications.

Orchestral Sessions VOLUME 2

The Orchestral Sessions Vol. 2 expansion 32 MB ROM offers you the most realistic and comprehensive collection of woodwinds, brass, percussion, and solo strings available, complete with velocity switching between p/mf/ ff samples, special presets for 4 speaker applications and a percussion battery with over 20 instruments.

Siedlaczek Orchestra Special Edition

The Peter Siedlaczek Advanced Orchestra Special Edition puts 32 MB of his finest ensembles onto a single expansion ROM for your MK-6. String, brass, woodwind and percussion ensembles are included in a variety of styles (i.e. vibrato, tremolo, pizzicato, sordino, etc.), to give you a diverse collection of samples.

Protozoa

E-MU presents the 16 MB Protozoa expansion ROM—the ultimate sound compilation containing presets from the ground breaking Proteus sound modules, all optimized for your MK-6’s advanced synthesis and filter architecture.

Sounds of the ZR

The Sounds of the ZR Expansion ROM faithfully reproduces the diverse sounds of ENSONIQ‚s popular ZR-76 keyboard, including William Coakley’s

Perfect Piano. You’ll find everything from synths and orchestral instruments to one of the finest pianos ever sampled in one soundset.

Definitive B-3

John Novello and E-MU present the 32 MB Definitive B-3 expansion ROM, a diverse collection of tone wheel organ drawbar settings sampled direct and with rotary speakers (chorale and tremolo) to give you the most versatile and playable B-3 available!

236

E-MU Systems

Appendix

X-Lead

The X-Lead soundset consists primarily of analog, noise and modern synthesizer waveforms. These sounds are rich in harmonic texture and are a perfect match with the Z-plane filters in your Proteus® family sound module. With the included software upgrade, you now have access to dynamic and rhythmic features not found on any other instrument.

PURE PHATT

The 32 MB Pure Phatt is E-MU’s latest Hip-Hop soundset that produces the freshest and newest sounds and grooves from top notch producers from the

East, Southeast and West coasts. Pumping leads and basses, silky pads and those unique hits, scratches and drones that your mix needs to bring it to the next level are ready to provide the love.

World Expedition

An amazing collection of traditional instruments from the four corners of the globe including exotic stringed instruments, winds, percussion, and chromatic percussion. World Expedition provides you with the most realistic ethnic soundset in the world. Discover a world of sounds to bring to your music.

Techno Synth

Rob Papen and E-MU introduce the 32 MB Techno Synth Construction Yard

Expansion ROM, a compilation of synth, techno, and ambient sounds from one of Europe’s finest programmers. From atmospheric pads to punchy subbasses and crunch drum loops, these sounds will help you tear up the dance floor!

Beat Garden

Dutch sound designer Rob Papen and E-MU introduce the 32 MB Beat

Garden expansion ROM, a diverse palette of all-new Electronica/Dance beats, synths, basses, drumkits, acoustic and electronic percussion.

Experience the Beat Garden for yourself and add a unique dimension to your tracks.

MK-6 Operation Manual

237

Appendix

Installing Sound SIMMs

Installing

Sound SIMMs

MK-6 can be easily expanded to contain up to 128 MB of sound data

(4 SIMMs).

Remove the ROM Hatch Cover:

1.

2.

The sound SIMM sockets in MK-6 are located beneath a small hatch on the bottom panel. Unplug power from the unit and carefully turn it keyboard-side down on a soft, padded surface.

The ROM hatch is a 125cm x 140cm rectangle secured by four screws.

(You can’t miss it.)

Remove the four phillips head screws securing this hatch and place them and the hatch cover where they won’t get lost.

To Remove ROM SIMMs (if necessary):

1.

Orient the unit so that the rear panel is facing you. Ground yourself by touching a grounded object.

(Such as the chassis of another piece of equipment connected to the wall socket with a three-prong power plug.)

2.

On each end of the SIMM socket there is a silver or plastic tab. Use a screwdriver or a ball point pen to squeeze the tabs toward the outside of the socket while gently nudging the SIMM toward the right side of the unit. The old SIMM should “hinge” to the right and can now be removed.

rear of unit

1. Set SIMM into socket with the notch toward front of unit.

2. Tilt the SIMM up so that both tabs click and lock the

SIMM into place.

Notch

ROM 0

ROM 1

ROM 2

ROM 3

front of unit

238

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Installing Sound SIMMs

Install a New ROM SIMM

1.

Ground yourself by touching a grounded object, then remove the memory SIMM modules from the static protected packaging.

2.

3.

4.

Notice that one end of the SIMM connector is notched. This notch should be oriented towards the keyboard side of the unit. Install the

SIMM closest to the LEFT side first.

(When the rear of the unit is closest to you.)

Gently set the SIMM deep into the SIMM socket at a 45º angle with the notch toward the keyboard. Without forcing the insertion, let the board rest in the socket as deep as it will go. It should rest naturally in place at this 45° angle. See the following diagrams.

While applying a slight downward pressure on the top of the SIMM to keep it from popping out of the socket, tilt the SIMM board into a vertical position. You should hear an audible click. Make sure both sides of the silver tabs have latched.

Reassemble the Unit

5.

Replace the hatch cover and the four screws. The screws are all identical.

Test It

The installation is almost finished.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Turn the unit right-side up and plug in the power cord.

Turn on power.

Place the cursor under the ROM field of the Main screen and turn the data entry control to verify that the new sound ROM has been recognized.

Play the presets on the new ROM banks and verify that they sound OK.

Problems?

1.

2.

Disconnect power immediately.

Open the unit, and try re-seating the ROM SIMMs. Take care that the

RAM SIMMs are properly installed in the sockets. If you’re still having problems, return the unit to its original configuration and call EMU /

ENSONIQ Customer Service at (831) 438-1921. Telephone support hours are 8:00-5:00 PST, Monday through Friday.

MK-6 Operation Manual

239

MIDI

240

E-MU Systems

MIDI Implementation Chart (part 1)

MIDI Channels

Note Numbers

Program Change

Bank Select Response?

Modes: Omni

(Mode 1)

Mono

(Mode 2)

Poly

(Mode 3)

Mode 4

Multi

(Mode 5)

Note On Velocity

Note Off Velocity

Channel Aftertouch

Poly (Key) Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

Active Sensing

System Reset

Tune Request

System Exclusive

Sample Dump Standard

File Dump

MIDI Tuning

Master Volume

Master Balance

Notation Information

Turn GM1 System On

Turn GM2 System On

Turn GM1 System Off

Other

(See Remarks)

NRPNs

RPN 00

(Pitch Bend Sensi.)

RPN 01

(Chan. Fine Tune)

RPN 02

(Chan Coar. Tune)

RPN 03

(Tuning Prog Sel.)

RPN 04

(Tuning Bank Sel.)

RPN 05

(Mod Depth Rang)

MIDI Timing & Sync

MIDI Clock

Song Position Pointer

Song Select

Start

Continue

Stop

MIDI Information Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

1-16

0-127

0-127

No

No

No

No

No

No

MSB + LSB

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

1-16

0-127

0-127

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Appendix

MIDI

MIDI Information Transmitted Recognized Remarks

MIDI Time Code No

MIDI Machine Control No

No MIDI Show Control

Extension Capability

General MIDI Compat?

Is GM default mode?

DLS compatible?

Import DLS Files?

Export DLS Files?

No

No

No

No

No

Import Std MIDI files

Export Std MIDI files

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Appendix

MIDI

MK-6 Operation Manual

241

242

E-MU Systems

Appendix

MIDI

MIDI Implementation Chart (part 2 - Controllers)

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

34

35

36

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Control # Function

0 Bank Select MSB

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Yes Yes

Mod Wheel MSB

Breath Cntrl MSB

Foot Cntrl MSB

Portamento MSB

Data Entry MSB

No

No

Chan Volume MSB Yes

Balance MSB No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

No

Pan MSB Yes

Expression MSB No

Effect Cntrl 1 MSB No

Effect Cntrl 2 MSB No

GenPur Ctrl 1 MSB

Yes

Yes

No

No

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* see note

* see note

*

*

GenPur Ctrl 2 MSB

GenPur Ctrl 3 MSB

GenPur Ctrl 4 MSB

Bank Select LSB

Mod Wheel LSB

Breath Cntrl LSB

Foot Cntrlr LSB

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

*

*

*

*

*

*

* see note

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* Filt Attck

* Filt Decy

*

Appendix

MIDI

66

67

68

69

62

63

64

65

70

71

72

73

74

58

59

60

61

54

55

56

57

50

51

52

53

46

47

48

49

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

Control # Function

37 Portamento LSB

Data Entry LSB

Chan Volume LSB

Balance LSB

Pan LSB

Expression LSB

Effect Cntrl 1 LSB

Effect Cntrl 2 LSB

Gen Pur Ctrl 1 LSB

Gen Pur Ctrl 2 LSB

Gen Pur Ctrl 3 LSB

Gen Pur Ctrl 4 LSB

Transmitted

Sustain Pedal Yes

Portamento on/off No

Sostenuto

Soft Pedal

No

Legato Footswitch

Hold 2

Variation

Timbre/Har Inten

Release Time

Attack Time

Brightness

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Recognized

Yes

No

No

Yes

Remarks

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

MK-6 Operation Manual

243

244

E-MU Systems

Appendix

MIDI

104

105

106

107

100

101

102

103

108

109

110

111

112

96

97

98

99

92

93

94

95

88

89

90

91

84

85

86

87

80

81

82

83

76

77

78

79

Control # Function

75 Sound Cntrlr 6

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Yes Yes

* Decay

Sound Cntrlr 7

Sound Cntrlr 8

Sound Cntrlr 9 ™

Sound Cntrlr 10

Yes

Yes

Yes

Gen Purp Cntrlr 5 Yes

Gen Purp Cntrlr 6

Gen Pur Ctrlr 7 ™

Gen Pur Ctrlr 8

Yes

Yes

Portamento Cntrl

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Effects 1 Depth

Effects 2 Depth

Effects 3 Depth

Effects 4 Depth

Effects 5 Depth

Data Increment

Data Decrement

NRPN (LSB)

NRPN (MSB)

RPN (LSB)

RPN (MSB)

Yes

Yes

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* Vel->Filt

* Vel->amp

See note

See note

*

* Arp Vel

* Arp Gate

*

* Sustain

Appendix

MIDI

Control # Function

113

118

119

120

121

114

115

116

117

All Sound Off

Reset All Contlrs

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

No

No

Yes

Yes

See note

122 Local Cntrl on/off No No

123 All Notes Off No Yes

124

125

126

127

Omni Mode Off

Omni Mode On

Poly Mode Off

Poly Mode On

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

if enabled if enabled if enabled if enabled

NOTES: *

MK-6 can transmit and receive ANY continuous controller number from 1 to 95. Because of MK-6’s powerful synth engine, many of the standard MIDI controllers can be user programmed to provide the desired function. A “Yes” response in this chart means that a controller is programmed by default in MK-6.

Controller 79 is hard-coded to the Mix Output parameter.

0=Use Preset, 1=Send 1, 2=Send 2, 3=Send 3, 4=Send 4

Controller 80 is hard-coded to the Arp Status parameter.

0=Off, 1=On, 2=P (preset), 3=M (master)

Value of 0 = reset all except vol & pan; value of 127 = reset all

Other: Pan: -64 = hard left, +63 = hard right

MK-6 Operation Manual

245

246

E-MU Systems

Appendix

MIDI

Product ID for MK-6 = 0F (15)

MIDI Device Inquiry Responses

Family

MSB 0x04 (Musical Instruments)

LSB 0x04 (ROM Players)

Members

MSB 0x00 (Proteus 2000 series)

LSB 0x02 Audity 2000

0x03 Proteus 2000

0x04 B-3

0x05 XL-1

0x06 Virtuoso 2000

0x07 Mo’Phatt

0x08 B-3 Turbo

0x09 XL-1 Turbo

0x0A Mo’Phatt Turbo

0x0B Planet Earth

0x0C Planet Earth Turbo

0x0D XL-7

0x0E MP-7

0x0F Proteus 2500

0x10 Orbit 3

0x11 PK-6

0x12 XK-6

0x13 MK-6

0x14 Halo

0x15 Proteus 1000

There is only one edit buffer which is used by the current preset (the preset shown in the display). You can edit only one preset at a time via SysEx commands, although these presets can be edited independently of the current preset edited using the Front Panel. Remote Preset selection is independent of the edit buffer. Changing the current preset erases the edit buffer.

Appendix

MIDI

Received Channel

Commands

Channels number (n) = 0-15. Message bytes are represented in hex. All other numbers are decimal. Running Status is supported.

Comments Command

Note Off

Message

8n kk vv

Note On

Program Change

Channel Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

Real-time Controller

Footswitch

Volume

Pan

9n kk vv

Cn vv

Dn vv

En ll mm

Bn cc vv

Bn cc vv

Bn 07 vv

Bn 0A vv

All Sound Off

Reset All Controllers

All Notes Off

Omni Mode Off*

Bn 78 00

Bn 79 00

Bn 7B 00

Bn 7C 00

Omni Mode On* Bn 7D 00

Mono Mode On (Poly Off)* Bn 7E 00

Poly Mode On (Mono Off)* Bn 7F 00

Bank Select MSB Bn 00 bb

Bank Select LSB Bn 20 bb velocity 0 = note off

0-127

0-127 l = lsb, m = msb cc = 00-31, 64-95 cc = 64-79, vv

64 = on

0-127

0=left, 127=right, 64=center turns all sound off ignored in omni mode ignored in omni mode forces all notes & controls off forces all notes & controls off forces all notes & controls off forces all notes & controls off

bb = bank MSB (see page 126) bb = bank LSB (see page 126)

* Special Notes:

• From Omni Mode

........... Omni Off turns Poly On.

• From Poly Mode

............. Omni On turns Omni On; Mono On turns

Mono On.

• From Mono Mode

........... Mono Off turns Poly On; Omni On turns

Omni On.

• From Multi Mode

........... Omni On turns Omni On; Omni Off or Mono

Off turns Poly On; Mono On turns Mono On.

All other changes have no effect.

SysEx Specification

MK-6 contains an extensive set of MIDI SysEx commands.

(Virtually every parameter is controllable via SysEx.)

Because of the size and technical nature of the System Exclusive specification, it is beyond the scope of this manual.

The complete SysEx specification for MK-6 will be available soon on the official E-MU Systems, Inc. web site: www.emu.com

MK-6 Operation Manual

247

Appendix

Technical Specifications

Technical

Specifications

Audio Channels:

MIDI:

MIDI Channels:

Presets:

64

MIDI In, MIDI Out, MIDI Thru

16

512 user presets.

(The number of ROM presets is determined by the sound SIMMs installed.)

Filters:

Audio Outputs:

Submix Inputs:

Max. Output Level:

Output Impedance:

2nd order to 12th order filters

(50 different types)

4 polyphonic analog outputs

2 analog inputs (sum to main outs)

+4 dB

1000 Ohms

Sound Memory:

Data Encoding:

32 MB (expandable to 128 MB)

16-bit linear data

Effects Engine:

24-bit internal processing

Sample Playback Rate:

44.1 kHz

Signal to Noise:

Dynamic Range:

Frequency Response:

THD + Noise:

IMD

Stereo Phase

>92 dB

>90 dB

20 Hz - 20 kHz (+2/-1 dB)

< 0.02% (1kHz sine wave, A-weighting)

< 0.05%

Phase Coherent +/- 1º at 1 kHz

Power Consumption:

Voltage Input:

20 Watts

90VAC-260VAC at 50Hz-60Hz

248

E-MU Systems

Appendix

Warranty

Warranty Please read this warranty, as it gives you specific legal rights.

Limited Warranty

Warranty

Restrictions

This product is warranted, to the original consumer purchaser, to be free of all defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year

(warranty period is two (2) years in the European Union, effective Jan-1-

2002), from the date of such purchase from an authorized E-MU/ ENSONIQ dealer, provided that: (a) the Warranty Registration Card is filled out and returned to E-MU / ENSONIQ within 14 days of the purchase date; (b) the

E-MU / ENSONIQ service center is provided a copy of the consumer purchaser’s sales receipt; and (c) E-MU / ENSONIQ has confirmed the validity of the subject unit's serial number.

Specifically, but without limitation, E-MU / ENSONIQ does not provide warranty service for:

Damages due to improper or inadequate maintenance, accident, abuse, misuse, alteration, unauthorized repairs, tampering, or failure to follow normal operating procedures as outlined in the owner’s manual;

Deterioration or damage of the cabinet;

Damages occurring during any shipment of the unit;

Any unit which has been modified by anyone other than

E-MU / ENSONIQ.

Any unit with an invalid or wholly or partially obliterated serial number.

NO OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY IS MADE, AND E-MU /

ENSONIQ SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF

MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. E-MU / ENSONIQ’S LIABILITY UNDER

WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE UNIT, OR

REFUND, AT EMU’S OPTION. IN NO EVENT WILL E-MU / ENSONIQ BE

LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUE OR SAVINGS, LOSS OF TIME, INTER-

RUPTION OF USE, OR ANY OTHER CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES.

The foregoing will apply notwithstanding the failure of essential purpose of any remedy provided herein. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties or conditions, or limitations on how long an implied warranty or condition may last, so the above limitations may not apply.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

MK-6 Operation Manual

249

Appendix

Warranty

How To Obtain

Warranty Service

All E-MU / ENSONIQ products are manufactured with the highest standards of quality. If you find that your unit does require service, it may be done by any authorized E-MU / ENSONIQ service center. If you are unable to locate a service center in your area, please contact EMU’s Service Department at

(831) 438-1921. They will either refer you to an authorized service center in your area or ask that you return your unit to the E-MU / ENSONIQ factory.

When returning your unit to the E-MU / ENSONIQ factory, you will be issued a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number. Please label all cartons, shipping documents and correspondence with this number.

E-MU / ENSONIQ suggests you carefully and securely pack your unit for return to the factory. (Do not send the power cord or operation manual.)

Send the unit to E-MU Systems, Inc., 1600 Green Hills Road, Scotts Valley,

CA 95066. You must pre-pay shipping charges to E-MU / ENSONIQ.

E-MU / ENSONIQ will pay return shipping charges. You will be responsible for any damage or loss sustained during shipment in any direction.

3/99

250

E-MU Systems

Index

Symbols

“+” modulation polarity

158

“±” modulation polarity

158

Numerics

19-tone tuning

168

1-bar trigger 51

2-pole filters

120

4-pole filters

120

6-pole filters

120

A

A effect types

175, 176

Absolute Value Processor

109

AC Receptacle 14

ADSR Envelopes

201

Aftertouch calibration

80

mono

101

on/off

74

Algorithm

FXA

177, 178

FXB

177, 179

master FXA 89

master FXB

90

All Layers

129, 131

All Notes Off, MIDI

31

All Sound Off, MIDI command

31

Alternate Tunings

92, 168

Amount

patchcord

124, 157

Amplifier 141

Amplitude

148, 201

envelope

142

modulation

100

Arpeggiator

39

button

31

channel

39

controllers 58 copy pattern 191

Index

Symbols

copy settings

190, 191 delay 63, 64 extension 58 extension count

62 extension interval

62 factory patterns 60 gate 58 time

61

guided tour 24

interval 58 key offset

68 key range

66 keyboard thru 65 latch mode 65 master parameters

58

MIDI out

56

MIDI song start 56 modes 57, 59 note value

60, 64 pattern

57, 60 naming 70 speed

60 resolution 58 status

59 user patterns

67 velocity 58, 61

Assign Group

146

Attack

envelope

143, 152, 159, 205

Audition beats

46

button 32

preset 20

riff

171

Auxiliary Envelope 103, 152

B

B Effect Types

175, 176

Balance

123

Band-Pass Filter

119, 148

Bandwidth

121

Bank Number 21, 37

Bank Select Display

31

Banks

21

selecting 37

selecting via MIDI

38

Base Tempo

82

Basic Channel

46 setting keyboard & wheels to

72

Basic Setup

14

Basics, programming

99

Beats 43, 46 busy

49

control knob 23

MK-6 Operation Manual

251

Index

C

252

E-MU Systems channel

46 initial setup 47 keys layout 51 keys offset

52 part chart

22

part group 54 part transpose 53 part velocity

52 played using trigger buttons

44, 76

playing 22

playing on a different MIDI channel

23

presets, selecting

22

riffs 44 variation 50 control knob

23

velocity group 1-4 49 xpose group 1-4 49

Bend Range

84

Breath Controller

80

Bts Busy 49

Button

+/- channel

29

arpeggiator/beats

31

audition

31 compare 31

controllers

30

cursor

30

demo mode 35

global

30

home/enter

32, 43, 71, 83, 93

main

34

MIDI 31

MIDI panic

31

mix screen

34

mode select

36

multi

34

preset edit 32

save/copy

31, 187

C

Calibrate Controllers

80

Category instrument

40

preset

40

Center Frequency

121

Change

filter type

205

MIDI preset 95

preset

21, 37

Channel

+/- buttons

29

aftertouch on/off

74

arpeggiator

39

MIDI enable 94

pan

39

selection, MIDI

37

volume

38

Chorus

175, 185

width 199

Chorus, effect

185

Chorusing

144, 199

Clear Beats Part 44, 45

Clock divisor

101

MIDI output enable

94

modulation

107

using external MIDI

82

Coarse Tuning

141, 198

Comb Filter

149

Comb Filter, effect

176, 185

Command Buttons external preset selection

78

preset menu jump keys

36

selecting presets

77

trigger mode

36

Command Functions

36

Compare Button

31

Connection Instructions

14

Continuous Controller

124

Contour, envelope

101, 143

Control

data entry 29

effects multi mode

88

keys

45 volume

29

Controller

assigning real-time

94

calibration

80

footswitch

14, 15, 80

knobs

32, 33, 79, 125

modes

32

menu

71

menu button

30

MIDI

79, 124

MIDI #10

39

MIDI #7 38, 124

MIDI real-time

124

quick edit

33

realtime assignment 79

realtime knobs

32

standardized MIDI numbers

80

tempo

81

trigger buttons

72

Copy layers 188 patchcord 189 preset

188 preset banks

191 preset patchcords 190

Crossfade random

102

ranges

137

Current Tempo

82

Cursor

buttons 30

definition

30

Curve

glide

147

keyboard velocity

73

master velocity

85

volume

199

Cutoff Frequency

119, 202

D

Damping, high frequency

176, 184

Data Entry Control

29

DC Offset, example

116

DCA

123, 207

Decay effect A

90, 176

effects

176

envelope

199

Default Assignment, beats

45

Delay arpeggiator

63, 64 effect B

91

effects

175, 176, 186

layer

144

LFO

156

master FXB

91

preset link

170

Demo Sequences

19, 35

Descending Arpeggiator

57

Destinations, modulation

108, 159

Device ID

96

Diode Processor

110

Display, viewing angle

92

Distortion Effect 175, 186

Double & Detune

144, 199

Doubling, effect

185

Dual Channel Beats

46

Dual Tap, delay effect

186

Duration, arp pattern 69

Dynamic Filter

117

Dynamic Range

248

E

Echo Thru, Local Control on/off

72

Edit All Layers Enable

92

Edit Section

30

Index

D

Editing arp user patterns 67 presets

197

Effects

A type

175

B into effect A

182

B submix routing 91

B type

175

busses

173

by channel number

182 channel number setup 182

chorus

185

decay

176

delay

176, 186

description 184

diagram

161, 162, 164

distortion

186

doubling

185

dual tap delay

186

feedback 176, 186

flanger

185

FXA decay

90

FXA HF damping

90

FXB feedback

91

FxB->FxA

90, 177

global

181

HF damping 176

LFO rate

91, 176

master

173, 178, 181

A algorithm

89

B algorithm

90

FxB->FxA

178

LFO rate

91

mode, bypass 180

multi mode control

88, 180

panning delay

186

patchcords

165

preset 161, 177

processor

173

programming in the preset

177

returns

17

reverb

184

routing diagram 87

send amounts

173

sends

86

slapback

185

stereo delay

186

submix routing, A

90, 164, 165

type A

89, 163, 175, 176

type B

91, 164, 176

vibrato

186

wrong effect playing with beats

23

Enable

controllers menu

71

MIDI channels

94

quick-edit mode

79

Enter Button

32

MK-6 Operation Manual

253

Index

F

254

E-MU Systems

Envelope

ADSR, programming 201

attack

143, 152, 159

auxiliary

152

decay

199

filter

151, 203, 204, 206

generator

101, 103

example

120

mode, factory 200

mode, filter

204

release

199

repeat

206

repeating

104

reverberation

184

volume

142, 143, 199, 201

Equal Temperment Tuning

168

Errors, data transmission

97

Extension count, arpeggiator 62 interval, arpeggiator

62

External Clock, MIDI

82

F

Factory

envelope mode

200

patterns, arpeggiator 60

Fc

150, 202

Feedback

176, 186

FXB

91

Fills, beats 44

Filter

2-4-6 pole

120

bandpass

119, 148

changing type 205

comb 149, 176

definition

118

dynamic

117

envelope

103, 151, 203, 204

attack

205

envelope generator

151, 206

envelope mode 204

frequency

150, 151, 159, 202

highpass

118, 202

lowpass

118

mode

204

morph

122

notch

119

parametric

121

pole 120

programming

202

Q

150, 202

swept EQ

121

troubleshooting

207

tutorial

117

type

202, 205

changing

205

Z-plane

122, 123, 148

Fine Tuning

141, 198

Fingered Glide. solo mode

146

First Key, modulation 112

Flanger Effect 175, 185

Flashing Arp/Beats LED

82

Flip-Flop Processor

110

Foot Pedal calibration

80

Footswitch 80, 101

connecting

14, 15

programming

74

Free Running LFO

154

Frequency filter

151, 159

center 121

cutoff

119

instrument 140, 141

Frequency Modulation

100

Front Panel Knobs

32, 209

FX Cords

165

FXA Algorithm

177, 178

FXA Parameters

164

FXB -> FXA

177, 178, 182

FXB Algorithm

164, 177, 179

master

90

FXB Parameters

165

FXB Submix Routing

91

G

Gain Processor 110

Gamelan Tuning

168

Gate

101

time 61

Generator

envelope 101

filter envelope

151, 206

noise & random

101

volume envelope

142

Glide

147 curve 147

key

101

rate

101, 147

Global

button

30

controller assignments

79

effects 178, 181

menu

83

Grooves, beat

44

Group assigning channels to a

146

beats 44

Index

H

H

High Frequency Damping

90, 176, 184

Highpass Filter

118, 202

Home Position 21

Home/Enter Button

32, 43, 71, 83, 93

I

Implementation Chart, MIDI

240, 242

Initial pan position

141

volume

141

Instrument 123, 197

category

40

selecting

132

Inverting LFO Waves

106

J

Jump Buttons

preset edit menu 36

using

197

Just C Tuning

168

description

169

Just Intonation

168

K

Key

glide

101

layout, beats

51 offset, arpeggiator 68 range arpeggiator

66

keyboard 134

preset link

170

sync, arpeggiator 63 transpose

140

trigger

51

tuning 92

velocity

101

Keyboard beats trigger layouts 44

key

101

layering & splitting

208

pressure 101

range

133, 134

semitone transpose

72

splitting

208

thru, arpeggiator 65 transpose

140

on/off

145

tuning 168

19-tone 168

equal temperment

168

gamelan

168 just C

168

Kirnberger

168 repeating octave

168

Scarlatti

168

Vallotti

168

Werkmeister III

168

velocity curve 73

velocity curve diagrams 230

Keyboard/Knob Channel

72

Kirnberger Tuning

168

Knob controller

125

keyboard channel

72

typical functions 209

Knob Preset Quick-Edit

79

Knobs Output MIDI

94

L

Lag Amount, preset lag

111

Lag Processor

109

Latch beats part

51 keys in beats 44 mode, arpeggiator 65

triggers

36

Layer copy

188 definition

130

instrument 99

presets

208

selecting

131

Legato 145

LFO

153

effect B 91

flanger

186

key sync

154

master FXB rate

91

rate

176

rate, effect

91

tricks & tips

154

trigger

106

variation

156

waveforms

105

waveshape

153

Linking Presets

170, 208

Local Control On/Off

72, 74, 75

Looping Envelopes

104

Low Frequency Oscillator

101, 105, 153

delay

156

free running

154

sync

153, 154

variation

156

Lowpass Filter

118

example

120

MK-6 Operation Manual

255

Index

M

256

E-MU Systems

M

Main Button

34

Master arpeggiator

24

parameters 58 bend range

84

clock

current tempo 82

modulation

106

effects

88, 173, 178, 181

FXA algorithm

89

FXB algorithm

90

riff 46, 54 tempo, offset

171

velocity curve

85

volume control

29

Melody Solo Mode

high

145 last 145

low

145

MIDI

A-P assignments 79

bank select display

20, 31

channel routing outputs by

86

tempo controller

81

channel inc/dec using a footswitch

74

channel selection

37

clock output enable

94

continuous controller assignment

79

continuous controllers

101, 124

controller #7

38

device ID

96

enable 94

external clock

82

footswitch assign

74, 80

implementation chart

240, 242

in channels

94

input channels

94

knob transmit

94

menu button

31

mode

94, 173

multi mode

98

note triggers

36, 75, 76

omni mode

98

out, arp/beats 56 out, knob enable

94

pan control #10

39

panic button

31

poly mode

98

real-time controllers

124

receive program change

95

received channel commands

247

receiving sysex data

98

recording sysex data

98 send sysex data 98

sequencer, recording into an external

72

song start 56

standardized controller numbers 80

sysex packet delay

97

sysex, send/receive

97, 98

velocity curve input

85

curve output

73

Minimoog, solo mode

146

Mix Output 160

description

86

function

174

programmed in the preset

160

Mix Screen

34

Mod Wheel

101

Mode arpeggiator

59 latch 65 controller

32

effects 180

factory envelope

200

filter envelope

204

MIDI

94, 173

mono

247

multi 98, 173, 247

non-transpose

145

omni

98, 180, 247 poly 98, 180, 247

solo

145

time-based envelope

204

Modulation 158

amplitude

100

clock

107

definition

100

destinations

108

note-on

108

polarity

158

processors 109, 113

random

102

routing

157

sources

101

sources & destinations 159

wheel 80

calibration

80

Momentary Footswitch 14

Mono Aftertouch

101

Mono A-I, assign group

146

Mono Mode

247

Morph Filter 122

Multi Button

34

Multi Channel

arpeggiators 26

Index

N

Multi Mode

98, 173, 247

effects control

88

Multichannel Volume/Pan Control

34

Multiple Trigger, solo mode

145

Multisetup definition

34, 41

name 42

restoring

41

saving

42

send/receive

97

Mute Beats 44, 45

N

Name multisetup

42

preset

130

user arp pattern

70

Noise & Random Generators

101

Non-Transpose Mode

145

Notch Filter

119

Note Value arpeggiator

60, 64

Note-On Modulation

108

O

Offset, arpeggiator key

68

Omni Mode 98, 180, 247

Output jack

14, 15, 16

jacks

17

mix 86, 160, 174

mono

14

routing

160

Overall Tuning, adjusting

84

P

Packet Delay, MIDI sysex 97

Pan

123

channel

39

initial

141

preset link

170

Panic Button, MIDI

31

Panning Delay, effect

186

Parametric Filters 121

Part, beat

44

Patchcord

102, 157

amount

124, 157

copy 189

example

113

routing

108

Pattern arpeggiator

57, 60 naming

70 repeat 69 speed

60 user

67 velocity 69 inc/dec

using a footswitch

74

Pedal

101

connection

14, 15

programming

75

wiring diagram

15

Performance Controllers

32, 36, 101

Pink Noise, example

115

Pitch Wheel

101

calibration

80

master bend range

84

range

160

Pitch, shifting

198

Pitchbend Range

160

Play solo layers

171

trigger buttons

76, 77, 78

Polarity modulation & LFO

158

ramp rate

112

Pole, filter

120

Poly All, assign group

146

Poly Mode

98, 180, 247

Poly, assign group

146

Portamento

147

Power Consumption

248

Power Switch

14, 29

Preset

architecture

130

audition

20

category

21, 40

change enable

95

changing

21

copy 188 edit button

32

editing

197

effects

161, 177

links

170, 171, 208

menu jump buttons

36

MIDI changes

95

naming

130

random 195

selecting 20, 37

selecting via command buttons

36,

77

tempo offset 171

user

97

view screen

37

Preset Lag Processor

111

Preset Ramp Processor

111

MK-6 Operation Manual

257

Index

Q

258

E-MU Systems

Processor

4x gain

110

absolute value

109

diode

110

effect

173

flip-flop

110

modulation

113

preset lag

111 preset ramp 111

quantizer

110

Program Change receive enable

95

Program->Preset Map

95

send/receive

97

Programmable Knobs

79

Programming Basics

99

Q

Q

119, 149, 150, 202, 205

Quantized, arp sync

63

Quantizer

110, 116

example

115

Quick Edit enabling

79

mode

33

R

Ramp Rate

112

Random creating presets 195

crossfade

102

crosswitch

138

generator, noise and

101

modulation sources 102

Range arp extension count 62

key

133, 134 keyboard

133

pitchbend

160

velocity

135

Rate effect, LFO

91, 176

glide

147

LFO

154

master FXB LFO 91

Rate/Level Envelopes

103

Realtime Control of Arps 58

Realtime Controller

72

assignment

79, 94

crossfading

137

tutorial

124

Realtime Crossfade

137

Receive Program Change

95

Receiving MIDI SysEx Data

98

Record

MIDI sysex data

98

Rectifier

109

Release

envelope

199

velocity

101

Rename, arpeggiator pattern

70

Repeat arpeggiator pattern

69

Resonance, filter

119, 149, 150, 205

Restoring Multisetups

41

via MIDI command

41

Return Signal

16

Reverb

175, 184

envelope 184

Riff assignment

171

controllers

55 playing

20, 31

tempo 55

ROM Card Identifier

21

Routing

FXA submix

90, 164, 165

FXB submix 91

modulation

157

output

86, 160, 173

S

Save arp menu parameters

41

arp parameters 43 controllers menu parameters

41

global menu parameters

41

MIDI menu parameters

41

multiple arp setup 28

multisetup

42

preset

187 preset/volume/pan/arp assignments

41

Save/Copy

button 31, 187

menu

187

Scaling

MIDI Velocity In

85

MIDI Velocity Out

73

Scarlatti Tuning

168

Screen View Buttons 34

Screen Viewing Angle

92

Selecting menus with jump buttons

197

presets

20, 37

using command buttons

36, 77

Semitone, transpose keyboard by

72

Index

T

Send amount

173

FXA

90, 164, 165

FXB

91

effect

86

preset effect 160

Setup basic

14

performance

15

studio 16

Signal Path 123, 173

Slapback

185

Solo Layer 171

Solo Mode 145

Sound Navigator

40

selecting instruments

132

Sound Start 144

Sources, modulation

159

Specifications, technical

248

Split Keyboard 170, 208

using links

208

Stack layers

135

presets 170

Standardized MIDI Controller

Numbers

80, 242

Start/Stop Beats

44, 45

Step-By-Step Preset Programming 197

Stereo Delay, effect 186

Stolen Voices

146

Studio Setup

16

Sub Output Jacks

17

Submix Routing

FXB

91

Summing Amp 109, 110

Summing Nodes

100

Swept EQ Filter

121

Switch Processor

109, 113

Sync arp key

63

LFO

153, 154

MIDI song start 56

Synth Solo Mode

high 146

last 145

low

146

System Exclusive device ID

96

packet delay

97

send arp data 66 send data

98

T

Tap Tempo

82

using a footswitch 74

Technical Specifications

248

Tempo

base

82

change via MIDI controller

81

controller

81

offset

171

Tempo-based Envelope

104, 142, 151,

200

Time arpeggiator gate

61

master FXB delay 91

Time-based Envelope

103, 142, 151, 200,

204

Transmission Errors

97

Transmit MIDI Clock

94

Transmit MIDI, knob

94

Transpose

84, 140, 141

arpeggiator

62 beat part

53

keyboard 72

preset link 170

Trig Hold, beats

45

Trigger Buttons

75, 76

controlling multiple arps 22, 26

Trigger Channel

46

Trigger Key 44

Trigger Mode

36, 76, 77, 78

Troubleshooting

207

Tune

84

Tuning 141, 198

19-tone

168

coarse 198

equal temperment

168

fine

198

gamelan

168 just C 168

key

92

keyboard

168

Kirnberger

168 repeating octave 168

Scarlatti

168

Vallotti

168

Werkmeister

168

Tutorial arpeggiator

24

beats

22

filter

117

synth programming

197

MK-6 Operation Manual

259

Index

U

260

E-MU Systems

U

Unlatch Beats Part

51

User

banks

21

key tuning

92

presets 97

tuning tables

92

User Pattern arpeggiator

67 naming

70 repeat 69 velocity 69

V

Vallotti Tuning 168

Variation beats

50

LFO

156

Velocity arpeggiator

61

crossfade 135, 136

curve, keyboard

73

curve, master

85

key

101

keyboard curve charts

230

master curve charts 233

preset link

170

release

101

user pattern 69

Vibrato, effect processor

186

Viewing Angle, screen 92

Voices, stolen 146

Volume channel

38

control

29

control #7

38

curve

199

envelope

103, 123, 142, 143, 199, 201

preset link

170

W

Waveform

instrument list 221

inverting

106

LFO

105

Werkmeister Tuning

168

Wheel modulation

101

pitch

101

Width, chorus

199

Z

Z-Plane Filter

122, 123, 148

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents